1696 Technical V2.2

Technical Handbook
Alcatel 1696MSPAN
32 + 32 Channels DWDM System & Compact shelf
1696MSPAN REL.2.2
3AL 95278 AAAA Ed.01
3AL 95278 AAAA Ed.01
1696MSPAN REL.2.2 TECHNICAL HDBK
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HANDBOOK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Product-release handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Handbook Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 Handbook configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01 Proposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 First aid for electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.4 Harmful Optical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.5 Risks of Explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.6 Moving Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.7 Heatradiating Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.8 Specific safety rules in this handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 General Norms Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2 General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.3 General Norms Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Suggestions, notes and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 11 13 13 13 14 17 18 18 18 19 19 20 21 21 23 23 24 25 26 28 28 29 30 31 31 31 32 32 33 34
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
041015 DATE CHANGE NOTE
D. LESTERLIN F. BRUYERE A.MICHAUD APPRAISAL AUTHORITY 1696MS Rel.2.2 Technical Handbook
C. GIANNI ORIGINATOR
ED
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 1 / 390
4.4 Labels affixed to the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Handbook supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 Handbook Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.2 Changes due to a new product-release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 Customer documentation supply on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.2 Use of the CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.3 CDROM identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.4 CDROM updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FUNCTIONAL DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Equipment basic configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1 Line terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.2 Booster + Preamplifier Line terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.3 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM) or backtoback terminal (hub) . . . . . . . . . 1.1.4 OADM or backtoback terminal (hub) repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.5 In line repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.6 Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Network architectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 Pointtopoint links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2 Ring networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.3 Host systems (ADM..) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Protection scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Rack design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 1696MS shelf physical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 1696MS Empty shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 1696MS Shelf configuration rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3 1696MS Part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4 1696MS shelf front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 1696MS_C (compact shelf) physical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 1696MS_C Empty shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2 1696MS_C Shelf configuration rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.3 1696MS_C Part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Equipment connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.1 Optical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.2 Management and maintenance connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.3 Power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.4 User interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Units front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.1 Tributaries front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.2 Multiplexers front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.3 Optical amplifiers front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.4 Controller front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.5 Switching protection, power supply and fans front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34 45 51 51 51 51 52 52 52 53 53 54 54 54 55 57 59 59 60 61 62 63 63 64 64 64 67 68 69 70 71 71 73 75 88 89 90 92 94 108 109 111 111 111 112 113 119 127 128 138
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 2 / 390
3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1 Transponder subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.2 TDM client signal concentrator (4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P) subsystem . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3 Wavelength Division Multiplexing subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.4 Optical Fiber Amplification subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.5 Optical supervisory channel (OSC) subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.6 Automatic Power Equalization (APE) subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.7 Controller subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.8 Power supply subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.9 Protection subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.10 Performance Monitoring subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 Configuration criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.2 1696MS (main shelf) configurations examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3 1696 MS_C (Compact Shelf) configurations examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.4 1696MS configured to connect a CPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.5 Two 1696MS or 1696MS_C rings connected together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 UNITS DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 Multirate Channel Card I (MCC1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2 Multirate Channel Card II (MCC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.3 Multirate Channel Card III (MCC3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.4 MCC_RGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.5 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card (OCC10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.6 4xANY, 4xANY_S and 4xANY_P cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.7 Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP) optical modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.8 Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Multiplexers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 OMDX unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 OADM units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 SPV_F_1310_1550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 SPV_F_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Optical Amplifier (OAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Way of working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3 Optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.4 Optical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 ESC board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Supervision units (SPVM2, SPVM_H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.3 Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card (OSMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.4 1696MS_C Master Intershelf Link (ILINK_M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.5 1696MS_C Slave Intershelf Link (ILINK_S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 General user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 LAN board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 HouseKeeping board (HK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3 Rack Alarm Interface (RAI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4 User Interfaces Card (UIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 Switching Protection (OPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1 Single and Multi Mode Optical Protection Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Power Supply Card (PSC/PSC3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 Power Supply Card (PSC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143 143 147 151 152 157 158 160 162 167 169 175 177 177 179 198 213 217 221 221 221 233 246 251 252 263 267 269 271 271 275 279 280 282 282 286 289 289 290 290 291 295 297 298 299 300 302 302 305 306 306 308 308
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 3 / 390
5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 1696MSPAN System characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.1 Main system characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Safety requirements and mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Optical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Boards interfaces characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Tributaries optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2 Multiplexer units (OMDX) optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.3 Multiplexer units (OADM) optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.4 Mux/Demux 13101550 + supervision unit optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.5 SPV_F_C unit optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.6 Optical Amplifier Card (OAC) optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.7 SPVM + OW and SPVM_H optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.8 OSMC optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.9 Optical Protection Cards (OPC) optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Alarm characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 Power supply characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1 Maximum power consumption of the boards and units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.1 Maximum weight of the boards and units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 Environmental characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7.1 EMC/EMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7.2 Environmental constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 Maintenance introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1 General safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.2 General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.3 Maintenance aspects: definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.4 Instruments And Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.1 Routine Maintenance every six months . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.2 Routine Maintenance every year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.3 Routine Maintenance every five years . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.1 Fault location: alarm & status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 Set of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.1 Suggested Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.2 General rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.3 Particular rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 Repair Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
315 315 315 323 323 323 331 331 344 348 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 360 360 361 361 362 362 364 371 373 373 373 373 374 374 375 375 377 377 378 379 381 381 381 381 381 383 385
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNIT DOCUMENTATION LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 4 / 390
4.9 Power Management Unit (PMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.1 Batteries for PMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 FANS unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.1 FANC unit for 1696MS shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.2 FAN_C unit for 1696MS_C shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
309 310 312 312 313
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

FIGURES Figure 1. Subrack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Figure 2. Subrack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Figure 3. Subrack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Figure 4. Labels on units with standard cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Figure 5. Modules label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Figure 6. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Figure 7. Back panels internal label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Figure 8. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Figure 9. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Figure 10. Item identification labels item on catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Figure 11. Label identifying the equipment (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Figure 12. The 1696MSPAN in line terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Figure 13. The 1696MSPAN in Booster + Preamplifier Line Terminal (1 x OAC) configuration . . 60 Figure 14. The 1696MSPAN in Booster + Preamplifier Line Terminal (2 x OACs) configuration . 60 Figure 15. The 1696MSPAN in OADM configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Figure 16. The 1696MSPAN in backtoback terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Figure 17. The 1696MSPAN in OADM repeater (1 OAC west side + 1 OAC east side) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Figure 18. The 1696MSPAN in OADM repeater (2 OACs west side + 2 OACs east side) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Figure 19. The 1696MSPAN in repeater configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Figure 20. Pointtopoint link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Figure 21. Ring configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Figure 22. Interconnected rings with data on customer ports and supervision carried by Optical Supervision Channel (OSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Figure 23. Interconnected rings with data on customer ports and LAN_Q management transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Figure 24. CPE configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Figure 25. Connection to host equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Figure 26. Optical SNCP protection scheme: with backtoback terminals or OADM . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Figure 27. Optical SNCP way of working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Figure 28. Rack organization, 32 channel bidirectional terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Figure 29. Shelf dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Figure 30. Typical fully equipped shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Figure 31. Example of Master shelf front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Figure 32. Shelf front view with cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Figure 33. 1696MS_C Rack version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Figure 34. 1696MS_C Table version with and without cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Figure 35. 1696 MS_C Mechanical structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Figure 36. 1696 MS_C Main shelf board arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Figure 37. Typical 1696MS_C equipped shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Figure 38. Fan_C board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Figure 39. Simple MU optical connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Figure 40. Double MU optical connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Figure 41. LC/SPC optical connector on SFP modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Figure 42. MCC1 and MCC2 boards Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Figure 43. MCC3 board Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Figure 44. OCC10 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Figure 45. 4 ANY front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Figure 46. MVAC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 5 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 47. SFP optical module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Figure 48. OMDX8100_M_L1_XS board front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Figure 49. OMDX8100_M_L2/S2/S1 boards front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Figure 50. OADM8100_M_L1_S (L2/S1/S2) boards front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Figure 51. OADM4100_M_chxxyy_S boards front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Figure 52. OADM2100_M_xx_yy_S board front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Figure 53. OADM1100_M_xx_S board front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Figure 54. SPV_F_1310_1550 board front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Figure 55. SPV_F_C board front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Figure 56. OAC1, OAC2, OAC1_L and OAC2_L front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Figure 57. ESC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Figure 58. SPVM2 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Figure 59. SPVM_H front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Figure 60. OSMC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Figure 61. ILink_M board front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Figure 62. ILink_S board front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Figure 63. LAN boards front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Figure 64. Housekeeping board front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Figure 65. RAI front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Figure 66. UIC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Figure 67. OPC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Figure 68. PSC/PSC2/PSC3 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Figure 69. PMU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Figure 70. FANs front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Figure 71. Functional synopsis in Line Terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Figure 72. Functional synopsis in OADM configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Figure 73. Functional synopsis in Repeater configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Figure 74. Line terminal transponder function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Figure 75. Backtoback terminal or OADM transponder function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Figure 76. Principle of the 4xANY TDM concentration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Figure 77. 4 and 8 channels optical MUXes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Figure 78. LB and SB aggregate signals expansion MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Figure 79. 4 and 8 channels optical DMUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Figure 80. LB and SB aggregate signals expansion MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Figure 81. MUX and DMUX functions of an 8 channels Line Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Figure 82. MUX and DMUX functions of a 12 channels Line Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Figure 83. MUX and DMUX functions of a 32 channels Line Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Figure 84. MUX and DMUX functions of an 8 channels OADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Figure 85. MUX and DMUX functions of a 32 channels backtoback terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Figure 86. 1696MSPAN in backtoback terminal configuration and with a remote channel . . . . . 156 Figure 87. OFA subsystem in line terminal or OADM configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Figure 88. OFA subsystem in repeater configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Figure 89. Optical Supervisory Channel management in Line Terminal, OADM, OADM repeater and InLineRepeater Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Figure 90. Automatic Power Equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Figure 91. Controller subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Figure 92. Example of control interfaces scheme in 1696MS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Figure 93. Example of control interfaces scheme in 1696MS_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Figure 94. 1696MSPAN equipment power supply scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Figure 95. Channel level protection in a ring network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Figure 96. OSNCP principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Figure 97. Optical SNCP with MCC units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Figure 98. Optical SNCP of the MCC associated with the 4xANY (MCC4xANY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Figure 99. Optical SNCP with OCC10 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 6 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 100. Optical SNCP of the MCC associated with the 4xANY (4xANY client protection) . . . . 173 Figure 101. Correspondance between OPC slots allocation and 4xANY drawers in protection . . . 174 Figure 102. Two possible monitored sections by the MCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Figure 103. Example of starting configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Figure 104. 4 channels OADM board used as a terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Figure 105. 4 channels terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Figure 106. Example of 8 channels line terminal with expansion and supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Figure 107. Example of 8 channels line terminal with supervision (no expansion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Figure 108. Example of a 16 channels terminal with expansion and SPV upgradability . . . . . . . . . 183 Figure 109. Example of a 32 channels terminal + SPV + two stages OAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Figure 110. 32 channels terminal + SPV + 2 stages OAC configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Figure 111. 4 channels backtoback terminal / OADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Figure 112. 8 OADM protected channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Figure 113. 8 channels OADM with EXP and SPV capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Figure 114. 8 channels OADM with supervision upgrade capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Figure 115. 8 West / 4 East channels OADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Figure 116. 12 channels OADM with supervision and without expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Figure 117. 16 channels OADM with supervision and without expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Figure 118. 16 channels OADM with supervision and expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Figure 119. 32 protected channels backtoback with supervision and one OAC per side . . . . . . . 194 Figure 120. Repeater with supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Figure 121. 4 x ANY node without drawers protection configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Figure 122. 4 x ANY node with drawers protection configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Figure 123. 8channel terminal with SPV and OAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Figure 124. 12channel terminal without SPV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Figure 125. OADM 4 channels protected backtoback with supervision and OAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Figure 126. Remote 4xANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Figure 127. Remote MCC or MCC+4xANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Figure 128. Unprotected remote MCC or MCC+4xANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Figure 129. One protected transponderon the same fiber (2 channel wavelengths) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Figure 130. Backtoback 4XANY intended to drop some of the carried services and bypass the others. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Figure 131. Remote unprotected MCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Figure 132. OADM 1 channel protected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Figure 133. Remote Spur 4xANY + protected MCC on 1310 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Figure 134. Remote Spur 4xANY + protected MCC on 1550 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Figure 135. 2 channels Line Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Figure 136. Remote CPE, 2channel terminal: MCC + 4xANY with drawers protection . . . . . . . . . 211 Figure 137. SPV Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Figure 138. 1696MS connected to a CPE through a supervised blackandwhite signal . . . . . . . . 213 Figure 139. 1696MS connected to a CPE through a supervised blackandwhite and colored signal and protected in the ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Figure 140. 1696MS connected to a CPE through a supervised blackandwhite and colored signal and unprotected in the ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Figure 141. Optical channel optically passed through the NE without being regenerated. . . . . . . . 216 Figure 142. Optical channel optically passed through the NE without being regenerated and with OSC insertion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Figure 143. Interconnection of two rings with a 1696MS and a 1696MS_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Figure 144. Two 1696MS rings connected together through user interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Figure 145. Two 1696MS rings connected together through user interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Figure 146. Block diagram of the MCC1 boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Figure 147. MCC in default configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Figure 148. Drop / Insert without OpticalSNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Figure 149. Drop / Insert with OpticalSNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 7 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 150. PassThrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 151. Local LoopBack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 152. Remote LoopBack in ring application (backtoback or OADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 153. User LoopBack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 154. User LoopBack & passthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 155. Remote LoopBack in ring application (backtoback or OADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 156. Block diagram of the MCC2 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 157. MCC2 in default configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 158. Drop / Insert without OpticalSNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 159. Drop / Insert with OpticalSNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 160. Passthrough (regeneration configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 161. Local LoopBack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 162. Remote LoopBack in ring application (backtoback or OADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 163. User LoopBack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 164. User LoopBack & passthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 165. Remote LoopBack in ring application (backtoback or OADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 166. Block diagram of the MCC3 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 167. OCC10 unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 168. Drop / Insert without OpticalSNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 169. Dropinsert (UNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 170. Drop / Insert with OpticalSNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 171. Passthrough (NNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 172. Regeneration (two passthrough linked by 10G backpanel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 173. Dropinsert remote loopback (UNI) in ring application (backtoback or OADM) . . . Figure 174. Local LoopBack (UNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 175. User LoopBack (UNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 176. 4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 177. SFP modules general block diagram (with PIN photodetector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 178. MVAC unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 179. Example of MVAC location in the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 180. OMDX8100_M_L1_XS: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 181. OMDX8100_M_L1_X: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 182. OMDX8100_M_L2 , OMDX8100_M_S1 , OMDX8100_M_S2 : block diagram . . . . . . . Figure 183. OADM8: blockdiagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 184. OADM4: blockdiagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 185. Block diagram of the OADM2100_M_xx_S unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 186. OADM1100: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 187. Block diagram of the SPV_F_1310_1550 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 188. Block diagram of the SPV_F_C unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 189. Position of SPV_F_C unit in a transmission line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 190. Amplifier boards blockdiagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 191. Optical amplifiers configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 192. Span variation compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 193. Amplifier tuning for number of channels changes (previous span loss constant) . . . . . Figure 194. SPVM2 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 195. SPVM board in a Line Terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 196. SPVM board in an OADM or BackToBack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 197. OMSC block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 198. OSMC connection (measured points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 199. ILink_M block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 200. ILink_S block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 201. Electrical access, slot description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 202. Block diagram of control LAN board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 203. LAN board settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
226 228 229 229 230 231 233 236 237 238 239 241 241 242 243 244 246 252 256 256 257 258 258 260 261 261 265 268 269 270 271 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 285 286 286 288 292 293 294 295 295 297 298 299 300 301
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 8 / 390
Figure 204. Electrical links between RAI cards (slot 37) and TRU & PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 205. 2 Mbit/s backpanel links between UIC Cards and the SPVM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 206. OPC block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 207. PSC2 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 208. PMU cabling scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 209. PMU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 210. Minimum configuration of the batteries in 1696MS_C Rel. 2.2, rack version . . . . . . . . Figure 211. Maximum configuration of the batteries in 1696MS_C Rel. 2.2, table version . . . . . . . Figure 212. Fan shelf description and Rack partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 213. FAN_C description and Rack partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 214. ALS mechanism on WDM line in pointtopoint configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 215. ALS in OADM configuration, channel in passthrough or in add/drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 216. ALS procedure in a ring with Optical SNCP, in case of fiber failure in the ring . . . . . . . Figure 217. ALS procedure in a pointtopoint amplified transmission without OADM repeater . . Figure 218. ALS mechanism with cascaded preamplifier and booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 219. ALS mechanism with single preamplifier and booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 220. Restart algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 221. Climatogram for hazard level 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location . . . . . . Figure 222. Climatogram for hazard level 3.2: partly temperature controlled locations . . . . . . . . . . Figure 223. FAN_C: nodast filter extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 224. position of the alarms in a terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 225. position of the alarms in an OADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 226. Repair form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLES Table 1. Handbooks related to the products hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2. Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control . . Table 3. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4. Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5. Handbook configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6. IEC 950 Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 7. Label references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 8. 1696MS boards and units list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 9. 1696MS explanatory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 10. 1696MS_C boards and units list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 11. 1696MS_C explanatory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 12. Example of Client signals supported bit rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13. Nominal frequencies allocation plan in CBand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 14. MCC protection: switching criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 15. OCC10 protection: switching criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 16. 4xANY client protection: switching criteria per each drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 17. Default thresholds for QoS alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 18. Configuration criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 19. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 20. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 21. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 22. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 23. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 24. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 25. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 26. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 27. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 28. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 29. MCC2 default Lasers and VOA states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
304 305 307 308 309 310 311 311 312 313 326 327 328 329 329 329 330 366 369 376 379 380 382
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
14 14 15 16 18 29 34 76 85 95 104 148 149 170 172 174 176 178 224 225 226 227 227 237 238 239 240 240 245
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 9 / 390
Table 30. OCC10 Shut down mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Table 31. OCC10 configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Table 32. Remote LoopBack passthrough (NNI) in ring application (backtoback or OADM) . 259 Table 33. Remote loopback (NNI) in ring application (backtoback or OADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Table 34. OCC10 default Lasers and VOA states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Table 35. Allowed drawers association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Table 36. Main differences between OAC1, OAC1_L, OAC2 and OAC2_L optical amplifiers . . . . . 283 Table 37. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Table 38. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD disable forced ON/OFF . . . . . . 289 Table 39. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Table 40. PDU Front Panel LED Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Table 41. TRU Front Panel LED Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Table 42. PSC and PSC3 LEDs signification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Table 43. Nominal frequencies allocation plan in CBand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Table 44. Relation between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity terminology used for the ESC leds and ETSI market rack (TRU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Table 45. Valid tests and compliance criteria for immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Table 46. Requirements for RF emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Table 47. Main climatic conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Table 48. Main climatic conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Table 49. Main climatic conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Table 50. Example of correspondence between CS and suffix + ICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Table 51. Hardware presetting documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 10 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
3AL 95278 AA AA
HANDBOOK GUIDE
390
11 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
12 / 390
1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK 1.1 General information

ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. NOTICE The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the part of ALCATEL. COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
1.2 Handbook applicability

This handbook applies to the following product-releases: PRODUCT 1696MSPAN PRODUCT 1696MSPAN RELEASE 2.2 VERSION (N.B.) ANV P/N 3AL 86601 AAAA ANV P/N 3AL 95009 ABAA FACTORY P/N 521.210.000 FACTORY P/N
N.B.
See NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS in para.6.4.1 on page 52.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 13 / 390
1.3 Product-release handbooks

The list of handbooks given here below is valid on the issue date of this Handbook and can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook. Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available on the issue date of this Handbook. The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose product-release-version is stated on the manuals front page consists of the following handbooks: Table 1. Handbooks related to the products hardware
REF
HANDBOOK 1696MSPAN Rel.2.2 Technical Handbook
ANV Part No.
FACTORY Part No.
THIS HDBK
3AL 95278 AAAA
[1] Provides information regarding Equipment description, Maintenance, Hardware setting documentation. 1696MSPAN Rel.2.2 Installation Handbook [2] 3AL 95278 CAAA
Provides stepped procedural instructions for unpacking, inspecting, Alcatel Part Number assembling, and mounting and wiring bays, subframes, I/O panels, ancillary items, and cabling. 1696MSPAN Rel.2.2 TurnOn & Commissioning Handbook 3AL 95278 DAAA
[3]
Provides procedures to support visual inspection, module installation, Alcatel Part Number and provisioning; and local network element verification tests and generic network tests.
Table 2. Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control THIS HDBK or note
REF
HANDBOOK
ANV Part No.
FACTORY Part No.
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2 Operators Handbook [4]
3AL 95278 BAAA
Provides information regarding maintenance using the craft terminal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 14 / 390
Table 3. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform FACTORY Part No. THIS HDBK
REF
HANDBOOK
ANV Part No.
1320CT 3.X Basic Operators Handbook [5]
3AL 79551 AAAA
957.140.042 N
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT (Craft terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements. 1330AS Rel.6.5 Operators Handbook [6] Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm Surveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package. ELB Rel.2.X Operators Handbook [7] 3AL 88877 AAAA
3AL 88876 AAAA
Provide detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log Browser software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 15 / 390
Table 4. Documentation on CDROM See para.6.5 on page 53

REF
CDROM TITLE 1696MSPAN Rel.2.2 CDROMDOC EN
ANV Part No. 3AL 95279 AAAA
FACTORY Part No.
[8]
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF.[1] to [4] Envisaged after the release of all handbooks. 1320CT 3.X CDROMDOC EN 3AL 79552 AAAA 417.100.032
[9]
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF.[5] to [7] Envisaged after the release of all handbooks
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 16 / 390
1.4 Handbook Structure

This handbook has been edited according to the Alcatel standardized drawingup guides complying with such suggestion. This handbook is divided into the following main topics as described in the table of contents: HANDBOOK GUIDE: It contains general information on safety norms, EMC and type of labels that might be affixed to the equipment. Furthermore, it describes the handbook structure and the customer documentation. The abbreviation list is supplied too. It contains all the equipments general and detailed system features including its application in the telecommunication network. Furthermore, it supplies the equipment description and specifications (i.e., system, mechanical,electrical and/or optical). It contains all the details for periodic checks, fault location and repair procedures and restore to normal operation through the withdrawal of faulty units and their replacement with spares (*) Section envisaged (but not necessarily included) to describe possible alternative unit. It encloses the documents related to unit hardware setting operations, if envisaged. Section envisaged (but not necessarily included) containing additional documentation or general information on other topics not inherent to the chapters making up the handbook.
DESCRIPTION:
MAINTENANCE:
APPENDICES: HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION: ANNEXES:
(*)
If the equipment is software integrated and manmachine interfaced (through a PCD, PC, Work Station or other external processing/displaying system) the maintenance carried out with such system is described in the Operators Handbook (see para.1.3 on page 14 )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 17 / 390
1.5 Handbook configuration check

1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts The following table indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition. Legenda n m = new part = modified part p =proposal part PR =proposal edition
Table 5. Handbook configuration check EDITION DESCRIPTION 1. GENERAL 2. PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION 3. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 4. UNITS DESCRIPTION 5. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION MAINTENANCE 6. MAINTENANCE APPENDICES Nothing envisaged HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION Unit documentation list ANNEXES Nothing envisaged Note: the edition of the enclosed documents (sections HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION and ANNEXES) is not subjected to configuration check. n n 01 n n n n n n n n 02 03 04 05 06
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01 Ed.01 created on October 2004 is the first validated and officially released issued of this Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 18 / 390
2 COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS. 2.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

The CE markings printed on the product denote compliancy with the following Directives: 89/336/EEC of May 3rd, 1989 (EMC Directives), amended by the 92/31/EEC Directive issued on April 28th, 1992 by the 93/68/EEC Directive issued on July 22nd, 1993
Compliancy to the above Directives is declared, when the equipment is installed as for the manufacturer handbooks, according to the following European Norms: EN 300 386 (V1.3.1), environment Telecommunication center
WARNING This is a class A product of EN 55022. In domestic, residential and light industry environments, this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. Compliancy Class of Compact shelf on table configuration: B
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 19 / 390
2.2 Safety
Compliancy to Safety Norms is declared in that the equipment satisfies standardized Norms : IEC 609501 ed. 2001 , EN 609501 ed. 2001 , EN 608251 ed. 1994 + A11 ed. 1996 + A2 ed. 2001 IEC 608251 ed. 1993 + A2 ed. 2001 (1999) EN 608252 ed. 2000 IEC 608252 ed. 2000 for electrical safety for electrical safety for optical safety for optical safety for optical safety for optical safety
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 20 / 390
3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS 3.1 First aid for electric shock
Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened. Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible, protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the conductor. ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION It is important to start mouth to mouth resuscitation at once and seek medical help immediately. TREATMENT OF BURNS This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while the artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present). WARNING: Do not attempt to remove his clothing from the burnt parts; Apply dry gauze on the burns; Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 21 / 390
Mouth to mouth resuscitation method

Lay the patient supine with his arms parallel with the body, if the patient is laying on an inclined plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest. Open the patients mouth and check that there are no extraneous bodies in his mouth (dentures, chewinggum etc.), Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put a hand under the patients head and one under his neck (see fig.) Lift the patients head and let it recline backwards as far as possible Shift the hand from the patients neck to is chin: place your thumb between his chin and his mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the other fingers closed together (see fig.). While performing these operations take a good supply of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your mouth open.
With your thumb between the patients chin and mouth keep his lips together and blow into his nasal cavities (see fig.)
While performing these operations observe if the patients chest rises (see fig.) If not it is possible that his nose is blocked: in that case open the patients mouth as much as possible by pressing on his chin with your hand, place your lips around his mouth and blow into his oral cavity. Observe if the patients chest heaves. This second method can be used instead of the first even when the patients nose is kept closed by pressing the nostrils together using the hand you were holding his head with. The patients head must be kept sloping backwards as much as possible. Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/fifteen expirations per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regained consciousness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 22 / 390
3.2 Safety Rules

3.2.1 General Rules Before carrying out any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance operations carefully read the relevant Handbooks and chapters. Observe safety rules When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical assistance is meant : personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to be aware of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessary measurements to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others. The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts. The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified is not permitted. The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong exclusively to the service personnel. For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings, inscriptions ect. It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.
The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety, i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged. Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER. To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream (rack or station distribution frame). Unless fitted into the equipment, an external protection device on power supply will be provided in the building installation. The breaking capacity of the device will be adequate to the maximum short circuit current which can flow. The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and statement:
SAFETY RULES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 23 / 390
3.2.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies. The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 38461984. The symbols or statements are enclosed in geometric shapes: ISO 38641984.
CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT INDICATES FORBIDDANCE (WHITE BACKGROUND WHIT RED RIMBLACK SYMBOL OR STATEMENT) IT IS A COMMAND (BLUE BACKGROUNDWHITE SYMBOL OR STATEMENT).
CONTAINS A SYMBOL INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW BACKGROUNDBLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)
CONTAINS A STATEMENT PROVIDING INFORMATION OR INSTRUCTION. (YELLOW BACKGROUNDBLACK STATEMENT AND RIM)
The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standardknown symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most common ones, specifically: dangerous electrical voltages harmful optical signals risk of explosion moving mechanical parts heatradiating Mechanical Parts
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 24 / 390
The symbols presented in para.3.2.3 through 3.2.7 are all the possible symbols that could be present on Alcatel equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the equipment this handbook refers to.
3.2.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages 3.2.3.1 Labelling The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).
If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label associated to it will state that the equipment will have to be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
WARNING ! Ground protect the equipment before connecting it to manins Make sure that power has been cut off before disconnecting ground protection.
3.2.3.2 Electrical safety: general rules
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where A.C. or D.C. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rules: a) Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc (or by 220 V ac if envisaged in the equipment). Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body. Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
b)
3.2.3.3 Electrical safety: equipment specific data Refer to para. 5.2.1 on page 323.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 25 / 390
3.2.4 Harmful Optical Signals 3.2.4.1 Labelling If the assembly or unit is fitted with a LASER, the labels must comply with the IEC 82511993 International Norms.
The symbol indicates the presence of a LASER beam. Danger level is stated within a rectangular label:
If the LASER is a class 1 or 1M product, the label depicting the symbol within a triangle is not compulsory. The rectangular shaped label bears all the information needed, i.e.: LASER class Power emitted Wavelength Ref. Norm Precautionary measures taken depend on LASER class Indications given on openings, panels and safety interlocks
exemple of power and lenght values

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 26 / 390
3.2.4.2 Optical safety: general rules On handling optical equipments or units or cables always check that laser labels are properly affixed and that the system complies with applicable optical standards.
DANGER! Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by

the fiber optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser devices or cables transporting optical signals, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rules: a) Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen, laser radiation may be present. Never look directly into a not terminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable or connector, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. All optical connectors, terminating either fibers and transmitters/receivers, are provided with protective covers that must always be used, as soon as possible, when any optical link is disconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation. Never look directly into a not terminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable by means of magnifiers/microscopes, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. A magnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes. Never point a not terminated optical fiber splice, cable or connector to other persons, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting optical links between the transmitter and the receiver. Wearing of laser safety goggles or eyes shields is recommended for every person working on optical devices, whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
3.2.4.3 Optical safety: equipment specific data Refer to para. 5.2.2 on page 323.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 27 / 390
3.2.5 Risks of Explosions 3.2.5.1 Labelling and safety instructions This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signalled by the following label:
Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow (batteryemitted hydrogen). A 417IEC5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the openings must not be covered up.
3.2.6 Moving Mechanical Parts 3.2.6.1 Labelling and safety instructions The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been stopped.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 28 / 390
3.2.7 Heatradiating Mechanical Parts 3.2.7.1 Labelling and safety instructions

The presence of heatradiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in compliancy with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:
As stated by IEC 60950 Norm., para.1.4.7 the touchable mechanical parts carrying the above depicted warning label, are those whose temperature (temperatures in C ):
T exceeds the limits established by the following formula
(TTamb) (DTmax + 25 Tmra)

where:
T Tamb DTmax Tmra
Temperature of the mechanical part measured at ambient temperature Tamb. Ambient temperature during the test. Value defined by IEC 950 Norm, Table 16 part 2a, para.5.1, and specified in the table below. The maximum room ambient temperature permitted by the equipment specification or 25C, whichever is greater.
Table 6. IEC 950 Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2 Maximum overtemperature (C ) Operatoraccessible parts Metal Handle knob, ect., held or touched for short periods Handles, knobs, ect., regularly held Outer surface of the equipment that can be touched Inner surface of the equipment that can be touched 35 30 45 45 Glass, porcelain 45 40 55 55 Plastic, rubber 60 50 70 70
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where heatradiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule: a) Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body. 01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 29 / 390
ED
3.2.8 Specific safety rules in this handbook Specific safety rules are specified in the following paragraphs: para. 5.2 on page 323 para. 6.1.1 on page 373 para. 6.2.1.1 on page 375 para. 6.2.2.1 on page 377
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 30 / 390
4 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS 4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility

The equipments EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination, grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic units, presence of dummy covers, etc.). Before starting any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance work refer to the relevant Handbooks and chapters. The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbook by the symbol and term:
ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
4.1.1 General Norms Installation All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use only cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant Plant Documentation, or those specified in the CustomersInstallation Norms. (or similar documents) Shielded cables must be suitably terminated Install filters outside the equipment as required Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before having cleaned and degreased it. Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.) Screw fasten the units to the subrack. To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 31 / 390
4.1.2 General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers, ESD connector protections, etc.) To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given
4.1.3 General Norms Maintenance Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.) Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well. Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 32 / 390
4.2 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD)

Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated the maintenance and monitoring operations. Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, to this concern the following warning labels have been affixed:
Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the installation/maintenance phases. Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of:
ELASTICIZED BAND COILED CORD
an elastic band worn around the wrist a coiled cord connected to the elastic band and to the stud on the subrack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 33 / 390
4.3 Suggestions, notes and cautions

Suggestions and special notes are marked by the following symbol: Suggestion or note.... Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol: TITLE... (caution to avoid equipment damage) statement....
4.4 Labels affixed to the Equipment

This paragraph indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification and serial labels affixed to the equipment. Figure 1. to Figure 7. illustrate the most common positions of the labels on the units, modules and subracks. Figure 8. to Figure 11. illustrate the information (e.g., identification and serial No.) printed on the labels. The table below relates the reference numbers stated on the figures to the labels used. Labelling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice. Table 7. Label references
Ref. No. 1 2 3 4
Name of Label label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) item identification label item on catalog label identifying the equipment
On contract basis, customized labels can be affixed to the equipment. Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the Customer. However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual Customer.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 34 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Table 7. on page 34
01
Figure 1. Subrack label
ABCD
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
35 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ABC
01
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
36 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
NB.1
NB.1 = The label is present on the support side
01

ABC
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
37 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 4. Labels on units with standard cover plate
3AL 95278 AA AA
xxxxxxxxx xxxxxx
ED
ABC
01
xxxxxx
390
38 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ABC
01
Figure 5. Modules label
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
39 / 390
NB.1
ABC
NB.1 = The label is present on the p.c.s. component side NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Table 7. on page 34
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 6. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 40 / 390
NB.1
ABC
NB. 1 = The label is present on p.c.s. components side or rear side on the empty spaces.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Table 7. on page 34 Figure 7. Back panels internal label
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 41 / 390
FACTORY SERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE (format 128; Module = 0,166; EN 799; Subset B/C)
Figure 8. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + space + ICS ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + ICS BAR CODE (format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2) ALCATEL FACTORY PART NUMBER + SPACE + CS
ACRONYM
SERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE (format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 9. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 42 / 390
FACTORY P/N + CS
FREQUENCY (Optional)
ACRONYM
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER
Figure 10. Item identification labels item on catalog
EQUIPMENT NAME
Figure 11. Label identifying the equipment (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 43 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
44 / 390
5 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
A/D
Add and Drop functionality Add and Drop Multiplex Alarm Indication Signal Automatic Laser Control Automatic Laser Shutdown Automatic Protection switching Automatic Power ShutDown Alarm Surveillance Alarm Severity Assignment Profile Application Specific Integrated Circuit ATtended Alarm ATtended (Alarm storing) Administrative Unit Attachment Unit Interface for LAN connection Bit Error Rate Beginning of Life Channel Card IDentifier Common Language Equipment Identification Costumer Premises Equipment Communication Subsystem Failure Craft Terminal Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplex Data Communication network Dispersion Compensating Unit Distributed Feedback Bragg Download Demultiplexing Dual Tone Modulation FrequencyDTV (Decision Threshold voltage)
ADM AIS ALC ALS APS APSD AS ASAP ASIC AT ATTD AU AUI BER BOL Ch CID CLEI CPE CSF CT DWDM DCN DCU DFB DL
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DMUX DTMF
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 45 / 390
DV DWDM EC ECC ECID ECT ECC EEPROM EMC EMI EML EOL EOW ESC ESD ETSI EXP FC FDI FEC FPGA HDLC HK HW HWF IEC I/F ILOS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Digital Video Dense Wavelength Division Multiplex Equipment Controller Embedded Channel Communication Enhanced Card IDentifier Equipment Craft Terminal Embedded Channel Communication Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Electromagnetic compatibility Electromagnetic Interference Equipment Management Layer End Of Life Engineering Order Wire Equipment and Shelf Controller Electrostatic Discharges European Telecommunication Standard Institute Expansion Fiber Channel Forward Defect Indication Forward Error Correction Field Programmable Gate Array High Level Data Link Control HouseKeeping HardWare HardWare Failure International Electrotechnical Commission Interface Input Loss Of Signal INDeterminate Input/Output
IND I/O
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 46 / 390
IOPV IP
Input Optical Power Voltage Internet Protocol International Standard Organization Intra Shelf Parallel Bus Intra Shelf Serial Bus Interstage International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Local Area Network Link Access Protocol D Long Band Loss Of Clock Loss Of Signal Light Emitting Diode Laser ShutDown Line Terminal Medium Access Control Multi Channel Card Multi Mode Fiber Multiplex Section Multi Variable Attenuation Card Network Element Negative Dispersion Chromatic Network Element Synthesis Network Management Layer Network Management System Network Node Interface Network Service Access Point Network Time Protocol Not URGent Optical Amplifier Card
ISO ISPB ISSB IT ITU_T LAN LAPD LB LOC LOS LED LSD LT MAC MCC MMF MS MVAC NE NDC NES NML NMS NNI NSAP NTP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NURG OAC
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 47 / 390
OADM OAM OBPS OCH OCHA ODU OFA OGPI OMDX OMS OMSA OOPV OPC OS OSC OSMC OSNR OSPI OTN OTS OTU PCB PDH PDL PDU PI PM PMU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer Operator Alarm Maintenance On Board Power Supply Optical Channel Optical Channel Adaptation Optical channel Data Unit Optical Fiber Amplifier Optical Generic Physical Interface Optical Multiplexer and DemultipleXer Optical Multiplex Section Optical Multiplex Section Adaptation Output Optical Power Voltage Optical Protection Card Operation System Optical supervisory channel Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card Optical Signal Noise Ratio Optical Generic Physical Interface Optical Transport Network Optical Transmission Section Optical channel Transport Unit Printed Circuit Board Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Polarization Dependent Loss Power Distribution Unit Physical Interface Performance Monitoring Power Management Unit Polarization Mode Dispersion Power Supply Card
PMD PSC
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 48 / 390
Q3 QECC
Interface with Q3 Protocol Interface with Q protocol for Embedded Control Channel Quality of Service Random Access Memory Remote Alarm Interface cart Remote Defect Indication REmote Craft Terminal Remote Inventory Replaceable Unit Missing Replaceable Unit Problem Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch Receiver Short Band Shelf Controller ShutDown Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Small Formfactor Pluggable Single Mode Fiber SubNetwork Connection Protection Serial Peripheral Interface SuPerVision Filter SuPerVision Module Server Signal Failure SoftWare DownLoad SoftWare Product Threshold Crossed Alarm Top Rack Unit Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol Telecommunication Management Network Termination Point
QoS RAM RAI RDI RECT RI RUM RUP RUTM RX SB SC SD SDH SFP SMF SNCP SPI SPVF SPVM SSF SWDL SWP TCA TRU TCP/IP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TMN TP
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 49 / 390
TRU TTP TX UEP UIC UNI URG USM VOA WDM
Top Rack Unit Trail Termination Point Transmitter Unequipped Equipment Present User Interface Card User Network Interface URGent User Service Manager Variable Optical Attenuator Wavelength Division Multiplexing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 50 / 390
6 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION 6.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation
A product is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of performance and services for which it is meant. A product evolves through successive product-releases which are the real products marketed for their delivery at a certain product-release availability date. So, a productrelease defines a set of hardware components and a software package which, as a whole, identify the possible network applications and the equipment performance which the specific product-release has been designed, engineered and marketed for. In some cases a product-release has further development steps, named versions, that are born to improve or add some performance (mainly software) with respect to the previous version, or for bug fixing purposes. A product-release has its own standard Customer Documentation, composed by one or more handbooks. A new version of a product-release may or may not produce a change in the status of the Customer Documentation set, as described in para.6.4 on page 52.
6.2 Handbook supply to Customers

Handbooks are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to. The number of handbooks per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.
6.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation

Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plant-independent. Plant-dependent documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as far as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned (plant-dependent documentation is not described here). Standard hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating and maintaining the equipment according to Alcatel Laboratory design choices. In particular: the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the explanation of the man-machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it; maintenance is described down to faulty PCB location and replacement. Consequently, no supply to the Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged. The handbooks concerning hardware (usually the Technical Handbook) and software (usually the Operators Handbook) are kept separate in that any product changes do not necessarily concern their contents. For example, only the Technical Handbook might be revised because of hardware configuration changes (e.g., replacing a unit with one having different P/N but the same function). On the other hand, the Operators Handbook is updated because of a new software version but which does not concern the Technical Handbook as long as it does not imply hardware modifications. However, both types of handbooks can be updated to improve contents, correct mistakes, etc..
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 51 / 390
6.4 Handbook Updating

The handbooks associated to the productrelease are listed in para.1.3 on page 6 . Each handbook is identified by: the name of the product-release (and version when the handbook is applicable to the versions starting from it, but not to the previous ones), the handbook name, the handbook P/N, the handbook edition (usually first edition=01), the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of print but to the date on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for the production. 6.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) The edition and date of issue might change on future handbook versions for the following reasons: only the date changes (pointed out in the Table of Contents) when modifications are made to the editorial system not changing the technical contents of the handbook. the edition, hence the date, is changed because modifications made concern technical contents. In this case: the chapters modified with respect to the previous edition are listed in Table 5. on page 18; in affected chapters, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text and drawings.
Changes concerning the technical contents of the handbook cause the edition number increase (e.g. from Ed.01 to Ed.02). Slight changes (e.g. for corrections) maintain the same edition but with the addition of a version character (e.g. from Ed.02 to Ed.02A). Version character can be used for draft or proposal editions. NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS
Handbooks (or part of the handbook) relevant to software applications (typically the Operators Handbooks) are not modified unless the new software version distributed to Customers implies manmachine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the explained procedures. Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-releases version marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if the screen contents are unchanged. 6.4.1.1 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted to commercial criteria. By updated handbook delivery it is meant the supply of a complete copy of the handbook new issue (supplying erratacorrige sheets is not envisaged).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
6.4.2 Changes due to a new product-release A new product-release changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01. In this case the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 52 / 390
6.5 Customer documentation supply on CDROM

In the following CDROM means Customer Documentation on CDROM
6.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CDROM In most cases, a CDROM contains in readonly eletronic format the documentation of one productrelease(version) and for a certain language. In some other cases, the same CDROM can contain the documentation of different productrelease(version)s for a certain language. As a general rule: CDROMs for Network Management products do not contain: the Installation Guides the documentation of system optional features that Customers could not buy from Alcatel together with the main applicative SW.
CDROMs for Network Elements products do not contain: the documentation of system optional features (e.g. System Installation Handbooks related to racks that Customers could not buy from Alcatel together with the main equipment).
A CDROM is obtained collecting various handbooks and documents in .pdf format. Bookmarks and hyperlinks make the navigation easier. No additional information is added to each handbook, so that the documentation present in the CDROMs is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper. The files processed in this way are added to files/images for managing purpose and a master CDROM is recorded. Suitable checks are made in order to have a virusfree product. After a complete functional check, the CDROM image is electronically transferred to the archive of the Production Department, so that the CDROM can be produced and delivered to Customers.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 53 / 390
6.5.2 Use of the CDROM The CDROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments. The CDROM starts automatically with autorun and hyperlinks from the opened Index document permit to visualize the .pdf handbooks Other hyperlinks permit to get, from the Technical handbooks, the specific .pdf setting documents. In order to open the .pdf documents Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 4.0 (minimum) must have been installed on the platform. The CDROM doesnt contain the Adobe Acrobat Reader program. The Customer is in charge of getting and installing it. ReadMe info is present on the CDROM to this purpose. Then the Customer is allowed to read the handbooks on the PC/WS screen, using the navigation and zooming tools included in the tool, and to print selected parts of the documentation through a local printer. 6.5.3 CDROM identification Each CDROM is identified: 1) by the following external identifiers, that are printed both on the booklet and the CDROM upper surface: the name of the productrelease(s) (and version if applicable), a writing indicating the language(s), the CDROM P/N (Factory P/N and ANV P/N), the CDROM edition (usually first edition=01) and, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whose collection and processing the CDROM itself has been created.
2)
6.5.4 CDROM updating The list of source handbook/document P/Nseditions indicated in section 6.5.3 point 2 ) , in association with the CDROM own P/Nedition, is also loaded in the AlcatelInformationSystem as a structured list. Whenever a new edition of any of such handbooks/documents is released, a check is made in the AlcatelInformationSystem to identify the list of CDROMs that must be updated to include the new editions of these handbooks/documents. This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CDROM. Updating of CDROMs always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbooks composing the collection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 54 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
DESCRIPTIONS
55 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
56 / 390
1 FUNCTIONAL DESIGN
The 1696MSPAN product is a DWDM equipment intended for the so called enterprise and metropolitan market. It is compliant with both ETSI and ANSI standards. It provides a higher transmission capacity on a single optical fiber by multiplexing up to 32 channels in the Cband at the following bit rates: up to 2.5 Gbit/s (STM16 / OC48) 10 Gbit/s (STM64/OC192).
The 1696MSPAN is mainly composed of transponder cards connected to optical Mux/Demux cards to manage the main DWDM signal (combined signal) and launch it in the fibre. Client side, all the signals between 100Mbps to 2.7Gbps and 10Gbps native signals are supported. A Compact WDM architecture, 1696MS_C is proposed. It is a compact 13 slots shelf enabling pointto point and ring applications monitored by the Optical Supervisory Channel through SPVM board. From Rel. 2.2 up to two 1696MS_C expansion shelves can be connected to the main one allowing 12 channels terminals or 4 channels OADM configurations. Furthermore amplifiers can be placed inside the compact shelf. The 1696MSPAN has been designed to offer the following main functions: Multiple configurations and multiple network architectures The 1696MSPAN can be configured as line terminal backtoback terminal Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM) in line repeater (optical amplifier) These basic configurations cover both pointtopoint and ring network applications and with or without amplifiers. Different optical adddrop (OADM) nodes can be provided: 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 16, 24, 32 channels OADM (channels in Add/Drop in both direction). Possibility to manage a remote NE named Customer Premises (CPE): it is a 1696MS or 1696MS_C located far from a Ring that can be linked to a NE of the ring (1696MS or 1696MS_C) or to another NE (pointtopoint link). Multirate client signals The 1696MS is equipped with multirate transponders, which support the following Client signals from 100 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s, by means of the MCC boards 10Gbps by means of the OCC10 board using, over UNI. Supported bit rates are 9.953Gbps (STM64/10Gbe WAN) 10.3125 Gbps (10Gbe LAN) Client signals TDM concentration Up to 4 client signals may be concentrated by Time Division Multiplexing, on a unique STM16 transponder access, in order to optimize the use of each wavelength. Three boards are available (4 x ANY, 4 x ANY_S, 4 x ANY_P). Only their optical characteristics for the 2.5Gb/s are different. In this handbook the approach is the same for the three boards; each time a 4 x ANY is shown that is also for the 4 x ANY_S and 4 x ANY_P.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 57 / 390
Flexible and scalable architecture The 1696MSPAN design allows to begin modestly with a partially equipped configuration (e.g.: 4 or 8 channels) that can be progressively upgraded as the traffic demand grows (e.g.: 16, 24, 32 channels). In particular, from the initial configuration, the transmission capacity can be increased without interrupting the existing traffic. Protection A protection at channel level is provided in ring application (SubNetwork Connection Protection, SNCP) and pointtopoint links (1+1). From rel. 2.2 the 4xANY drawers protection is also provided. Supervision An extra channel at 1510 nm, the Optical Supervision Channel (OSC), can be optionally added to the aggregate signal before being launched in the fiber. SFP modules performing CWDM, GBEthernet... functions STM1/4/16, GbEthernet, CWDM, Fiber Channel... SFP optical modules are provided, replacing, according to the board type, the MCC3 client interface and the 4xANY_P aggregate interface. It allows to fit the optical interface with the bitrate characteristics (GbE) or to use CWDM wavelengths. It also allows to build access links with MCC3 on the core ring and 4xANY_P CPE. Automatic power equalization It consists of an automatic adjustment of the power per channel in order to maintain the optical power at each node output as flat as possible. This functionality needs OSMC (measuring the power per channel) and MVAC (adjusting the power value) boards. 10Gbps backpanel The 10Gbps backpanel, introduced in rel. 2.2, allows to link two adjacent OCC10s at 10.7 Gbps. Performance Monitoring Monitoring the performances of the client signals and the WDM transmission is available for SDH and SONET frames. Up to 32 PM per NE are managed in rel. 2.2. Management Interfaces As the product is intended to both ETSI and ANSI market, Q3 interface and TL1 interface are supported. User Interfaces The product offers user interfaces for various overhead for data channels and orders wires using (64 kbit/s, 2Mbit/s, RS232, audio). Firmware download The 1696 MSPAN supports nontraffic affecting firmware download. Boards supporting nontraffic affecting firmware download: OAC2, OAC2_L, OCC10, OSMC. In rel. 2.2 the software NE automatically performs nontraffic affecting firmware download of the OCC10 cards. It is the only firmware download performed by the NE software in rel. 2.2. When a board is on Firmware download state the Harware failure LED on the front board lights on yellow color. Never unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board will not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair.
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 58 / 390
Up to 32 optical channels in a single NE Each client signal is assigned to one of the 32 optical channels provided by the transponders. Each channel is associated to a fixed wavelength chosen in the third window or Cband (1.550 nm). Up to 16 bidirectional transponders (i.e. 8 ch. OADM with 1+1 optical ch. protection) in one shelf. Fully equipped system with up 32+32 bidirectional wavelengths in one rack (4 shelves per rack).
1.1 Equipment basic configurations

The 1696MSPAN and 1696MS_C design, allows the following basic configurations of the equipment:
Line Terminal Booster + Preamplifier Line Terminal Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM) or backtoback terminal (hub) OADM or backtoback terminal (hub) repeater In line repeater Customer Premises Equipment (CPE).
1.1.1 Line terminal In line terminal configuration, the 1696MSPAN connects up to 32 clients signals (1696MS_C = up to 12 channels) to an optical fibre DWDM line. In this configuration, the equipment takes place at both ends of pointtopoint links. B&W Client signals
Up to 32 client signals
TPD
(up to 32)
SPV Mux Dmux SPV
One fibre pair
Mux and Dmux can be OADM or OMDX boards
Up to 32 WDM signals
1B32
Up to 32 DWDM signals
Figure 12. The 1696MSPAN in line terminal configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 59 / 390
1.1.2 Booster + Preamplifier Line terminal 1 x OAC board by terminal This configuration is made up of a line terminal + one OAC. B&W Client signals
Up to 32 client signals All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
TPD
(up to 32)
OFA SPV Mux Dmux

2 1 1
One fibre pair
Up to 32 WDM 1B32 signals
Up to 32 DWDM signals SPV
Figure 13. The 1696MSPAN in Booster + Preamplifier Line Terminal (1 x OAC) configuration 2 x OAC board by terminal This configuration is made up of a line terminal + two OACs. B&W Client signals
Up to 32 client signals
TPD
(up to 32) OFA OFA SPV Atten/ DCU 2 Atten/ DCU 2 1 SPV VOA
Up to 32 WDM 1B32 signals
One fibre pair
Mux Dmux
VOA 1
Up to 32 DWDM signals
Figure 14. The 1696MSPAN in Booster + Preamplifier Line Terminal (2 x OACs) configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 60 / 390
1.1.3 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM) or backtoback terminal (hub) Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM)
In OADM configuration, the 1696MSPAN may add and drop a part of the traffic of an optical DWDM line, in both directions. In this configuration the equipment takes place as linear add and drop multiplexer in: pointtopoint links ring networks. Mux and Dmux can be OADM or OMDX boards Client signals
x added & dropped channels
SPV
TPD Mux Dmux
TPD Mux Dmux
Up to 32 DWDM line signals
One fibre pair
SPV
One fibre pair
n (up to 32) SPV nx pass through channels SPV
n (up to 32)
Figure 15. The 1696MSPAN in OADM configuration The OADM configuration, especially in ring network, allows the SubNetwork Connection Protection (SNCP) of the added and dropped channels. Backtoback terminal (hub) When ALL the DWDM line channels are added and dropped or electrically regenerated, the 1696MSPAN is a backtoback terminal or a hub node. There is no optical pass through channel. SNCP may be performed on all the DWDM line channels. Mux and Dmux can be OADM or OMDX boards Client signals
n (up to 32)
SPV
TPD Mux Dmux
TPD Mux Dmux
One fibre pair
SPV
One fibre pair
n (up to 32) SPV SPV
n (up to 32)
Figure 16. The 1696MSPAN in backtoback terminal configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 61 / 390
1.1.4 OADM or backtoback terminal (hub) repeater 1 x OAC board in West side + 1 x OAC board in East side This configuration is made up of a OADM or backtoback (hub) terminal + one OAC. In the example of Figure 17. an OADM repeater configuration is shown. Mux and Dmux can be OADM or OMDX boards Client signals
x added & dropped channels All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
One fibre pair Up to 32 DWDM signals VOA
SPV
OFA 1 2
TPD Mux Dmux
TPD Mux Dmux
OFA 2 1
SPV
One fibre pair Up to 32 VOA DWDM signals
n (up to 32)
SPV
nx pass through channels
SPV
n (up to 32)
Figure 17. The 1696MSPAN in OADM repeater (1 OAC west side + 1 OAC east side) configuration OADM or backtoback terminals can be equipped with amplifiers on West side or East side or both sides. 2 x OAC board in West side + 2 x OAC board in East side This configuration is made up of a OADM or backtoback (hub) terminal + two OACs. In the example of an OADM repeater configuration is shown. Mux and Dmux can be OADM or OMDX boards
SPV One fibre pair Up to 32 DWDM signals n (up to 32) VOA OFA 1 2 SPV Atten/ DCU Atten/ DCU OFA 2 TO/FROM MUX/DMUX 1 VOA
Client signals
x added & dropped channels
TPD
TO/FROM OFA
TPD Mux Dmux

VOA
OFA 1 2 Atten/ DCU Atten/ DCU
OFA SPV 2 1 SPV VOA
Mux Dmux
nx pass through channels
One fibre pair Up to 32 n (up to 32) DWDM signals
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 18. The 1696MSPAN in OADM repeater (2 OACs west side + 2 OACs east side) configuration OADM or backtoback terminals can be equipped with amplifiers on West side or East side or both sides.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 62 / 390
1.1.5 In line repeater In repeater configuration, the 1696MSPAN is a bidirectional DWDM amplifier, without transponders nor MUX/DEMUX functions. In this configuration the equipment takes place as line repeater in: pointtopoint links ring networks.
One fibre pair Up to 32 DWDM signals
SPV VOA
OFA 1 2 Attenuator or DCU Attenuator or DCU
OFA 2 1
SPV
One fibre pair Up to 32 VOA n (up to 32) DWDM signals
n (up to 32) SPV SPV
Figure 19. The 1696MSPAN in repeater configuration
1.1.6 Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) A Customer Premises equipment (CPE) is a 1696MS_C or 1696MS located far from a ring which can be linked to a NE of the ring (1696MS or 1696MS_C) or to an other NE in a point to point link. In that configuration it is possible to manage a remote NE with no obligation to multiplex the optical signal (see Figure 24. page 66).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 63 / 390
1.2 Network architectures

1.2.1 Pointtopoint links A pointtopoint link, based on 1696MSPAN, is obtained with: a 1696MSPAN in line terminal configuration at each end of the link, eventually, one or more 1696MSPAN in OADM configuration.
Client Add & Drop traffic Client end traffic
Line Terminal
OADM
Repeater
Line Terminal
Client end traffic
Figure 20. Pointtopoint link
1.2.2 Ring networks A two fibers ring network is obtained with 1696MSPAN equipment in backtoback terminal and OADM configurations. Client end traffic
BtoB
Client Add & drop traffic
OADM
OADM repeater
In Line Repeater
Figure 21. Ring configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 64 / 390
NE
NE
NE
Black & White links with supervision
NE
NE
NE
NE
NE
Figure 22. Interconnected rings with data on customer ports and supervision carried by Optical Supervision Channel (OSC) Such a ring interconnection is done through interconnection of customer ports of the adjacent NEs of the interconnected rings. Supervision is transmitted from one ring to the other with optical insertion of the OSC in one Black & White link through a SPV_F_C board. The NEs host of the interconnection do not need to be colocated.
NE
NE
NE Supervision through interconnected LAN_Q boards
NE
NE LAN_Q
LAN_Q NE
NE
NE
Figure 23. Interconnected rings with data on customer ports and LAN_Q management transmission Such a ring interconnection is done through interconnection of customer ports of the adjacent NEs of the interconnected rings. Supervision is transmitted from one ring to the other through the electrical connection of the LAN_Q boards (only the DCC). This type of interconnection can only be performed in ETSI market. The NEs host of the interconnection need to be colocated.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 65 / 390
NE
NE
NE
CPE NE NO OSC CPE CPE OSC NE CPE
Figure 24. CPE configuration CPE consists in remote 4xANY or MCC transponders. Management is performed through OSC. Three different channel configurations can be transmitted to/from a CPE: one Black & White channel (1310 nm) one colored channel (1550 nm) one 1310 nm and one 1550 nm channels. A NE located on a ring can support several CPE links, but only two of them can be supervised.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 66 / 390
1.2.3 Host systems (ADM..) Host systems can be all data equipments whose optical output signals have the following bitrates between 100 and 2.5 Gbps 10 Gbps. They can be : SDH/SONET (STM1/OC3, STM4/OC12, STM16/OC48, STM64/OC192 signals) equipments IP routers Fast Ethernet, GBEthernet, 10GBEthernet WAN, 10 GBEthernet LAN, FC, FICON, ESCON... equipments
10Gbps SDH Tx SONET CLIENT SYSTEM Rx
Rx 10Gbps B&W Tx
OCC10
Tx Rx
10Gbps COLOURED SIGNAL
32 TxN (32MAX)
RxN (32MAX)
10GBE WAN
Tx 10Gbps B&W
Rx Tx
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx
OCC10
Tx Rx
5
Rx5 Tx5
Tx 10Gbps LAN CLIENT SYSTEM Rx
Rx 10Gbps B&W Tx
OCC10
Tx Rx
4
Rx4 Tx4
2.5Gbps Tx SDH/SONET CLIENT SYSTEM Rx
Rx 2.5Gbps B&W Tx
MCC
Tx Rx
3
2.5Gbps COLOURED SIGNAL
Rx3 Tx3
Tx Rx AGGREGATE MULTIPLEXED SIGNAL (UP TO 32 )
STM1/16. OC3/48 Tx FC/ESCON/FE Rx GBE/FICON CLIENT SYSTEM
Rx from 100Mbps to 2.5Gbps Tx
MCC 1
Tx Rx
2
Rx2 Tx2
1 1
STM1/4, OC3/12, FC/ESCON/FE Tx GBE/FICON CLIENT SYSTEM Rx UP TO FOUR STM1/4, OC3/12, FC/ESCON/FE Tx GBE/FICON CLIENT SYSTEM Rx
MUX/ DEMUX SCHEME
Rx4 Tx4
4 x ANY
Rx1 Tx1
Tx Rx 2.5Gbps B&W
Rx Tx
MCC
Tx Rx
1
Rx1 Tx1
1696MS
Figure 25. Connection to host equipments
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 67 / 390
1.3 Protection scenario

In a ring, the SNCP at OCh level can be provided either in backtoback terminals or in OADM equipment, as shown in Figure 26. on page 68. At the transmit side, the signal is broadcasted on both arms of the ring and the available signal is selected at the receive side (when failure of the other signal). Split and select performed in optical domain (by switchingoff the user Tx)
Mux Dmux
Mux Dmux
backtoback terminals
OADM or backtoback
dropped channels
added channels
Split and select performed in optical domain (by switchingoff the user Tx) Figure 26. Optical SNCP protection scheme: with backtoback terminals or OADM The split and select function is optically performed. The protection is optically performed, too; the function is ensured by 2 optical splitters. The selection is done by switchingoff the user Tx corresponding to the path in failure and reactivating the protecting one (see Figure 27. ). optical electrical optical electrical WDM Rx WDM user Rx optical splitter WDM Tx WDM Rx user Tx optical splitter user Tx optical
user Rx
WDM Tx
Figure 27. Optical SNCP way of working

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The protection schemes supported are: MCC1/2/3 only; MCC + 4xANY (only MCC is protected); 4xANY only (each client/drawer can be protected); MCC2/MCC3 + OAC; OCC10 only; OCC10 + OAC.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 68 / 390
2 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION
The 1696MSPAN has been designed to offer a record size integration to meet the challenging requirements of the metropolitan environment. A fully loaded 1696MSPAN system with 32 protected channels can be housed in one standard ETSI or ANSI racks. The 1696MSPAN employs a common shelf type for the different network elements. Up to four shelves can be fit into a single rack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 69 / 390
2.1 Rack design

The 1696MSPAN mechanical design allows to put up to four shelves in a single rack. It is compatible with the following mechanical standards a 2000 mm high ETSI rack, a 1950 mm high NEBS 2000 rack. The depth is compliant with the 300 mm deep ETSI rack (no limitations in ANSI rack).
OPTINEX RACK
(ETSI)
NEBS 2000 RACK
Top rack unit Power Distribution Unit Fiber storage
2000
Air deflector
1950
Air deflector
600 mm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
600 mm
Figure 28. Rack organization, 32 channel bidirectional terminal
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 70 / 390
2.2 1696MS shelf physical configuration

The 1696MS shelf is made up by an empty shelf and the boards and units installed in it. One 1696MS system is composed by one mandatory main/master shelf and up to three slave/expansion shelves. The board composition determines the shelf type: master or slave. 2.2.1 1696MS Empty shelf 2.2.1.1 1696MS shelf organization The shelf is organized into three parts (one main and two extension), hosting 49 boards or unit slots: the main part, which is the upper part and comprises the slots from 1 to 24; here are located the 285 mm high boards performing the elaboration of the signal. This part hosts the equipment and shelf controller, up to 16 transponders, up to 11 TDM concentrators (4xANY), optical amplifiers, one mux/demux for LT or two mux/demux or OADM boards (east/west) for hub/OADM application, optical supervisory channel... the first extension part, which is the middle part and comprises the slots from 25 to 48; here are located the 88 mm high boards, herebelow listed two redundant 48V power supply boards one LAN access board for the CT or the EML (LAN_Q) connection (in master shelf only) one LAN access board for intershelf communication (LAN_I) one housekeeping board with 8 x input access + 8 x output access (HK) (in master shelf only) one remote alarms board (RAI) (in master shelf only) two user interface boards (UIC) (in master shelf only) one optical protection channel board (OPC) per protected channel (optical SNCP) the second extension part, which is the bottom part and comprises slot 49, where are located the fans.
All the optical and electrical connectors are located on the front of the units to be easily accessed. This chapter illustrates the physical structure, layout and composition, coding and partition of the shelf. The Equipment shelf front view is illustrated herebelow, in Figure 29. on page 72 and in Figure 30. on page 74. The units codes and partition are listed in Table 8. on page 76.
Main part (slot 1 to 24)
First extension part (slot 25 to 48)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Second extension part (slot 49)
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 71 / 390
2.2.1.2 1696MS Shelf dimensions

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
443 15 40 88
285
FANS 96 TE (24 x 4 TE wide slots) 21 (533.4 mm)

Figure 29. Shelf dimensions
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 72 / 390
2.2.2 1696MS Shelf configuration rules The board composition and placement of a shelf respects some constraints at the hardware, software and functional levels. If general rules are followed, a certain number of standard configurations can be obtained in which boards can be exchanged without functionality loss. 2.2.2.1 1696MS configuration constraints Optical SubNetwork Channel Protection requires: transponder boards (MCC/OCC10) must be placed in consecutive slots. [4,5] or [6,7] or [8,9] or [10,11] or [14,15] or [16,17] or[18,19] or [20,21] each Optical Protecting Channel boards (OPC) must be placed when protecting transponders, in one of the two slots, located under the corresponding transponder (MCC/OCC10) pair (e.g.: the OPC in slot 28 or 29 corresponds to the slots 45). The transponder above the OPC is the main one and the other is the protecting transponder (e.g.: OPC in slot 28 implies main transponder in slot 4 and protecting one in slot 5) when protecting 4xANY client signals, in the four slots located below the corresponding 4xANY pair; the 4xANY on the right side contains the MAIN/protected drawers. Starting from the left the first OPC protects drawer 2, the second one drawer 1, the third one drawer 3, the fourth one drawer 4; in case of 4xANY in slots 6,7,8,9, the OPC in slot 30 protects drawer 2, that in slot 31 protects drawer 1, that in slot 32 protects drawer 3, that OPC in slot 33 protects drawer 4 if TDM concentrators (4xANY/_S/_P) are used with few channels, all the boards are preferably put in a single shelf. if TDM concentrators are used with more than 8 channels, 4xANY(_S/_P) boards are preferably put in one dedicated shelf. using MVAC (for power adjustment of external colored wavelengths, of channel or band optical passthrough and for transponder postemphasis, channel/band loop power adjustment) the boards allocation depends on the needed configuration (for the boards location refer to installation handbook).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 73 / 390
2.2.2.2 1696MS Typical shelf configuration Figure 30. shows a typical configuration of a fully equipped shelf and Table 8. resumes the possibilities that satisfy the configuration constraints.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 (X)
(*) Master shelf only
25 P S C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 H R O O O O L K A P P P P A (*) I C C C C N 49
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 O O O O U U P P P P I I C C C C C C
48 P S C
FANS
Figure 30. Typical fully equipped shelf In the first extension part, except for the PSC and the LAN boards, the placement of the boards has no hardware limitation. However, here is the most frequently used configuration: the slots 28 to 35 and 38 to 45 are dedicated to the Optical Protection Channel board (OPC), the slot 36 hosts the HouseKeeping board (HK), the slot 37 hosts the Remote Alarm Interface board (RAI), the slots 46 and 47 hosts the User Interface Card (UIC). Mandatory boards are: N.B. Slot 1 is dedicated to ESC board (Master and expansion (SC) shelves). Slots 25 and 48 are dedicated to the Power Supply Cards (Master and Expansion shelves). Slot 26 of the master shelf is dedicated to the LAN_Q card. Slot 27 of the slave shelf is dedicated to the LAN_I card. Slot 49 hosts the FANs card (Master and Expansions). Particular setting of the LAN board (slot 26) on the Master shelf: On this board, the rotary switch SW3 corresponding to the Equipment Type must be set in 5 value (hexadecimal), otherwise the Shelf Controller will not start. When the straps on the board are forced (by pass state) to be LAN #26 or LAN #27 board, take care to insert the LAN board in the correct slot. the slot 2 can be used for OSMC; it is an optional card.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 74 / 390
Equipment Shelf controler OSMC Mux/Demux or OADM Transponder Transponder Transponder Transponder Transponder Transponder Transponder Transponder Optical amplifier Optical amplifier Transponder Transponder Transponder Transponder Transponder Transponder Transponder Transponder Mux/Demux or OADM SPVM
2.2.3 1696MS Part list In Table 8. on page 76 of the following paragraph are listed, named and coded the items and units making up the Equipment Shelf (see paragraph 2.2.3.1 on page 76). Furthermore, for any item the position and the maximum quantity that can be allocated inside a single shelf, are indicated too. Such table reports the following information : Item Name The Acronym identifying the units ANV part numbers (3ALXXXXX XXXX) Maximum quantity per each shelf Position of the unit inside the equipment. Refer to Figure 29. on page 72 and Figure 30. on page 74 for slot numbering. Number of explanatory notes
Table 9. on page 85 reports the explanatory notes.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 75 / 390
2.2.3.1 1696MS shelf and boards designation and reference Table 8. 1696MS boards and units list ANV Part Number 3AL 86607 AA 3AL 95270 AA 3AL 86607 AC 3AL 95270 AB 3AL 86607 AC TRIBUTARIES Multirate CH 192.000192.100 Multirate CH 192.200192.300 Multirate CH 192.500192.600 Multirate CH 192.700192.800 Multirate CH 193.000193.100 Multirate CH 193.200193.300 Multirate CH 193.500193.600 Multirate CH 193.700193.800 Multirate CH 194.200194.300 Multirate CH 194.400194.500 Multirate CH 194.700194.800 Multirate CH 194.900195.000 Multirate CH 195.200195.300 Multirate CH 195.400195.500 Multirate CH 195.700195.800 Multirate CH 195.900196.000 MCC1 192.0192.1 MCC1 192.2192.3 MCC1 192.5192.6 MCC1 192.7192.8 MCC1 193.0193.1 MCC1 193.2193.3 MCC1 193.5193.6 MCC1 193.7193.8 MCC1 194.2194.3 MCC1 194.4194.5 MCC1 194.7194.8 MCC1 194.9195.0 MCC1 195.2195.3 MCC1 195.4195.5 MCC1 195.7195.8 MCC1 195.9196.0 MCC2 192.0192.1 MCC2 192.2192.3 MCC2 192.5192.6 MCC2 192.7192.8 MCC2 193.0193.1 MCC2 193.2193.3 MCC2 193.5193.6 Enhanched Multirate 19x.x0019x.x00 CH MCC2 193.7193.8 MCC2 194.2194.3 MCC2 194.4194.5 MCC2 194.7194.8 MCC2 194.9195.0 MCC2 195.2195.3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NAME
ACRONYM MECHANICAL STRUCTURE
Max Q.ty 2
SLOT
Not e [1] [2] [2]
1696MSPAN shelf Shelf 1696MSPAN 10G 1696MSPAN FB shelf Shelf FB 1696MSPAN 10G 21 D.C.U. assembled support
3AL 86603 AA 3AL 86603 AB 3AL 86603 AC 3AL 86603 AD 3AL 86603 AE 3AL 86603 AF 3AL 86603 AG 3AL 86603 AH 3AL 86603 AL 3AL 86603 AM 3AL 86603 AN 3AL 86603 AP 3AL 86603 AQ 3AL 86603 AR 3AL 86603 AS 3AL 86603 AT 3AL 86603 BA 3AL 86603 BB 3AL 86603 BC 3AL 86603 BD 3AL 86603 BE 3AL 86603 BF 3AL 86603 BG 3AL 86603 BH 3AL 86603 BL 3AL 86603 BM 3AL 86603 BN 3AL 86603 BP 3AL 86603 BQ 3AL 86603 BR 3AL 86603 BS 3AL 86603 BT 16 4B11 [4] 14 21 14B21 16 4B11 [3] 14 21 14B21
MCC2 195.4195.5 MCC2 195.7195.8 MCC2 195.9196.0
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 76 / 390
NAME
ACRONYM MCC3 192.0192.1 MCC3 192.2192.3 MCC3 192.5192.6 MCC3 192.7192.8 MCC3 193.0193.1 MCC3 193.2193.3 MCC3 193.5193.6
ANV Part Number 3AL 95150 AA 3AL 95150 AB 3AL 95150 AC 3AL 95150 AD 3AL 95150 AE 3AL 95150 AF 3AL 95150 AG 3AL 95150 AH 3AL 95150 AJ 3AL 95150AK 3AL 95150 AL 3AL 95150 AM 3AL 95150 AN 3AL 95150 AP 3AL 95150 AQ 3AL 95150 AR
Max Q.ty
SLOT
Not e
Enhanched Multirate CH 19x.x0019x.x00 with SFP optical modules
MCC3 193.7193.8 MCC3 194.2194.3 MCC3 194.4194.5 MCC3 194.7194.8 MCC3 194.9195.0 MCC3 195.2195.3 MCC3 195.4195.5 MCC3 195.7195.8 MCC3 195.9196.0
16
4B11 [5] 14 21 14B21
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 77 / 390
NAME OCC10 CH 192.000 OCC10 CH 192.100 OCC10 CH 192.200 OCC10 CH 192.300 OCC10 CH 192.500 OCC10 CH 192.600 OCC10 CH 192.700 OCC10 CH 192.800 OCC10 CH 193.000 OCC10 CH 193.100 OCC10 CH 193.200 OCC10 CH 193.300 OCC10 CH 193.500 OCC10 CH 193.600 OCC10 CH 193.700 OCC10 CH 193.800 OCC10 CH 194.200 OCC10 CH 194.300 OCC10 CH 194.400 OCC10 CH 194.500 OCC10 CH 194.700 OCC10 CH 194.800 OCC10 CH 194.900 OCC10 CH 195.000 OCC10 CH 195.200 OCC10 CH 195.300 OCC10 CH 195.400 OCC10 CH 195.500 OCC10 CH 195.700 OCC10 CH 195.800 OCC10 CH 195.900 OCC10 CH 196.000 4xANY Host I16.1 i/f 4xANY Host S16.1 i/f 4xANY Host fully pluggable
ACRONYM OCC10 192.000 OCC10 192.100 OCC10 192.200 OCC10 192.300 OCC10 192.500 OCC10 192.600 OCC10 192.700 OCC10 192.800 OCC10 193.000 OCC10 193.100 OCC10 193.200 OCC10 193.300 OCC10 193.500 OCC10 193.600 OCC10 193.700 OCC10 193.800 OCC10 142.200 OCC10 194.300 OCC10 194.400 OCC10 194.500 OCC10 194.700 OCC10 194.800 OCC10 194.900 OCC10 195.000 OCC10 195.200 OCC10 195.300 OCC10 195.400 OCC10 195.500 OCC10 195.700 OCC10 195.800 OCC10 195.900 OCC10 196.000 4xANY 4xANY_S 4xANY_P
ANV Part Number 3AL 86834 AA 3AL 86834 AB 3AL 86834 AC 3AL 86834 AD 3AL 86834 AE 3AL 86834 AF 3AL 86834 AG 3AL 86834 AH 3AL 86834 AL 3AL 86834 AM 3AL 86834 AN 3AL 86834 AP 3AL 86834 AQ 3AL 86834 AR 3AL 86834 AS 3AL 86834 AT 3AL 86834 BA 3AL 86834 BB 3AL 86834 BC 3AL 86834 BD 3AL 86834 BE 3AL 86834 BF 3AL 86834 BG 3AL 86834 BH 3AL 86834 BL 3AL 86834 BM 3AL 86834 BN 3AL 86834 BP 3AL 86834 BQ 3AL 86834 BR 3AL 86834 BS 3AL 86834 BT 3AL 86639 AA 3AL 86872 AA 3AL 95063 AA
Max Q.ty
SLOT
Not e
16
4B11 [6] 14 21 14B21
11
2;4;6;8; 10;12; 14;16; 18;20; 22
[7] [9] [8] [9] [10] [9]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 78 / 390
NAME
ACRONYM TRIBUTARY SUBSYSTEM
ANV Part Number 3AL 86673 AA 3AL 86674 AA 3AL 86672 AA 3AL 86869 AA 3AL 86870 AA 3AL 81617 AA
Max Q.ty 16
SLOT
Not e [11] [12] [13] [14] [9] [15] [9] [16] [9]
4 X ANY SDH/SONET cartridge 4 X ANY Low speed cartridge 4 X ANY High speed cartridge 4 X ANY Low speed optical cartridge 4 X ANY High speed optical cartridge 4 X ANY Low speed plugin 1310 (OLI) Multiple attenuator card
SDHSONET_1310 Drawer LF_1310_2 Drawer HF_1310 Drawer LF_850 Drawer HF_850 Drawer
MVAC SFP MODULES
3AL 86892 AA
4B11 [17] 14B21
STM1 SFP (S1.1, FE, FDDI, 100BaseLX) STM1 SFP S1.1 W/DDM STM1 SFP L1.1 STM1 SFP L1.2 STM4 SFP (S4.1, ESCON) STM4 SFP S4.1 W/DDM STM4 SFP L4.1 STM4 SFP L4.2 1.25GBE SFP (Gbe1000LX/LH 1 FiberChannel 1300nm stop gap) 1.25GBE SFP Gbe 1000 LX/LH W/DDM 1.25GBE SFP (Gbe 1000 SX, 1 Fiber Channel 850 nm stop gap 1.25GBE SFP Gbe 1000 SX W/DDM 1.25GBE SFP Gbe 1000 ZX SFP 1FC, 2FC 850 nm W/DDM SFP 1FC, 2FC 1310 nm W/DDM STM16 SFP (S16.1, 2FC stop gap) STM16 SFP I16.1 STM16 SFP S16.1 W/DDM STM16 SFP I16.1 W/DDM STM16 SFP S16.1 multirate/ multiformat W/DDM STM16 SFP L16.1 STM16 SFP L16.2
SFP_Generic SFP_Generic SFP_Generic SFP_Generic SFP_S4_1 SFP_S4_1 SFP_Generic SFP_GBE_LX SFP_GBE_LX SFP_GBE_SX SFP_GBE_SX SFP_Generic SFP_FC_S SFP_FC_L SFP_S16_1 SFP_I16_1 SFP_S16_1 SFP_I16_1 SFP _S16_1 SFP_Generic SFP_Generic
1AB 19467 0001 contact Alcatel 1AB 19467 0002 1AB 19467 0003 1AB 19636 0001 contact Alcatel 1AB 19636 0003 1AB 19636 0002 1AB 18728 0001 contact Alcatel 1AB 18728 0002 contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel 1AB 19637 0001 1AB 19637 0002 contact Alcatel contact Alcatel 1AB 19637 0007 1AB 19637 0004 1AB 19637 0003
[18]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 79 / 390
NAME STM16 CWDM 1470 NM PIN STM16 CWDM 1490 NM PIN STM16 CWDM 1510 NM PIN STM16 CWDM 1530 NM PIN STM16 CWDM 1550 NM PIN STM16 CWDM 1570 NM PIN STM16 CWDM 1590 NM PIN STM16 CWDM 1610 NM PIN STM16 CWDM 1470 NM PIN ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1490 NM PIN ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1510 NM PIN ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1530 NM PIN ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1550 NM PIN ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1570 NM PIN ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1590 NM PIN ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1610 NM PIN ext Temp Range
ACRONYM
ANV Part Number 1AB 19634 0001 1AB 19634 0002 1AB 19634 0003 1AB 19634 0004 1AB 19634 0005 1AB 19634 0006 1AB 19634 0007 1AB 19634 0008 contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Max Q.ty
SLOT
Not e
SFP_C_Bronze
[18] [19]
SFP_C_Bronze contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 80 / 390
NAME STM16 CWDM 1470 STC STM16 CWDM 1490 STC STM16 CWDM 1510 STC STM16 CWDM 1530 STC STM16 CWDM 1550 STC STM16 CWDM 1570 STC STM16 CWDM 1590 STC STM16 CWDM 1610 STC STM16 CWDM 1470 STC ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1490 STC ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1510 STC ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1530 STC ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1550 STC ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1570 STC ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1590 STC ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1610 STC ext Temp Range
ACRONYM NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD SFP_C_Silver SFP_C_Silver
ANV Part Number 1AB19635 0001 1AB 19635 0002 1AB 19635 0003 1AB 19635 0004 1AB 19635 0005 1AB 19635 0006 1AB 19635 0007 1AB 19635 0008 contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Max Q.ty
SLOT
Not e
[18] [20]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 81 / 390
NAME
ACRONYM MULTIPLEXERS
ANV Part Number
Max Q.ty
SLOT
Not e
1x8 Mux/Demux 300380 + EXP + SPV 1x8Mux/Demux 300380+EXP 1x8 Mux/Demux 200280 1x8 Mux/Demux 520600 1x8 Mux/Demux 420500 OADM 8 CH 300380 + SPV OADM 8 CH 200280 + SPV OADM 8 CH 520600 + SPV OADM 8 CH 420500 + SPV OADM 4 CH 200230 + SPV OADM 4 CH 250280 + SPV OADM 4 CH 300330 + SPV OADM 4 CH 350380 + SPV OADM 4 CH 420450 + SPV OADM 4 CH 470500 + SPV OADM 4 CH 520550 + SPV OADM 4 CH 570600 + SPV OADM 2 CH 300310 + SPV OADM 2 CH 320330 + SPV OADM 2 CH 350360 + SPV OADM 2 CH 370380 + SPV OADM 2 CH 470480 + SPV OADM 1 CH 300 + SPV OADM 1 CH 310 + SPV OADM 1 CH 320 + SPV OADM 1 CH 330 + SPV OADM 1 CH 350 + SPV OADM 1 CH 360 + SPV OADM 1 CH 370 + SPV OADM 1 CH 380 + SPV OADM 1 CH 470 + SPV OADM 1 CH 480 + SPV MuxDemux 13101550+SPV 1510 SPV COUPLER SMALL
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS OMDX8100_M_L1_X OMDX8100_M_L2 OMDX8100_M_S1 OMDX8100_M_S2 OADM8100_M_L1_S OADM8100_M_L2_S OADM8100_M_S1_S OADM8100_M_S2_S OADM4100_M_ch2023_S OADM4100_M_ch2528_S OADM4100_M_ch3033_S OADM4100_M_ch3538_S OADM4100_M_ch4245_S OADM4100_M_ch4750_S OADM4100_M_ch5255_S OADM4100_M_ch5760_S OADM2100_M_3031_S OADM2100_M_3233_S OADM2100_M_3536_S OADM2100_M_3738_S OADM2100_M_4748_S OADM1100_M_30_S OADM1100_M_31_S OADM1100_M_32_S OADM1100_M_33_S OADM1100_M_35_S OADM1100_M_36_S OADM1100_M_37_S OADM1100_M_38_S OADM1100_M_47_S OADM1100_M_48_S SPV_F_1310_1550 SPV_F_C OPTICAL AMPLIFIER
3AL 86615 AA 3AL 86615 AJ 3AL 86615 AB 3AL 86615 AC 3AL 86615 AD 3AL 86637 AA 3AL 86637 AB 3AL 86637 AC 3AL 86637 AD 3AL 86637 BC 3AL 86637 BD 3AL 86637 BA 3AL 86637 BB 3AL 86637 BG 3AL 86637 BH 3AL 86637 BE 3AL 86637 BF 3AL 86778 AB 3AL 86778 AC 3AL 86778 AD 3AL 86778 AE 3AL 86778 AF 3AL 86777 AJ 3AL 86777 AK 3AL 86777 AL 3AL 86777 AM 3AL 86777 AN 3AL 86777 AP 3AL 86777 AQ 3AL 86777 AR 3AL 86777 BE 3AL 86777 BF 3AL 86779 AA 3AL 86779 BA 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
[21] 2;3;4;5; [22] 6;12;13 ;22 [23]
2;3;4;5; [24] 6;12;13 [25] ;22
2;3;4;5; [26] 6;12;13 [25] ;22
2;3;4;5; 6;12;13 [27] ;22
2;3;4;5; 6;12;13 [28] ;22
2;3;12; [29] 13;22 28B35 [30] 38B45 4; 5; 12; 13; 20; 21; 22; 23
OFA +17 dBm (22/9)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
OAC1 OAC1_L OAC2 OAC2_L
3AL 86703 AA 3AL 86703 AB 3AL 86703 AC 3AL 86703 AD 8
OFA +17 dBm (28/9) OFA +17 dBm (22/9) OFA +17 dBm (28/9)
[31]
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 82 / 390
NAME
ACRONYM CONTROLLER
ANV Part Number
Max Q.ty
SLOT
Not e
ESC (Equipment and Shelf Controller) FLASH CARD 80 MB SPVM + OW SPVM_H LAC (LAN Access card) Housekeeping card Alarm Card UAC (User Access Card) OSM_C (Monitoring Card)
ESC MEMDEV SPVM2 SPVM_H LAN_Q or LAN_I HK RAI UIC OSMC
3AL 86661 AA 1AB 15205 0001 3AL 86606 AB 3AL 86606 AC 3AL 86653 AA 3AL 86668 AA 3AL 87009 AA 3AL 86654AA 3AL 86893AA
1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 1
1; 24 1
[32] [33]
2;22;23 [34] 2;22;23 [35] 26 36 37 46;47 2;12; 13;23 [36] [37] [38] [39] [40]
SWITCHING PROTECTION Passive optical protect. module Dual MM Optical Splitter OPC SMOPC CONNECTORS MMOPC CONNECTORS MM_OPC_850 Power Supply Card Power Supply Card Fan Card Fan Card NODUST FILTER DCM5 DCM10 DCM15 DCM20 DCM30 DCM40 DCM60 DCM80 OPC OPC OPC OPC OPC POWER SUPPLY PSC PSC3 FANS FANC FANC DCM5 DCM10 DCM15 DCM20 DCM30 DCM40 DCM60 DCM80 3AL 86625 AA 3AL 86625 AB 3AL 86633 AA 1AB 15169 0013 1AB 15169 0007 1AB 15169 0014 1AB 15169 0008 1AB 15169 0009 1AB 15169 0010 1AB 15169 0011 1AB 15169 0012 2 [49] 1 1 1 49 49 49 [48] 3AL 86652 AA 3AL 86652 AB 2 2 25;48 25;48 [46] [47] 3AL 86708 AA 3AL 86708 AB 3AL 86708 AC 3AL 86708 AD 3AL 95113 AA 8 8 8 8 8 [41] [42] 28B35 28 35 [43] 38B45 [44] [45]
OPTICAL COMPENSATION DEVICE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 83 / 390
NAME
ACRONYM
ANV Part Number
Max Q.ty 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 4 4 3 1 16 1 8 8 16 1 1 22 22
SLOT
Not e [50] [51] [52] [53] [54] [55] [56] [57] [58] [59] [60] [61] [62] [63] [64] [65] [66]
Circuit breaker 15A 72VDC Alarm chain cable HK user cable ANSI & NEBS installation kit 1696MS Optinex installation kit KIT Optical kit 8channel Jumper kit 4 lambda OADM Optical kit 4xANY intrashelf Opt. kit 4xANY intrashelf Prot Air deflector ETSI UAC user cable Opto jumper SMF MU/PCSC/ PC L = 3MT SFP module extractor kit KIT OPC connection SM KIT OPC connection MM Jumper SM MU/PCLC/PC cable KITCommon optical amplif. KITCommon optical not amplif Dummy plate 4TE for PBA Dummy plate 4TE for UTILITY Opto atten MU/PC 1dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 2dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 3dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 4dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 5dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 6dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 7dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 8dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 9dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 10dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 11dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 12dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 13dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 14dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 15dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 20dB plug type JUMPER SM MU/MU CABLE 2 MM 810 MM JUMPER SM MU/MU CABLE 2 MM 500 MM JUMPER SM MU/MU CABLE 2 MM 650 MM
EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES 1AB 16271 0006 3AL 86750 AA 3AL 86751 AA 3AL 86725 AA 3AL 86772 AA 3AL 95184 AA 3AL 86827 AA 3AL 86863 AA 3AL 86864 AA 3AN 51293 AA 3AL 86753 AA 1AB 1675400010
3AL 81728 AAAA 3AL 95185 AAAA 3AL 95186 AAAA 1AB 18577 0004 3AL 95136 AAAA 3AL 95137 AAAA 3AN 50555 AA 3AN 50556 AA INSTALLATION MATERIALS 1AB 20480 0001 1AB 20480 0002 1AB 20480 0003 1AB 20480 0004 1AB 20480 0005 1AB 20480 0006 1AB 20480 0007 1AB 20480 0008 1AB 20480 0009 1AB 20480 0010 1AB 20480 0011 1AB 20480 0012 1AB 20480 0013 1AB 20480 0014 1AB 20480 0015 1AB 20480 0016 1AB 18240 0042 1AB 18240 0050 1AB 18240 0013
1 8 [67] [68]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 84 / 390
JUMPER SM MU/MU CABLE 2 MM 650 MM REMOVAL TOOL MU/PC PLUG_IN ATTEN. SOFTWARE
1AB 18240 0012 1AD 03860 0002
2 1
[69] [70] [71]
Table 9. 1696MS explanatory notes Note [1] [2] [3] Explanation It is the equipment shelf, including the back panel. Up to four subracks can be housed in an ETSI and NEBS compliant rack Backpanel able to transmit 10G data, able to link two adjacent OCC10s It is a universal bidirectional multiclock 3R transponder supporting all the most common bit rates (from 100 Mbps to 2.5 Gbps) and tunable over two coloured wavelenghts in C band. In case of protection, 2 adjacent MCCs and 1 x OPC are required 3R transponder supporting all the MCC functions (see [3]) plus VOA to adjust the output optical power It performs all the MCC2 functions but the optical client interface is replaced by SFP (S1.1, L1.1, L1.2, S4.1, L4.1, L4.2, S16.1, I16.1, L16.1, L16.2, CWDM, GbEthernet, FC, 2 FC, ESCON...) optical modules 10Gbps Optical Channel Card designed for 3R transport of 10 Gbps native signals. This transponder, compliant with ITUT G.709 Rec, can be provisioned to accept the following client signals any STM64/OC192 (9.953Gbps) to serve as UNI and nonSDH/SONET signals (10GbeWAN) 10.3125 Gbps (10Gbe LAN) TDM concentrator multiplexing any mix of up to four client signals (100MbpsB1.25 Gbps) into a B&W (@ 1310nm) 2.5 Gbps optical channel, SDH/SONET framing standard (STM16/OC48) compliant. It is used with a MCC transponder which provides the coloured optic for WDM transmission. 2.5Gbps interface is I16.1. It occupies two slots: the first slot is always an even position (i:e: 23; 45;..) Remote application. It differs from the above 4xANY board (see point [7]) only for the optical 2.5Gbps interface: it is S16.1 type, allowing to cover a longer span (15 Km for S16.1; 2 Km for I16.1) To take into account more stringent EMI requirement with the compact shelf using, the end of Alcatel code must be: 4xANY High speed 850 nm cartridge HF850_Drawer 3AL 86870 AAAG 4xANY Low speed 850 nm cartridge LF850_Drawer 3AL 86869 AAAG 4xANY Host w/ S16.1 i/f 4xANY_S 3AL 86872 AAAC TDM concentrator (4xAny) with B&W (I16.1, S16.1) or CWDM pluggable (by means of SFP optical modules) optical interface at 2,5Gbps 2nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting STM1/OC3 and STM4/OC12. If it is set as STM1, up to four drawers can be housed in one 4xANY board; if it is set as STM4, up to three drawers can be housed. STM1 drawers can be plugged on any slot. STM4 drawers can be plugged only on ports #3 and #4; for 3 x STM4 configuration only, port #1 is available, too 2nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, DV. Up to four low frequency (FE, FDDI, ESCON, DV) drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY 2nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Gigabit Ethernet, FICON and FC Up to two high frequency drawers can be housed only on ports #3 and #4 of a 4xANY board 1nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, DV Up to four low frequency (FE, FDDI, ESCON, DV) drawers can be housed on any port of a 4xANY 1nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Gigabit Ethernet, FICON and FC Up to two high frequency drawers can be housed only on ports #3 and #4 of a 4xANY board 2nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Digital Video transport. Up to four low frequency drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY 01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 85 / 390
[4] [5]
[6]
[7]
[8] [9]
[10] [11]
[12] [13] [14]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[15] [16]
ED
Note [17] [18] [19] [20] [21]
Explanation Allow to manually adjust the optical power budget. Each MVAC board includes two VOAs
STM1/4/16, GBE, CWDM, Fiber Channel (2FC, 1FC).... SFP optical plugin modules; they can be fitted in 4xANY_P and/or MCC3 boards (refer to Figure 47. on page 118 for SFP placing) It is the Bronze CWDM (SFP STM16) It is the Silver CWDM (SFP STM16) 8 x L1 ch Mux/Demux with expansion (LB/SB combiner/splitter) and Supervision, for hub nodes. Slots 4,5,6 are available in master shelf only. Starting MUX if 32 channels hub extension is required without amplifiers 8 x L1 ch Mux/Demux with expansion (LB/SB combiner/splitter), for hub nodes. Slots 4,5,6 are available in master shelf only. Starting MUX if 32 supervised channels hub extension is required when amplifiers are used 8 x L2/S1/S2 ch Mux/Demux for hub nodes, used to upgrade the L1 Mux/Demux Allows to add/drop 8 supervised channels in L1 (30B38)/L2 (20B28)/S1 (52B60)/S2 (42B50) band Can be used also as MUX/DEMUX Allows to add/drop the 4 supervised channels shown in its own acronym Allows to add/drop the 2 supervised channels shown in its own acronym Allows to add/drop the supervised channel shown in its own acronym. From 25 to 38 are long band channels: From 47 to 57 are short band channels Allows to mux/demux a 1310nm channel, a 1550nm multiplexed signal and the SPV/OSC (1510nm) channel. This board allows to supervise a CPE Allows to mux/demux a SPV/OSC (1510nm) channel and a 1310nm or 1550nm channel. This board allows to supervise a CPE Doublestage optical amplifiers able to amplify all the 32 channels in C band. Slots 22 and 23 are available in expansion shelves only. OAC1_L and OAC2_L provide long spans transmission. OAC2 and OAC2_L reduce power dissipation It includes both the equipment and shelf controller functionalities. It has to be fitted in expansion shelves, too, to only perform the shelf controller function. Instead, in slot 24 it is only used to have a backup of the slot 1 flash memory, in TL1 management case (North America) The flash card contains the equipment data base. It must be equipped only on ESC board plugged in slot 1 of the master shelf 1510nm Optical Supervisory Channel card managing up to 2 x 1510nm OSC, 2 external 2Mps user interfaces and the EOW (audio channel). Hosted in master shelf only. The SPVM2 board in slot 23 is exclusively linked to an OADM/OMDX or OAC. Another SPVM2 can be installed whether in slot #2 or #22 but not in both slots #2 and #22 Depopulated SPVM with one 1510 nm laser, managing 1 x OSC channel Provide the Q3 management interface allowing to the NMS to supervise the equipment: plugged in slot #26 of the master shelf, it is used as LAN_Q to connect the NMS plugged in slot #27, it is used as LAN_I to inter connect the expansion shelves. The LAN board code 3AL 86653 AAAD or later must be used for LAN_I installation in slot 27 of the extension shelf. Any variant of 3AL 86653AA may be used for LAN_Q in slot 26 of the master shelf Hosted in master shelf only, provides 8 input accesses and 8 output accesses Fitted in master shelf only, is used for monitoring the rack alarms Hosted in master shelf only, manages G.703 user channels. For any SPVM, two cards are required The Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card measures the power of each channel. Coupled with MVAC provides automatic power equalization SM optical splitter with SMF MU/PC jumpers, performing passive OCh (linear config.) or OSNCP (ring config) protection. It is linked to 2 adjacent MCC/OCC boards and plugged below the main one.
[22]
[23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30] [31]
[32]
[33] [34]
[35] [36]
[37] [38] [39] [40]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[41]
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 86 / 390
Note [42]
Explanation MM optical splitter. In addition to the features provided by the SM splitter (ref. [41]), it manages the HWF led on its front plate and the LOS alarm SM optical splitter with connectors, having the same features of the SM splitter with jumpers (ref. [41] MM optical splitter with connectors, having the same features of the MM splitter with jumpers (ref.[42] MM optical splitter with connectors, used for protection of 4xANY drawers with 850nm transceiver PSCs work in 1+1 protection meaning that only one PSC is active at once PSC3 is a Power Supply Card (evolution of PSC card for central office shelf) It is equipped with three fans; an antidust filter has to be put just below the fans Dispersion Compensating Modules providing chromatic dispersion compensation. The number in the acronym refers to the SMF distance for which the module provides compensation. DCMs can be placed either in the interstage of an optical amplifier or in the booster and preamplifier of a link. One DCM simultaneously compensates for the chromatic dispersion of all the (up to 32) 1696 channels To be used for external subrack power protection with optinex subrack only Allows the chain connection of the rack alarms, between the SUBD 9p and RJ45 connectors of two RAI cards in two different shelves Used to perform the HK connections from the 25p connector of the HK card to the DDF Used for equipment installation in ANSI & NEBS rack Used for equipment installation in OPTINEX rack The kit contains the fibers to connect 8 transponders to the 8channel MUX/DEMUX (OMDX/OADM) following the installation rules. 2 kits are needed to connect a shelf equipped with 16 transponders The kit contains the fibers to connect 8 wavelenght adapters and SPVM to the 4channel MUX following the installation rules. Optimized solution can be ordered using single MUMU jumpers Required to connect 4xANY HOST to MCC in the same shelf, following installation rules Required to connect 4xANY HOST to the optical splitter (MCC protection) in the same shelf, following the installation rules Used to perform the (2Mbps and 64Kbps) AUX/service channels connection from the 50pin connector of the UIC card to the DDF MUSC/PC jumper for plugin attenuator manager in ODF Used to extract the SFP modules (plugged in 4xANY_P and MCC3) It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect a SM OPC with a couple of transponders, providing 1+1 protection. 8 codes are needed in a fully equipped transponder shelf with sixteen OCC10/MCC (8 + 8). It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect a MM OPC with a couple of transponders, providing 1+1 protection. 8 codes are needed in a fully equipped transponder shelf with sixteen OCC10/MCC (8 + 8). It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect an OPC with a couple of 4xANY drawers, providing 1+1 protection. 16 codes are needed in a fully equipped shelf with 32 (16 + 16) 4xANY drawers in eigth 4xANY Allows the common connection in amplified systems, like the Mux/Demux connection with OAC, connection between two stages of the same OAC, connection between two different OACs and extra or passthrough channel connections (Extra IN/OUT connector of the MuxDemux pair). For details refer to the installation handbook Allows the common connection in nonamplified systems, like the OSC channel (IN/OUT connector of SPVM) and extra or passthrough channel connections (Extra IN/OUT connector of the MuxDemux pair). For details refer to the installation handbook Used to connect the OSMC to the the OMDX/OADM for monitoring Used to connect the OSMC to the OAC monitoring points (stage1 IN/OUT, stage 2 IN/OUT) Used to connect the OMDX/OADM to the OAC Used to remove the opto attenuator plugin Details concerning the software part number are given in the Operators Handbook 01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 87 / 390
[43] [44] [45] [46] [47] [48] [49]
[50] [51] [52] [53] [54] [55] [56] [57] [58] [59] [60] [61] [62] [63] [64] [65]
[66]
[67]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[68] [69] [70] [71]
ED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
2.2.4 1696MS shelf front view Figure 31. Example of Master shelf front view
01
Figure 32. Shelf front view with cover
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
88 / 390
2.3 1696MS_C (compact shelf) physical configuration

The 1696MS_C shelf is a Compact WDM architecture. It is a compact 6 slots shelf with possible expansion to 3 compact shelves (1 master shelf plus 2 expansion shelves). It is dedicated to receive the units developped for the 1696MSPAN shelf. As the 1696MS, the compact shelf has two redundant power feeds for 48V. This architecture enables point to point and ring applications up to 12 channels in LT configuration up to 4 channels in OADM configuration (colored or black and white) monitored by the SPVM board. 1696MS_C rack version powered from 48V DC voltage source from the rack connected to the Power Supply Card.
Figure 33. 1696MS_C Rack version 1696MS_C table version
In a table version using, the operator should wear a wriststrap bracelet connected to the mechanical ground (available on the rear of the shelf) for each handling a board, optical connectors or a part of the shelf.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 34. 1696MS_C Table version with and without cover
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 89 / 390
1Main features provided by the 1696MS_C shelf It is very easy to use due its small size (6 unit slots versus 24 in the 1696MSPAN shelf) Independent stand alone 1696MS_C shelf can be used Units of the 1696MS_C are set horizontally Up to 12 1696MS_C shelves can be set in a 2000 mm high ETSI rack, or a 2150 mm high ANSI rack, or a 1950 mm high NEBS 2000 rack.
2.3.1 1696MS_C Empty shelf 2.3.1.1 1696MS_C Shelf organization The 1696MS_C shelf is organized into three parts (one main part and two extensions parts), hosting 13 boards or unit slots: the main part, which is the middle part and comprises the slots from 1 to 6; here are located the 285 mm high boards performing the elaboration of the signal. This part hosts the equipment and shelf controller, up to 4 transponders, up to 2 TDM concentrators (4xANY), one mux/demux for LT or two mux/dmux or OADM boards (east/west) for hub/OADM application, optical supervisory channel board (optimized application with SPVM_Half, that is a depopulated SPVM supporting one transceiver at 1510 nm instead of two, is possible for point to point and spur configuration)... the first extension part, which is the right part and comprises the slots from 7 to 12; here are located the 88 mm high boards, herebelow listed two redundant 48V power supply boards one LAN access board for the CT or the EML (LAN_Q) connection one housekeeping board with 8 x input access + 8 x output access (HK) one remote alarms board (RAI) one optical protection channel board (OPC) per protected channel the second extension part, which is the left part and comprises slot 13, where are located the fans.
All the optical and electrical connectors are located on the front of the units to be easily accessed. This chapter illustrates the physical structure, layout and composition, coding and partition of the shelf. The shelf front view is illustrated herebelow, in Figure 36. on page 91 and in Figure 37. on page 93. The units codes and partition are listed in Table 10. on page 95.
Second extension part (slot 13)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
First extension part (slot 7 to 12) Main part (slot 1 to 6)
Figure 35. 1696 MS_C Mechanical structure
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 90 / 390
2.3.1.2 1696MS_C Shelf dimensions Shelf size: the size of the 1696MS_C shelf is 446.2mm (19 width) x 274mm (depth with cover) x 132.4 mm (heigth) the depth is compliant with the 300 mm deep ETSI rack (no limitation in ANSI rack). 2.3.1.3 Rack partionning In current release one master shelf and up to two expansion shelves are managed. Slot 6 Slot 5 F A N _C Slot 4 Slot 3 Slot 2 13 Slot 1 Ilink_S
12 11 10 9 8 7
PSC
PSC Fiber drawer
SLAVE MASTER
Slot 6 Ilink_M 12 11 10 9 8 ESC 7 PSC Slot 5 F A N _C Slot 4 Slot 3 Slot 2 13 Slot 1
132.4
LAN_Q
PSC
300 19(446.2 mm)

N.B. dark boards are mandatory Figure 36. 1696 MS_C Main shelf board arrangement
88
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 91 / 390
2.3.2 1696MS_C Shelf configuration rules The board composition and placement of a shelf respects some constraints at the hardware, software and functional levels. If general rules are followed, a certain number of standard configurations can be obtained in which boards can be exchanged without functionality loss. The main configurations available are: OADM 1/2/4 channels (protected backtoback) configuration with/without OPC up to 12 channels Line Terminal Remote 4xANY + protected MCC Remote 4xANY + protected MCC on 1550 nm SPVM Manager 2 channels Line Terminal (MCC + 4xANY)... Local spur (up to two x 4xANY to save cost of one supervision unit).
Amplified configurations are allowed, by means of OAC2 and OAC2_L. The 4xANY drawers 1+1 protection is also allowed, by means of OPCs. 2.3.2.1 1696MS_C configuration constraints Optical SubNetwork Channel Protection requires: Transponder boards (MCC, OCC10) must be placed in consecutive slots (slots [2,3] or [4,5], 4xANY(_S/_P) unit must be placed in a 2slots space beginning with an even address ([2,3] or [4,5]); if two 4xANY are used, they must be installed in in slots ([2,3] and [4,5]); if 4xANY is associated with a MCC all the board are put in a single compact shelf. Each Optical Protecting Channel board (OPC) must be placed in one of the two slots, located on the right side of the corresponding MCC/OCC10 pair (e.g.: the OPC in slot 9 or 10 corresponds to the slots 23). The MCC/OCC10 on the left of the OPC is the main one and the other is the MCC/OCC10 in protection (e.g.: OPC in slot 9 implies main MCC/OCC10 in slot 3 and protecting MCC/OCC10 in slot 2). When protecting 4xANY client signals, the OPCs have to be fitted in the four slots located on the right of the 4xANY couple; the OPC in slot 8 protects drawer #2, the OPC in slot 9 protects drawer #1, the OPC in slot 10 protects drawer #3, the OPC in slot 11 protects drawer #4; When expansion shelves are used in slot 6 of the master shelf have to be plugged the ILink_M board in slot 1 of each expansion shelf have to be plugged the ILink_S board There is no specific NE configuration. The behavior is always the same. The OADM is equivalent to the backto back terminal.
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 92 / 390
2.3.2.2 1696MS_C typical shelf configuration Figure 37. shows a typical configuration of an equipped 1696MS_C Master shelf and Table 10. resumes the possibilities that satisfy the configuration constraints.
Figure 37. Typical 1696MS_C equipped shelf For Hardware and/or Software organization, boards are located on dedicated slots. The position of the boards on the 1696MS_C shelf are: ESC board (mandatory): dedicated slot 1 of master shelf Ilink_M card (mandatory, only when expansion shelves are used): dedicated slot 6 of master shelf Ilink_S card (mandatory): dedicated slot 1 of each expansion shelf PSC/PSC2 cards : dedicated small slots (mandatory equipped) 7 and 12 SPVM cards slot #4, #5, or #6 SPVM in slot #4 must be provisioned to supervise the multiplexed signal SPVM boards set in slot #5 and #6 are dedicated to an application with no multiplexed signal LAN_Q card (mandatory): dedicated small slot 8 HK card can be installed in small slot 11 RAI card can be installed in small slots 9 or 10 OAC2 and OAC2_L cards can be installed in slot 2, 3 FAN_C card (mandatory): dedicated slot 13.
Mandatory boards are: ESC board in slot 1 of master shelf LAN_Q card in slot 8 of master shelf Ilink_M card in slot 6 of the master shelf (only when expansion shelves are used) Ilink_S card in slot 1 of each expansion shelf PSC/PSC2 cards in slots 7 and 12 FAN_C card in slot 13.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 93 / 390
2.3.3 1696MS_C Part list In Table 10. on page 95 of the following paragraph are listed, named and coded the items and units making up the Equipment Shelf (see paragraph 2.2.3.1 on page 76). Furthermore, for any item the position and the maximum quantity that can be allocated inside the equipment, are indicated too. Such table reports the following information : Item Name The Acronym identifying the units ANV part numbers (3ALXXXXX XXXX) Maximum quantity per each shelf Position of the unit inside the equipment. Refer to Figure 36. on page 91 for slot numbering. Number of explanatory notes
Table 11. on page 104 reports the explanatory notes.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 94 / 390
2.3.3.1 1696MS_C shelf and boards designation and reference
Table 10. 1696MS_C boards and units list ANV Part Number 3AL 86799 AA TRIBUTARIES MCC1 192.0192.1 MCC1 192.2192.3 MCC1 192.5192.6 MCC1 192.7192.8 MCC1 193.0193.1 MCC1 193.2193.3 MCC1 193.5193.6 Multirate Channel Card MCC1 193.7193.8 MCC1 194.2194.3 MCC1 194.4194.5 MCC1 194.7194.8 MCC1 194.9195.0 MCC1 195.2195.3 MCC1 195.4195.5 MCC1 195.7195.8 MCC1 195.9196.0 MCC2 192.0192.1 MCC2 192.2192.3 MCC2 192.5192.6 MCC2 192.7192.8 MCC2 193.0193.1 MCC2 193.2193.3 MCC2 193.5193.6 Enhanced Card Multirate Channel MCC2 193.7193.8 MCC2 194.2194.3 MCC2 194.4194.5 MCC2 194.7194.8 MCC2 194.9195.0 MCC2 195.2195.3 MCC2 195.4195.5 MCC2 195.7195.8 MCC2 195.9196.0 3AL 86603 AA 3AL 86603 AB 3AL 86603 AC 3AL 86603 AD 3AL 86603 AE 3AL 86603 AF 3AL 86603 AG 3AL 86603 AH 3AL 86603 AL 3AL 86603 AM 3AL 86603 AN 3AL 86603 AP 3AL 86603 AQ 3AL 86603 AR 3AL 86603 AS 3AL 86603 AT 3AL 86603 BA 3AL 86603 BB 3AL 86603 BC 3AL 86603 BD 3AL 86603 BE 3AL 86603 BF 3AL 86603 BG 3AL 86603 BH 3AL 86603 BL 3AL 86603 BM 3AL 86603 BN 3AL 86603 BP 3AL 86603 BQ 3AL 86603 BR 3AL 86603 BS 3AL 86603 BT 4 2B6 3 4 2B6 2 Max Q.ty Not e 1
NAME
ACRONYM MECHANICAL STRUCTURE
SLOT
1696MS_C shelf
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 95 / 390
NAME
ACRONYM MCC3 192.0192.1 MCC3 192.2192.3 MCC3 192.5192.6 MCC3 192.7192.8 MCC3 193.0193.1 MCC3 193.2193.3 MCC3 193.5193.6
ANV Part Number 3AL 95150 AA 3AL 95150 AB 3AL 95150 AC 3AL 95150 AD 3AL 95150 AE 3AL 95150 AF 3AL 95150 AG 3AL 95150 AH 3AL 95150 AJ 3AL 95150AK 3AL 95150 AL 3AL 95150 AM 3AL 95150 AN 3AL 95150 AP 3AL 95150 AQ 3AL 95150 AR
Max Q.ty
SLOT
Not e
Enhanched Multirate CH 19x.x0019x.x00 with SFP optical modules
MCC3 193.7193.8 MCC3 194.2194.3 MCC3 194.4194.5 MCC3 194.7194.8 MCC3 194.9195.0 MCC3 195.2195.3 MCC3 195.4195.5 MCC3 195.7195.8 MCC3 195.9196.0
2B6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 96 / 390
NAME
ACRONYM OCC10 192.000 OCC10 192.100 OCC10 192.200 OCC10 192.300 OCC10 192.500 OCC10 192.600 OCC10 192.700 OCC10 192.800 OCC10 193.000 OCC10 193.100 OCC10 193.200 OCC10 193.300 OCC10 193.500 OCC10 193.600 OCC10 193.700 OCC10 193.800 OCC10 142.200 OCC10 194.300 OCC10 194.400 OCC10 194.500 OCC10 194.700 OCC10 194.800 OCC10 194.900 OCC10 195.000 OCC10 195.200 OCC10 195.300 OCC10 195.400 OCC10 195.500 OCC10 195.700 OCC10 195.800 OCC10 195.900 OCC10 196.000 4xANY 4xANY_S 4xANY_P
ANV Part Number 3AL 86834 AA 3AL 86834 AB 3AL 86834 AC 3AL 86834 AD 3AL 86834 AE 3AL 86834 AF 3AL 86834 AG 3AL 86834 AH 3AL 86834 AL 3AL 86834 AM 3AL 86834 AN 3AL 86834 AP 3AL 86834 AQ 3AL 86834 AR 3AL 86834 AS 3AL 86834 AT 3AL 86834 BA 3AL 86834 BB 3AL 86834 BC 3AL 86834 BD 3AL 86834 BE 3AL 86834 BF 3AL 86834 BG 3AL 86834 BH 3AL 86834 BL 3AL 86834 BM 3AL 86834 BN 3AL 86834 BP 3AL 86834 BQ 3AL 86834 BR 3AL 86834 BS 3AL 86834 BT 3AL 86639 AA 3AL 86872 AA 3AL 95063 AA
Max Q.ty
SLOT
Not e
OCC10 CH 192.000 OCC10 CH 192.100 OCC10 CH 192.200 OCC10 CH 192.300 OCC10 CH 192.500 OCC10 CH 192.600 OCC10 CH 192.700 OCC10 CH 192.800 OCC10 CH 193.000 OCC10 CH 193.100 OCC10 CH 193.200 OCC10 CH 193.300 OCC10 CH 193.500 OCC10 CH 193.600 OCC10 CH 193.700 OCC10 CH 193.800 OCC10 CH 194.200 OCC10 CH 194.300 OCC10 CH 194.400 OCC10 CH 194.500 OCC10 CH 194.700 OCC10 CH 194.800 OCC10 CH 194.900 OCC10 CH 195.000 OCC10 CH 195.200 OCC10 CH 195.300 OCC10 CH 195.400 OCC10 CH 195.500 OCC10 CH 195.700 OCC10 CH 195.800 OCC10 CH 195.900 OCC10 CH 196.000 4xANY Host w/ I16.1 i/f 4xANY Host w/ S16.1 i/f 4xANY Host fully pluggable
2B6
2 2
2;4 2;4
6, 7 8, 7 9, 7
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 97 / 390
NAME
ACRONYM
ANV Part Number 3AL 86673 AA 3AL 86674 AA 3AL 86672 AA 3AL 86869 AA 3AL 86870 AA 3AL 81617 AA
Max Q.ty
SLOT
Not e 10 11 12 13, 7 14, 7 15, 7

TRIBUTARY SUBSYSTEM (4xANY DRAWERS) 4 X ANY SDH/SONET cartridge 4 X ANY Low speed cartridge 4 X ANY High speed optical cartridge 4 X ANY Low speed optical cartridge 4 X ANY High speed optical cartridge 4 X ANY Low speed plugin 1310 (OLI) STM1 SFP (S1.1, FE, FDDI, 100BaseLX) STM1 SFP S1.1 W/DDM STM1 SFP L1.1 STM1 SFP L1.2 STM4 SFP (S4.1, ESCON) STM4 SFP S4.1 W/DDM STM4 SFP L4.1 STM4 SFP L4.2 1.25GBE SFP (Gbe1000LX/LH 1 FiberChannel 1300nm stop gap 1.25GBE SFP Gbe 1000 LX/LH W/DDM 1.25GBE SFP (Gbe 1000 SX, 1 Fiber Channel 850 nm stop gap 1.25GBE SFP Gbe 1000 SX W/DDM 1.25GBE SFP Gbe 1000 ZX SFP 1FC, 2FC 850 nm W/DDM SFP 1FC, 2FC 1310 nm W/DDM STM16 SFP (S16.1, 2FC stop gap) STM16 SFP I16.1 STM16 SFP S16.1 W/DDM STM16 SFP I16.1 W/DDM STM16 SFP S16.1 multirate/ multiformat W/DDM STM16 SFP L16.1 STM16 SFP L16.2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SDHSONET_1310 Drawer LF_1310_2 Drawer HF_1310 Drawer LF_850 Drawer HF_850 Drawer
SFP MODULES SFP_Generic SFP_Generic SFP_Generic SFP_Generic SFP_S4_1 SFP_S4_1 SFP_Generic SFP_GBE_LX SFP_GBE_LX SFP_GBE_SX SFP_GBE_SX SFP_Generic SFP_FC_S SFP_FC_L SFP_S16_1 SFP_I16_1 SFP_S16_1 SFP_I16_1 SFP _S16_1 SFP_Generic SFP_Generic 1AB 19467 0001 contact Alcatel 1AB 19467 0002 1AB 19467 0003 1AB 19636 0001 contact Alcatel 1AB 19636 0003 1AB 19636 0002 1AB 18728 0001 contact Alcatel 1AB 18728 0002 contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel 1AB 19637 0001 1AB 19637 0002 contact Alcatel contact Alcatel 1AB 19637 0007 1AB 19637 0004 1AB 19637 0003
16
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 98 / 390
NAME
ACRONYM
ANV Part Number 1AB 19634 0001 1AB 19634 0002 1AB 19634 0003 1AB 19634 0004 1AB 19634 0005 1AB 19634 0006 1AB 19634 0007 1AB 19634 0008 contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
Max Q.ty
SLOT
Not e
STM16 CWDM 1470 NM PIN STM16 CWDM 1490 NM PIN STM16 CWDM 1510 NM PIN STM16 CWDM 1530 NM PIN STM16 CWDM 1550 NM PIN STM16 CWDM 1570 NM PIN STM16 CWDM 1590 NM PIN STM16 CWDM 1610 NM PIN STM16 CWDM 1470 NM PIN ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1490 NM PIN ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1510 NM PIN ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1530 NM PIN ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1550 NM PIN ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1570 NM PIN ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1590 NM PIN ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1610 NM PIN ext Temp Range SFP_C_Bronze
16 17
SFP_C_Bronze contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 99 / 390
NAME STM16 CWDM 1470 STC STM16 CWDM 1490 STC STM16 CWDM 1510 STC STM16 CWDM 1530 STC STM16 CWDM 1550 STC STM16 CWDM 1570 STC STM16 CWDM 1590 STC STM16 CWDM 1610 STC STM16 CWDM 1470 STC ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1490 STC ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1510 STC ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1530 STC ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1550 STC ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1570 STC ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1590 STC ext Temp Range STM16 CWDM 1610 STC ext Temp Range NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD NM APD
ACRONYM
ANV Part Number 1AB19635 0001 1AB 19635 0002 1AB 19635 0003 1AB 19635 0004
Max Q.ty
SLOT
Not e
SFP_C_Silver 1AB 19635 0005 1AB 19635 0006 1AB 19635 0007 1AB 19635 0008 contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel SFP_C_Silver contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel contact Alcatel
16 18
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 100 / 390
NAME
ACRONYM MULTIPLEXERS
ANV Part Number
Max Q.ty
SLOT
Not e
1x8 Mux/Demux 300380 + EXP + SPV 1x8Mux/Demux 300380+EXP 1x8 Mux/Demux 200280 1x8 Mux/Demux 520600 1x8 Mux/Demux 420500 OADM 8 CH 300380 + SPV OADM 8 CH 200280 + SPV OADM 8 CH 520600 + SPV OADM 8 CH 420500 + SPV OADM 4 CH 200230 + SPV OADM 4 CH 250280 + SPV OADM 4 CH 300330 + SPV OADM 4 CH 350380 + SPV OADM 4 CH 420450 + SPV OADM 4 CH 470500 + SPV OADM 4 CH 520550 + SPV OADM 4 CH 570600 + SPV
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS OMDX8100_M_L1_X OMDX8100_M_L2 OMDX8100_M_S1 OMDX8100_M_S2 OADM8100_M_L1_S OADM8100_M_L2_S OADM8100_M_S1_S OADM8100_M_S2_S OADM4100_M_ch2023_S OADM4100_M_ch2528_S OADM4100_M_ch3033_S OADM4100_M_ch3538_S OADM4100_M_ch4245_S OADM4100_M_ch4750_S OADM4100_M_ch5255_S OADM4100_M_ch5760_S OADM2100_M_3031_S OADM2100_M_3233_S
3AL 86615 AA 3AL 86615 AJ 3AL 86615 AB 3AL 86615 AC 3AL 86615 AD 3AL 86637 AA 3AL 86637 AB 3AL 86637 AC 3AL 86637 AD 3AL 86637 BC 3AL 86637 BD 3AL 86637 BA 3AL 86637 BB 3AL 86637 BG 3AL 86637 BH 3AL 86637 BE 3AL 86637 BF 3AL 86778 AB 3AL 86778 AC 3AL 86778 AD 3AL 86778 AE 3AL 86778 AF 3AL 86777 AE 3AL 86777 AJ 3AL 86777 AK 3AL 86777 AL 3AL 86777 AM 3AL 86777 AN 3AL 86777 AP 3AL 86777 AQ 3AL 86777 AR 3AL 86777 BE 3AL 86777 BF 3AL 86777 BN 3AL 86779 AA 3AL 86779 BA 3AL 86703 AC 3AL 86703 AD 1 3 5;6 8B11 2 4;5;6 2 4;5;6 2 4;5;6 2 4;5;6 2 4;5:6
19 20 21
22, 23, 24
25, 23
2 channels OADM with SPV card
OADM2100_M_3536_S OADM2100_M_3738_S OADM2100_M_4748_S OADM1100_M_25_S OADM1100_M_30_S OADM1100_M_31_S OADM1100_M_32_S OADM1100_M_33_S OADM1100_M_35_S OADM1100_M_36_S OADM1100_M_37_S OADM1100_M_38_S OADM1100_M_47_S OADM1100_M_48_S OADM1100_M_57_S
26
1 channel OADM with SPV cards
27
Supervision Filter (SPV_F_1310_1550) Supervision Filter card

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
card
SPV_F_1310_1550 SPV_F_C OPTICAL AMPLIFIER OAC2 OAC2_L
28 29
OFA +17 dBm (22/9) OFA +17 dBm (28/9)
2,3
30
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 101 / 390
NAME
ACRONYM CONTROLLER
ANV Part Number 3AL 86661 AA 1AB 15205 0001 3AL 86606 AB 3AL 86606 AC 3AL 86653 AA 3AL 86668 AA 3AL 87009 AA 3AL 86805 AA 3AL 86808 AA 3AL 86708 AA 3AL 86708 AB 3AL 86708 AC 3AL 86708 AD 3AL 95113 AA 3AL 86888 AA 3AL 86825 AA 3AL 95210 AA 3AL 95239 AA 3AL 86802 AA 3AN 51151 AA 1AB 15169 0013 1AB 15169 0007 1AB 15169 0014 1AB 15169 0008 1AB 15169 0009 1AB 15169 0010 1AB 15169 0011 1AB 15169 0012
Max Q.ty 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
SLOT
Not e 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Equipment and Shelf Controller FLASH CARD 80 MB SPVM + OW SPVM_H LAN Access card Housekeeping card Rack Alarm Interface board ILINK MASTER ILINK_SLAVE Optical Protection Card Dual MM Optical Splitter OPC SMOPC CONNECTORS MMOPC CONNECTORS MM_OPC_850 PSC_C Power Management Unit Batteries for PMU Power supply BOX COMPACT FAN COMPACT DUST FILTER DCM5 DCM10 DCM15 DCM20 DCM30 DCM40 DCM60 DCM80
ESC MEMDEV SPVM2 SPVM_H LAN_Q HK RAI ILINK_M ILINK_S OPC OPC OPC OPC OPC POWER SUPPLY PSC2 PMU FANS FAN_C DCM5 DCM10 DCM15 DCM20 DCM30 DCM40 DCM60 DCM80
1 1 4;5;6 4;5;6 8 11 9;10 6 1
SWITCHING PROTECTION 39 4 8B11 40 41 42 43 2 1 1 1 7;12 13 13 44 45 46 47
OPTICAL COMPENSATION DEVICE
48
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 102 / 390
NAME
ACRONYM
ANV Part Number 1AB 16271 0006 3AL 95073 AA 3AL 95101 AAAA 3AN 51124 AAAA 3AL 95179 AA 3AL 95264 AA 3AL 81728 AAAA 1AB 18240 0049 1AB 18240 0004 1AB 18240 0007 3AL 95185 AAAA 3AL 95186 AAAA 1AB 18240 0004 3AN 50555 AA 3AN 50556 AA 1AB 20480 0001 1AB 20480 0002 1AB 20480 0003 1AB 20480 0004 1AB 20480 0005 1AB 20480 0006 1AB 20480 0007 1AB 20480 0008 1AB 20480 0009 1AB 20480 0010 1AB 20480 0011 1AB 20480 0012 1AB 20480 0013 1AB 20480 0014 1AB 20480 0015 1AB 20480 0016 1AB 18240 0042 1AB 18240 0050 1AD 03860 0002
Max Q.ty 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 4 4 2 2 4 6 6
SLOT
Not e 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES Circuit breaker 15A 72VDC HK user cable 1696MS_C ANSI install. kit Kit for C_shelf install on ETSI rack ILink cable Cable from BOX to PSC/PSC2 SFP module extractor kit JUMPER SMF MU/MU CABLE 2MM 1700MM JUMPER SMF MU/PCMU/PC 360MM JUMPER SMF MU/PCMU/PC 450MM KIT OPC connection SM KIT OPC connection MM Jumper SM MU/PCLC/PC cable Dummy plate 4TE for PBA Dummy plate 4TE for UTILITY Opto atten MU/PC 1dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 2dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 3dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 4dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 5dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 6dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 7dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 8dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 9dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 10dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 11dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 12dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 13dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 14dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 15dB plug type Opto atten MU/PC 20dB plug type JumperSM MU/MU cable 2mm 810 JumperSM MU/MU cable 2mm 500 REMOVAL TOOL PLUG_IN ATTEN. MU/PC SOFTWARE 57 58 59 60
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
1 61 62
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 103 / 390
Table 11. 1696MS_C explanatory notes Note 1 2 Explanation It is the equipment shelf, including the back panel. It is a universal bidirectional multiclock 3R transponder supporting all the most common bit rates (from 100 Mbps to 2.5 Gbps) and tunable over two coloured wavelenghts in C band. In case of protection, 2 adjacent MCCs and 1 x OPC are required 3R transponder supporting all the MCC functions (see [3]) plus VOA to adjust the output optical power It performs all the MCC2 functions but the optical client interface is replaced by SFP (S1.1, L1.1, L1.2, S4.1, L4.1, L4.2, S16.1, I16.1, L16.1, L16.2, CWDM, GbEthernet, FC, 2 FC, ESCON...) optical modules 10Gbps Optical Channel Card designed for 3R transport of 10 Gbps native signals. This transponder, compliant with ITUT G.709 Rec, can be provisioned to accept the following client signals any STM64/OC192 (9.953Gbps) to serve as UNI and nonSDH/SONET signals (10GbeWAN) 10.3125 Gbps (10Gbe LAN) TDM concentrator multiplexing any mix of up to four client signals (100MbpsB1.25 Gbps) into a B&W (@ 1310nm) 2.5 Gbps optical channel, SDH/SONET framing standard (STM16/OC48) compliant. It is used with a MCC transponder which provides the coloured optic for WDM transmission. 2.5Gbps interface is I16.1. It occupies two slots: the first slot is always an even position (i:e: 23; 45;..) To take into account more stringent EMI requirement with the compact shelf using, the 4xANY and 4xANY_S, the end of Alcatel code must be: 4xANY High speed 850 nm cartridge HF850_Drawer 3AL 86870 AAAG 4xANY Low speed 850 nm cartridge LF850_Drawer 3AL 86869 AAAG 4xANY Host w/ S16.1 i/f 4xANY_S 3AL 86872 AAAC It differs from the above 4xANY boards (see point [7]) only for the optical 2.5Gbps interface: it is S16.1 type, allowing to cover a longer span (15 Km for S16.1; 2 Km for I16.1) TDM concentrator (4xAny) with B&W (I16.1, S16.1) or CWDM pluggable (by means of SFP optical modules) 2,5Gbps optical interface 2nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting STM1/OC3 and STM4/OC12. If it is set as STM1, up to four drawers can be housed in one 4xANY board; if it is set as STM4, up to three drawers can be housed. STM1 drawers can be plugged on any slot. STM4 drawers can be plugged only on ports #3 and #4; for 3 x STM4 configuration only, port #1 is available, too 2nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, DV. Up to four low frequency (FE, FDDI, ESCON, DV) drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY 2nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Gigabit Ethernet, FICON and FC Up to two high frequency drawers can be housed only on ports #3 and #4 of a 4xANY board 1nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, DV Up to four low frqeuency (FE, FDDI, ESCON, DV) drawers can be housed on any port of a 4xANY 1nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Gigabit Ethernet, FICON and FC Up to two high frqeuency drawers can be housed only on ports #3 and #4 of a 4xANY board 2nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Digital Video transport. Up to four low frequency drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY STM1/4/16, GBE, Fiber Channel (2FC, 1FC).... SFP optical plugin modules; they can be fitted in 4xANY_P and/or MCC3 boards (refer to Figure 47. on page 118 for SFP placing) It is the Bronze CWDM (SFP STM16) It is the Silver CWDM (SFP STM16) 8 x L1 ch Mux/Demux with expansion (LB/SB combiner/splitter) and Supervision, for hub nodes. Slots 4,5,6 are available in master shelf only. Starting MUX if 32 channels hub extension is required without amplifiers
3 4
8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
19
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 104 / 390
Note 20
Explanation 8 x L1 ch Mux/Demux with expansion (LB/SB combiner/splitter), for hub nodes. Slots 4,5,6 are available in master shelf only. Starting MUX if 32 supervised channels hub extension is required when amplifiers are used 8 x L2/S1/S2 ch Mux/Demux for hub nodes, used to upgrade the L1 Mux/Demux Allow to add/drop 8 supervised channels in L1 (30B38)/L2 (20B28)/S1 (52B60)/S2 (42B50) band Can be used also as MUX/DEMUX SW managed in future releases Allow to add/drop the 4 supervised channels shown in its own acronym Allow to add/drop the 2 supervised channels shown in its own acronym Allow to add/drop the supervised channel shown in its own acronym. From 25 to 38 are long band channels: from 47 to 57 are short band channels Allow to mux/demux a 1310nm channel, a 1550nm multiplexed signal and the SPV/OSC (1510nm) channel. This board allows to supervise a CPE Insert/extract the SPV channel to/from a 1310nm or 1550nm channel, allowing to supervise a CPE; slot 8 is available in expansion shelf only Doublestage optical amplifiers able to amplify all the channels. OAC2 provides short span transmission. OAC2_L provides long spans transmission. It includes both the equipment and shelf controller functionalities. The flash card contains the equipment data base. 1510nm Optical Supervisory Channel card managing up to 2 x 1510nm OSC, 2 external 2Mps user interfaces and the EOW (audio channel). The SPVM2 board in slot 4 is exclusively linked to an OADM/OMDX. Another SPVM2 can be installed whether in slot #5 or #6 but not in both slots #5 and #6 Depopulated SPVM with one 1510 nm laser, managing 1 x OSC channel Provide the Q3 management interface allowing to the NMS to supervise the equipment. It is directly connected to the manager Hosted in master shelf only, provides 8 input accesses and 8 output accesses Fitted in master shelf only, is used for monitoring the rack alarms Allow the communication between the master shelf and the up to two expansion shelves, by means of a direct connection from ILINK_M (slot 6 of master shelf) and ILINK_S (slot 1 of each exp. shelf) Single Mode optical splitter with SMF MU/PC jumpers, performing passive OCh (linear config) or OSNCP (ring) protection. It is linked to 2 adjacent MCC/OCCs and plugged below the main one Multi Mode optical splitter. In addition to the features provided by the SM splitter (ref. 39), it manages the HWF led on its front plate and the LOS alarm SM optical splitter with connectors, having the same features of the SM splitter with jumpers (ref. 39) MM optical splitter with connectors having the same features of the MM splitter with jumpers (ref. 40) MM optical splitter with connectors, used for protection of 4xANY drawers with 850nm transceiver PSC2 is an evolution of the PSC card for the compact shelf but supply less power. It works in 1+1 protection meaning that only one board is active at once; it can be plugged both in master and slave shelves External module transforming the alternative 110/230V voltage into a 48V continuous wave, thus allowing a 1696MS_C to be plugged directly to a power supply (avoiding the usage of a telecom rack for feeding) For power distribution; it is used only in table version FAN module for compact shelf. It is equipped with two fans; an antidust filter has to be put on the left side of the fans
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
45
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
46 47
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 105 / 390
Note 48
Explanation Dispersion Compensating Modules providing chromatic dispersion compensation. The number in the acronym refers to the SMF distance for which the module provides compensation. DCMs can be placed either in the interstage of an optical amplifier or in the booster and preamplifier of a link. One DCM simultaneously compensates for the chromatic dispersion of all the 1696 channels To be used for external subrack power protection with optinex subrack only Used to perform the HK connections from the 25p connector of the HK card to the DDF Used for the 1696MS_C installation in ANSI rack; it includes power supply cable, alarm PDU cable... Used for the 1696MS_C installation in ETSI rack; it includes power supply cable, RAITRU cable... Used to connect Ilink_M (in master shelf) with ILink_S (one per each slave shelf) Power supply cable used only in table version. It has to be connected between the BOX and the power supply card (input power connector) Used to extract the SFP modules (plugged in 4xANY_P and MCC3) Used to connect each other boards located in different shelves; i.e. the OCC10/MCC with the relevant MUX/DEMUX and/or the MUX/DEMUX with the OAC Used to connect each other boards located in the same shelf; i.e. the OCC10/MCC with the relevant MUX/DEMUX and/or the MUX/DEMUX with the OAC It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect a SM OPC with a couple of transponders, providing 1+1 protection. 2 codes are needed in a fully equipped transponder shelf with four OCC10/MCC (2 + 2). It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect a MM OPC with a couple of transponders, providing 1+1 protection. 2 codes are needed in a fully equipped transponder shelf with four OCC10/MCC (2 + 2). It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect an OPC with a couple of 4xANY drawers, providing 1+1 protection. 4 codes are needed in a fully equipped shelf with 8 (4 + 4) 4xANY drawers in two 4xANY Used to remove the opto attenuator plugin Details concerning the software part number are given in the Operators Handbook
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 106 / 390
2.3.3.2 FAN_C board A particular board adapted for the compact shelf is available. It also enables to manage the Power Monitoring Unit to feed the shelf with the alternative mains supply.
Figure 38. Fan_C board
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 107 / 390
2.4 Equipment connections

The external connections of the 1696MSPAN may fall into to following categories: optical management maintenance power supply user interfaces
All the equipment connection are detailed in the Installation Handbook. Next paragraph 2.5 on page 112 presents the front view of all the cards, where the connection points can be identified. In the following some general indication and reference to the relevant front view are given.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 108 / 390
2.4.1 Optical connections 2.4.1.1 Optical connections made with simple MU connectors
See Figure 39. The optical connections are made with simple MU connectors on: MCC boards, see Figure 42. on page 113 OPC boards, see Figure 67. on page 138 SPVM boards, see Figure 58. on page 129 and Figure 59. on page 130 MVAC boards, see Figure 46. on page 117.
Figure 39. Simple MU optical connector 2.4.1.2 Optical connections made with double MU connectors See Figure 40. The optical connections are made with double MU connectors on: OMDX and OADM boards, see para. 2.5.2 on page 119 OAC boards, see Figure 56. on page 127 OCC10 boards, see Figure 44. on page 115 SPV_F boards, see Figure 54. on page 125 and Figure 55. on page 126. OSMC boards, see on page
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 109 / 390
Figure 40. Double MU optical connector 2.4.1.3 Optical connections made with LC connectors The optical connections are made with LC connectors on: 4xANY boards (both client and aggregate sides), see Figure 45. on page 116 all the Small Formfactor Modules (STM16, GBEthernet, CWDM..) plugged on 4xANY (aggregate side) and MCC3 (client side) boards, see Figure 41. on page 110, Figure 43. on page 114, Figure 45. on page 116, Figure 47. on page 118. SFP STM16 optical module
Optical cables
Figure 41. LC/SPC optical connector on SFP modules
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 110 / 390
2.4.2 Management and maintenance connections 2.4.2.1 Housekeeping

The housekeeping alarm signal are available on the front panel connector of the HK board. It is a 25 pin SUBD Female connector. Note: 25 pin SUBD connector is connected to GNDM by the 2 screws holes called pin 26 and pin 27. See Figure 64. on page 135. 2.4.2.2 Rack Alarm Interfaces The rack alarm interface signals are available on the two front panel connectors of the RAI board. These two interfaces are: A 9 pins SUBD female connector, which provides the interface between the master shelf and the TRU (or PDU), A 6 pins RJ11 connector, which provides the interface between two shelves. See Figure 65. on page 136. 2.4.2.3 LAN accesses The LAN board provides LAN accesses on both RJ45 and BNC connectors. * LAN access code 3AL 86653 AAAD or later must be used for LAN_I installations in slot 27. Any variant of 3AL 86653AA may be used for LAN_Q in master slot 26. See Figure 63. on page 134. 2.4.2.4 Q3 Interface At the ESC front panel, a 9pin SUBD female connector provides an access to an Q3 interface. It allows to connect a Craft Terminal. See Figure 57. on page 128. 2.4.2.5 1696MS_C Intershelf link The 15pin SUBD female connector, located on the front panel of the Ilink_M and Ilink_S boards, allows to link the SPI bus and the card presence signal from slave to master 1696MS_C shelves. 2.4.2.6 DBG Interface Connector 8pin RJ45 connectors at the frontpanel of the ESC board, are used for the DBG interface (factory tests). See Figure 57. on page 128. 2.4.3 Power supply connections Power supply voltage is distributed to the shelves on a 3 pin SUBD connector, in front panel of each PSC. See Figure 68. on page 139. It is also available on the M1 and M2 connectors of the Power Monitoring Unit. 2.4.4 User interfaces
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The user interfaces are available on the front panel connector of the UIC(s). 52 pin SCSI2 Female connector of the UIC. Note: 50 pin SUBD connector is connected to GNDM by the 2 screws holes called pin 51 and pin 52. See Figure 66. on page 137.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 111 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED 2.5 Units front view
01
The following paragraphs show the units front views and the relevant access points (Leds, switches etc.) together with legenda and meaning.
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
112 / 390
2.5.1 Tributaries front view
ACRONYM MCC1
1696MS SLOTS 4;5;6;7; 8;9;10;11 14;15;16;17; 18;19;20;21
1696MS_C SLOTS
3AL86603XX
Extraction handle
2; 3; 4; 5; 6
MCC2
Power failure LED Out Of Service LED Abnormal Rx LED Abnormal Tx LED Hardware failure LED APSD restart pushbutton
Access points description

Name Meaning This led is ON when the board is plugged in absence of Green led hardware failure (HWF) This led is ON when the board is plugged but not configured by Yellow led the software Rx abnormal: problem on the receive side, depending on the configuration. The LED is ON when Yellow led 1) Add/Drop configuration: WDM Rx alarm or User Tx alarm 2) Passthrough configuration: WDM Rx alarm Tx abnormal: problem on the transmit side, depending on the configuration. The LED is ON when 1) Add/Drop configuration: User Rx alarm or WDM Tx alarm Yellow led 2) Passthrough configuration: WDM Tx alarm 3) Shutdown of the WDM Tx Hardware failure. The LED is green when the board is plugged, configured and without failure yellow when the board is plugged and in firmware download state* red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in failure (OR on the power supply alarms) or C_TYPE User Rx User Reception: client input signal (from client) User Tx User Transmission: client output signal (to client) WDM Rx WDM Reception: WDM input signal from OMDX/OADM WDM Tx WDM Transmission: WDM output signal to OMDX/OADM N.B. * When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board will not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair. Make sure fibers are disconnected when plugging / unplugging the card.
User Rx
User Tx
WDM Rx
Green / Yellow / Red led
WDM Tx
Optical safety label
N.B.
Extraction handle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 42. MCC1 and MCC2 boards Front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 113 / 390
ACRONYM
3AL95150AX
MCC3
8;9;10;11 14;15;16;17; 18;19;20;21
2; 3; 4; 5; 6
Power failure LED Out Of Service LED Abnormal Rx LED Abnormal Tx LED Hardware failure LED APSD restart pushbutton

Name Meaning This led is ON when the board is plugged in absence of Green led hardware failure (HWF) This led is ON when the board is plugged but not configured by Yellow led the software Rx abnormal: problem on the receive side, depending on the configuration. The LED is ON when Yellow led 1) Add/Drop configuration: WDM Rx alarm or User Tx alarm 2) Passthrough configuration: WDM Rx alarm Tx abnormal: problem on the transmit side, depending on the configuration. The LED is ON when 1) Add/Drop configuration: User Rx alarm or WDM Tx alarm Yellow led 2) Passthrough configuration: WDM Tx alarm 3) Shutdown of the WDM Tx Hardware failure. The LED is green when the board is plugged, configured and without failure red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in failure (OR on the power supply alarms) or C_TYPE User Tx User Transmission: client output signal (to client)* User Rx User Reception: client input signal (from client)* WDM Rx WDM Reception: WDM input signal from OMDX/OADM WDM Tx WDM Transmission: WDM output signal to OMDX/OADM N.B. * User TX and User RX access points have to be equipped with Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP) optical modules, shown in Figure 47. on page 118 Optical safety label WDM Tx
User Tx (SFP)** User Rx (SFP)**
WDM Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Extraction handle
Figure 43. MCC3 board Front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 114 / 390
1696MS SLOTS 4;5;6;7;
1696MS_C SLOTS
Extraction handle
ACRONYM
OCC10
1696MS 1696MS_C SLOTS SLOTS 4;5;6;7; 8;9;10;11 14;15;16;17; 2; 3; 4; 5; 6 18;19;20;21 Access points description
3AL86834XX
Extraction handle
Name
Meaning
Power failure Led Out Of Service Led Abnormal Rx Led Abnormal Tx Led Hardware failure Led
Managed by hardware. This led is ON when the board is Green led plugged in absence of hardware failure (HWF) This led is ON when the board is plugged but not configured by Yellow led the software Rx abnormal: problem on the receive side. Managed by SW. The LED is ON when (LOS/LOF_OTN/LOM_OTN)_WDM_RX Yellow led DEG_OUT_User_TX The LED is ON only if the alarm is shown Tx abnormal: problem on the transmit side. Managed by SW. The LED is ON when SD or (LOS_User_RX Yellow led (LOS/DEG_OUT/TOR)_WDM_TX The LED is ON only if the alarm is shown Hardware failure. Managed by SW. The LED is green when the board is plugged, configur and without failure yellow when the board is in firmware download state* red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in failure (OR on the power supply alarms) User Rx User Reception: client input signal (from client) User Tx User Transmission: client output signal (to client) WDM Rx WDM Reception: WDM input signal from OMDX/OADM WDM Tx WDM Transmission: WDM output signal to OMDX/OADM 10 Gbps front panel link to substitute back panel links, when only 2.5Gb back panel is present
APSD restart pushbutton
User Rx User Tx WDM Rx WDM Tx
10Gbps Rx
10Gbps Tx
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
* When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board will not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair. ** When the board is configured in loopback, the RXA and TXA LEDs are always turned OFF.
Extraction handle
Figure 44. OCC10 front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 115 / 390
ACRONYM 4 X ANY
89; 1011; 4 X ANY_S 1213; 1415; 4 X ANY_P 1617; 1819; 2021; 2223
23; 45
Power presence LED Out Of Service LED Abnormal reception LED Abnormal transmission LED Hardware failure LED
Drawer 3 Power presence LED
Drawer 1 Power presence LED
Tx Client Rx signal 3

Name Meaning Client Tx signal Rx 1 Drawer 4 Power presence LED PWR Managed by hardware. It is ON when the board is Green led plugged and no power failure detected OOS This led is ON when the board is plugged but not conYellow led figured by the software RXA Yellow led TXA Yellow led Green / Yellow / Red led Rx abnormal: problem on the receive side. ON means SD drawers ILOS on STM16 side. Managed by software Tx abnormal: problem on the transmit side. ON means Drawer 2 ILOS on drawer side. Power presence Managed by software. LED Hardware failure. The LED is Green when the board is plugged, configured and without failure Yellow when the board is plugged and in firmware Client Tx download state* signal Rx Red when one of the On Board power supply 2 (OBPS) is in failure (OR on the power supply alarms) * When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board will not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair. ** On 4xANY_P only, the STM16 aggregate signal is provided by means of Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP) optical modules, shown in Figure 47. on page 118 Make sure fibers are disconnected when plugging / unplugging the drawers or the 4xANY host card.
Tx Client Rx signal 4
N.B.
Tx STM16 aggregate Rxsignal **

HAZARD LEVEL 1 LASER PRODUCT
N.B.
3ALXXXXX X
Extraction handle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 45. 4 ANY front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 116 / 390
1696MS 1696MS_C SLOTS SLOTS 23; 45; 67;
Extraction handle
ACRONYM
Extraction handle
MVAC
8;9;10;11 14;15;16;17; 18;19;20;21
Not used
Hardware failure LED

Name Meaning VOA1 input PWR Power and hardware failure led. It is Green/Red Green when the board is plugged, configured and without led failure Red when the card is plugged and in hardware failure In1 In2 Out1 Out2 Input signals (cable connection 1 and 2) to be adjusted by the 2 VOAs of the MVAC board Output signals (cable connection 1 and 2) adjusted/optimized by the 2 VOAs of the MVAC board VOA2 input
VOA1 output
VOA2 output
Extraction handle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 46. MVAC front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 117 / 390
3AL86892AA
1696MS SLOTS 4;5;6;7;
1696MS_C SLOTS
ACRONYM STM16 SFP: S16.1/2FC; I16.1; L16.1; L16.2; S16.1; S16.1 multirate STM16 SFP: Bronze/PIN CWDM STM16 SFP: Silver/APD CWDM STM1 SFP: S1.1/FE/FDDI/100BaseLX; L1.1; L1.2 STM4 SFP: S4.1/ESCON; L4.1; L4.2 1.25GBE SFP: GBE1000LX/LH/1FC 1300nm; GBE1000SX/1FC 850nm; GBE1000ZX 1FC SFP: 1FC/2FC 850nm; 1FC/2FC 1310nm
EQUIPPED ON PORT
4xANY_P MCC3
MCC3
SFP optical module
OUTPUT SIGNAL
INPUT SIGNAL
Optical cables
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 47. SFP optical module
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 118 / 390
2.5.2 Multiplexers front view

3AL86615XX
ACRONYM OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
(shown in figure)
1696MS SLOTS 2; 3; 4; 5; 6; 12; 13; 22
1696MS_C SLOTS
Extraction handle HardWare Failure LED
4,5,6
OMDX8100_M_L1_X
Monitoring

Name Green / Red led Monitor Tx out Monitor Rx out Meaning Hardware failure. The LED is Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in failure (OR on the power supply alarms) Output power measurement signal (to optical measurement device) Input power measurement signal (to optical measurement device) Line
Monitor Tx out Monitor Rx out Line Tx out Line Rx in WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out
Ch#38
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line) Line Rx in Line Reception input signal (from line) WDM Tx in WDM Rx out Extra Tx in Extra Rx out SPV Tx in SB Tx in WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding MCC (Ch. 30 B 38) WDM reception output signal, to corresponding MCC (Ch. 30 B 38) Extra channels input (from other Mux/Demux board) Extra channels output (to other Mux/Demux board) Supervision transmission input signal (from SPVM board) Short Band transmission channels input (from other Mux/Demux) Extra channels Supervision Expansion Accesschannels
SPV Rx out Supervision reception output signal (to SPVM board) SB Rx out Short Band reception channels output (to other Mux/Demux) N.B. The OMDX8100_M_L1_X board is not provided with the Supervision (SPV Tx in / out) access points
Extra Tx in Extra Rx out SPV Tx in S SPV Rx out SB Tx in SB Rx out

EX
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 48. OMDX8100_M_L1_XS board front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 119 / 390
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
ACRONYM OMDX8100_M_L2
(shown in figure)
1696MS SLOTS 2; 3; 4; 5; 6; 12; 13; 22
1696MS_C SLOTS
3AL86615XX
OMDX8100_M_S2 OMDX8100_M_S1
4, 5, 6
Line
Line Tx out Line Rx in WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out
Ch#28
Accesschannels
WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out

Name Green / Red led Meaning Hardware failure. The LED is Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in failure (OR on the power supply alarms)
WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out Extra Tx in Extra Rx out
22
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line or other Mux/Demux) Line Rx in Line Reception input signal (from line or other Mux/Demux) WDM Tx in WDM Rx out Extra Tx in Extra Rx out WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding MCC (Ch. 20B28 for L2 band, 42B50 for S2 band, 52B60 for S1 band) WDM reception output signal, to corresponding MCC (Ch. 20B28 for L2 band, 42B50 for S2 band, 52B60 for S1 band) Extra channels input (from other Mux/Demux board) Extra channels output (to other Mux/Demux board) Extra
Optical safety label Extraction handle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This front panel is similar to that of OMDX8100_M_S2 and S1 boards, except for the set of channels, i.e. Ch. 42 to 50 for S2 band and Ch. 52 to 60 for S1 band. The set of channels is printed on the front panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type. Figure 49. OMDX8100_M_L2/S2/S1 boards front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 120 / 390
20
21
23
25
26
27
ACRONYM
1696MS SLOTS
1696MS_C SLOTS
OADM8100_M_L1_S
(shown in figure)
OADM8100_M_L2_S 2; 3; 4; 5; 6; OADM8100_M_S1_S OADM8100_M_S2_S 12; 13; 22 4; 5; 6

Monitoring Line
Monitor Tx out Monitor Rx out Line Tx out Line Rx in WDM Tx in WDM Rx out
Ch#38 30 31 32 33 35 36 37

Name Green / Red led Monitor Tx out Monitor Rx out Meaning Hardware failure. The LED is Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in failure (OR on the power supply alarms) Output power measurement signal (to optical measurement device) Input power measurement signal (to optical measurement device)
WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out
Channels accesses
WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out Extra Tx in Extra Rx out
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line) Line Rx in Line Reception input signal (from line) WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding MCC: WDM Tx in ch. 30B 38 (L1 band), ch. 20B28 (L2), ch. 42B50 (S2), ch. 52B60 (S1) WDM Rx WDM reception output signal, to corresponding MCC: ch. 30B Extra 38 (L1 band), ch. 20B28 (L2), ch. 42B50 (S2), ch. 52B60 (S1) out channels Extra Tx Extra or passthrough channels input (from other Mux/Demux in board) Supervision Extra Rx Extra or passthrough channels output (to other Mux/Demux out board) SPV Tx in Supervision transmission input signal (from SPVM board) SPV Rx out Supervision reception output signal (to SPVM board)
SPV Tx in S SPV Rx out Unused Unused
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This front panel is similar to that of OADM8100_M_L2/S2/S1_S boards, except for the set of channel, i.e. Ch. 20 to 28 for L2 band, Ch. 42 to 50 for S2 band and Ch. 52 to 60 for S1 band. Four different boards are so available. The set of channels is printed on the front panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type. Figure 50. OADM8100_M_L1_S (L2/S1/S2) boards front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 121 / 390
3AL86637AX
ACRONYM OADM4100_M_ch2023_S OADM4100_M_ch2528_S OADM4100_M_ch3033_S

(shown in figure)
1696MS SLOTS
1696MS_C SLOTS
3AL86637BA
2; 3; 4; 5; 6; 12; 13; 22 4; 5; 6
OADM4100_M_ch3538_S OADM4100_M_ch4245_S OADM4100_M_ch4750_S OADM4100_M_ch5255_S OADM4100_M_ch5760_S
Monitoring Line
Monitor Tx out Monitor Rx out Line Tx out Line Rx in WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out WDM Tx in WDM Rx out
Ch#33

Name Green / Red led Monitor Tx out Monitor Rx out Line Rx in Meaning Hardware failure. The LED is Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in failure (OR on the power supply alarms) Output power measurement signal (to optical measurement device) Input power measurement signal (to optical measurement device) Line Reception input signal (from line)
Channels accesses
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line) WDM Tx in WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding MCC: ch. 20B23; 25B28; 30B33; 35B38; 42B45; 47B50; 52B55; 57B60 WDM reception output signal, to corresponding MCC: ch. WDM Rx 20B23; 25B28; 30B33; 35B38; 42B45; 47B50; 52B55; out 57B60 Extra Tx Extra or passthrough channels input (from other Mux/Dein mux board) Extra Rx Extra or passthrough channels output (to other Mux/Deout mux board) SPV Tx in Supervision transmission input signal (from SPVM board) SPV Rx out Supervision reception output signal (to SPVM board)
Extra or pass through channels Supervision
Extra Tx in Extra Rx out SPV Tx in S SPV Rx out Unused Unused
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This front panel is the same for all OADM4100_M_chXXYY_S four channels boards, except for the set of channels: eight sets of 4 channels are available for this board type; eight different boards are so available. The set of channels is printed on the front panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type. Figure 51. OADM4100_M_chxxyy_S boards front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 122 / 390
30
31
32
ACRONYM
1696MS SLOTS
1696MS_C SLOTS
OADM2100_M_30_31_S
(shown in figure)
OADM2100_M_32_33_S OADM2100_M_35_36_S OADM2100_M_37_38_S OADM2100_M_47_48_S
2; 3; 4; 5; 6; 12; 13; 22
4; 5; 6
Monitoring Line
Monitor Tx out Monitor Rx out Line Tx out Line Rx in WDM Tx in WDM Rx out Ch #1
Ch#30 31

Channel accesses
WDM Tx in WDM Rx out Ch #2
Supervision Extra channels
SPV Tx in S SPV Rx out Extra Tx in Extra Rx out Unused Unused
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line) WDM Tx in WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding MCC: ch. 3031; 3233; 3536; 3738; 4748 WDM Rx out Extra Tx in Extra Rx out SPV Tx in WDM reception output signal, to corresponding MCC: ch. 3031; 3233; 3536; 3738; 4748 Extra or passthrough channels input (from other Mux/Demux board) Extra or passthrough channels output (to other Mux/Demux board) Supervision transmission input signal (from SPVM board)
SPV Rx out Supervision reception output signal (to SPVM board)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This front panel is the same for all OADM2100_M_chxx_yy_S two channels boards, except for the set of channels: five sets of 2 channels are available for this board type; five different boards are so available. The set of channels is print on the front panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type. Figure 52. OADM2100_M_xx_yy_S board front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 123 / 390
3AL86778XX
ACRONYM OADM1100_M_25_S OADM1100_M_30_S OADM1100_M_32_S OADM1100_M_33_S OADM1100_M_35_S OADM1100_M_36_S OADM1100_M_37_S OADM1100_M_38_S OADM1100_M_48_S OADM1100_M_50_S SHORT BAND OADM1100_M_47_S LONG BAND OADM1100_M_31_S
1696MS SLOTS
1696MS_C SLOTS
3AL86777XX
Monitoring
2; 3; 4; 5; 6; 12; 13; 22 4; 5; 6
Channel access Line Add Drop
Monitor Tx out Monitor Rx out Line Tx out Line Rx in WDM Tx in WDM Rx out
Ch# xx

Supervision Extra channels
SPV Tx in S SPV Rx out Extra Tx in Extra Rx out
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line) WDM Tx in WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding MCC: ch. 25; 30; 31; 32; 33; 35; 36; 37; 38; 47; 48; 50 WDM Rx out Extra Tx in Extra Rx out SPV Tx in WDM reception output signal, to corresponding MCC: ch. ch. 25; 30; 31; 32; 33; 35; 36; 37; 38; 47; 48; 50 Extra or passthrough channels input (from other Mux/Demux board) Extra or passthrough channels output (to other Mux/Demux board) Supervision transmission input signal (from SPVM board)
SPV Rx out Supervision reception output signal (to SPVM board) This front panel is the same for all OADM1100_M_xx_S one channel boards, except for the channel: 12 different channels are available for this board type and then twelve different boards are available.The number of the channel is printed on the front panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type. Figure 53. OADM1100_M_xx_S board front panel
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 124 / 390
ACRONYM
1696MS 1696MS_C SLOTS SLOTS 5; 6
12 SPV_F_1310_1550 2; 3;22 13;
Monitoring Common Line 1310
Monitor Tx out Monitor Rx out Line Tx out Line Rx in Mux In Dmux out
1310 S

Name Green / Red led Monitor Tx out Monitor Rx out Line Rx in Mux in Dmux out Mux in Dmux out SPV Tx in Meaning Hardware failure. The LED is Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in failure (OR on the power supply alarms) Output power measurement signal (to optical measurement device) Input power measurement signal (to optical measurement device)
Mux In
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to the line) Line Reception input signal (from the line) Input 1310 nm signal Output reception 1310 nm signal Input 1550 nm signal Output reception 1550 nm signal Supervision transmission input signal (from SPVM board)
1550 Supervision
Dmux out SPV Tx in SPV Rx out
SPV Rx out Supervision reception output signal (to SPVM board)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 54. SPV_F_1310_1550 board front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 125 / 390
3AL86779AA
ACRONYM SPV_F_C
1696MS 1696MS_C SLOTS SLOTS 9; 10; 11

28 B 35 38 B 45
HardWare Failure LED
Extra channels Supervision
Extra Tx in Extra Rx out SPV Tx in

S
SPV Rx out
Tx input
Client access
Rx output
3AL86779BAXX

Name Green / Red led Extra In Extra Out Meaning Hardware failure. The LED is Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in failure (OR on the power supply alarms) Input extra signal (1310 or 1550 nm) Output extra signal (1310 or 1550 nm)
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to the line) Line Rx in Line Reception input signal (from the line) SPV Tx in Supervision transmission input signal (from SPVM board) SPV Rx out Supervision reception output signal (to SPVM board)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 55. SPV_F_C board front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 126 / 390
2.5.3 Optical amplifiers front view
1696MS SLOTS 1696MS_C ACRONYM Master Expans SLOTS OAC1 L_OAC1 OAC2 L_OAC2 Access points description
Name Meaning PW Power led managed by HW. It is ON when Green led the board is plugged and without HWF OOS Managed by SW. It is ON when the board is Yellow led plugged but not configured by the SW Abnormal input signal alarm. Caused by ABN 1) 1st stage input optical signal level has deYellow led creased below the input signal loss threshold 2) Output safety shutdown ot the 2nd stage. Managed by SW APSD Yellow led *** HWF Green / Yellow / Red led Managed by SW. The LED is OFF when APSD enable ON when APSD disable forced ON or OFF Hardware failure led, managed by SW. It is Green when the board is plugged, configu red and without failure yellow when the board is in firmware down load state**** Red when a) one of the On Board power supply is in failure (OR on the power supply alarms) b) C_TYPE alarm is raised
Extraction handle
4; 5; 12; 13; 12; 13; 20; 21; 20; 21 22; 23* 4; 5;
2,3**
Power ON LED Out Of Service LED Abnormal input signal alarm LED APSD status LED Hardware failure LED Reset pushbutton
Stage 1 monitoring
Mon. Rx (IN) Mon. Tx (OUT)
Stage 2 monitoring
Mon. Rx (IN) Mon. Tx (OUT)
Removable cover
Stage 1
Input Output Input Output Input Output Input Output Input Unused Unused Unused Optical safety label
Stage 2 VOA Supervision Extra pump
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Extraction handle Figure 56. OAC1, OAC2, OAC1_L and OAC2_L front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 127 / 390
3AL86703AX
* Slots 22 and 23 are available in compact shelf only ** Only OAC2 and OAC2_L can be equipped in compact shelf *** The LED is always ON because the APSD enable mode is not supported **** When the board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board will not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair. Only OAC2 and OAC2_L support FW download
2.5.4 Controller front view
URG NRG ATD ABN IND
Urgent Alarm LED Not Urgent alarm LED Attended alarm LED Abnormal Condition LED Indicative alarm LED
SC
Shelf Controller LED

Name URG Red led NRG Red led Meaning Urgent Alarm (major or critical) Not Urgent Alarm (minor)
STATUS EC
Equipment Controller LED
ACO
Alarm Cut Off push button
ATD Attended Alarm: acknowledged URG or NURG Yellow led alarm (alarm storing) Abnormal condition ABN Yellow led IND Indicative Alarm (warning) Yellow led EC Green / Red / Yellow led Green led means communication OK between EC/SC Red led means no communication between EC/SC but SC is started Yellow led means start time
LAT
Lamp Test push button*
RST
RESET push button
Craft
F Interface for CT connection SUBD 9 pins connector
Green led means SC started SC Green/Red Red led means SC default /Yellow led Yellow led means start time DBG Interface RJ45 connector
DBG Interface RJ45 connector Extraction NB:*LAT button lights up all leds of the NE except for the ESC ones. handle When pressing RST button, EC & SC LEDs status doesnt change When SC is restarted, the EC led is red and the SC led is green. When the communication between EC & SC is reestablished, both EC & SC LEDs are green Figure 57. ESC front panel
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 128 / 390
ACRONYM 1696MS 1696MS_C SLOTS SLOTS 1 (master ESC 1 shelf only)
3AL 86661AAXX
Extraction handle
ACRONYM 1696MS 1696MS_C SLOTS SLOTS

Extraction handle
SPVM2
2; 22; 23
4; 5; 6
Power ON LED Line Busy LED Conference Call LED Vacant Line LED
J1: Speech channel handset connector

Name PWR Green led Meaning PoWeRing led: it is ON when the board is powered and without HardWare Failure (HWF). Managed by HW
Board reset push button Line pick up push button
LB Line Busy led: it is ON when the speech Yellow led channel is busy CC Conference Call led: it is ON when a conference Yellow led call is occuring on the speech channel Vacant Line led: it is ON when the Speech channel VL Yellow led is vacant Hardware failure. The LED is Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure Green / Yellow when the board is in firmware download state* Yellow / Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in Red led failure (OR on the power supply alarms) RX1 input TX1 input RX2 input TX2 input J1 OSC1 reception input signal, from OAC, OMDX or OADM OSC1 transmssion output signal, to OAC, OMDX or OADM OSC2 reception input signal, from OAC, OMDX or OADM OSC2 transmssion output signal, to OAC, OMDX or OADM Speech channel handset connection
Tx2 output OSC 2 Rx1 input OSC 1
Tx1 output
Rx2 input
Speech channel number coding wheels
N.B.
3AL86606AB
* When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board will not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Extraction handle
Figure 58. SPVM2 front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 129 / 390
ACRONYM 1696MS 1696MS_C SLOTS SLOTS SPVM_H 2; 22; 23 4; 5; 6
Extraction handle
Power ON LED Line Busy LED Conference Call LED Vacant Line LED
J1: Speech channel handset connector

Name PWR Green led Meaning PoWeRing led: it is ON when the board is powered and without HardWare Failure (HWF). Managed by HW
Board reset push button Line pick up push button
LB Line Busy led: it is ON when the speech Yellow led channel is busy CC Conference Call led: it is ON when a conference Yellow led call is occuring on the speech channel Vacant Line led: it is ON when the Speech channel VL Yellow led is vacant Hardware failure. The LED is Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure Green / Yellow when the board is in firmware download state* Yellow / Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in Red led failure (OR on the power supply alarms) RX1 input TX1 input J OSC1 reception input signal, from OAC, OMDX or OADM OSC1 transmssion output signal, to OAC, OMDX or OADM Speech channel handset connection
Rx1 input OSC 1
Tx1 output
N.B.
* When the board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board will not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair.
Optical safety label Speech channel number coding wheel
3AL86606AC
Extraction handle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 59. SPVM_H front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 130 / 390

OSMC
2; 12; 13; 23
Not used
Out Of Service LED
Power ON LED

Name Green/ Red led Meaning The led is GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and without Hardware failure (HWF). It is RED when the board is plugged and in HWF.
Inputs power monitoring
This led is ON when a firmware download is being perYellow led formed
....
Input power monitoring points giving the possibility to check the power in 8 different locations per each channel
Inputs power monitoring
N.B.
When the board is on firmware download state, the OOS Led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board will not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 60. OSMC front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 131 / 390
3AL86893AA
ACRONYM 1696MS 1696MS_C SLOTS SLOTS ILink_M Not used 6 (master shelf only)
EXP. shelves 1, 2, 3, CONNECTION STATUS LEDs Power Failure LED HW Failure LED
SUBD15P, to be connected to expansion shelf 1

Name Meaning The led is ON when the connection with slave shelf 1 is Orange led established The led is ON when the connection with slave shelf 2 is Orange led established The led is ON when the connection with slave shelf 3 is Orange led established (only 2 slave shelves allowed in current rel.) Power failure led; it is ON when the board is properly Orange led powered Hardware failure led. It is GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and Green/Red without failure led RED when software reset is being performed Connection point with 1696MS_C expansion shelf 1 Connection point with 1696MS_C expansion shelf 2 Connection point with 1696MS_C expansion shelf 3 (not used in current release)
SUBD15P, to be connected to expansion shelf 2
SUBD15P, to be connected to expansion shelf 3 (not used in current rel.)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 61. ILink_M board front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 132 / 390
3AL86893AA

ILink_S Not used
1 (slave shelf only)
NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED Power Failure LED HW Failure LED

Name Meaning Power failure led; it is ON when the board is properly Orange led powered Hardware failure led. It is GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and Green/Red without failure led RED when software reset is being performed Connection point with 1696MS_C master shelf
SUBD15P, to be connected to the 1696MS_C master shelf
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 62. ILink_S board front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 133 / 390
3AL86893AA
ACRONYM LAC (LAN_Q) LAC (LAN_I)
1696MS 1696MS_C SLOTS SLOTS

26 27
RJ45 connector NMS / INTRASHELF connections BNC connectors

Name Green / Red led Meaning Hardware failure. The LED is Green when the board is plugged, configured and without failure Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in failure (OR on the power supply alarms)
in master shelf, slot 26, or in compact shelf, slot 8 (LAN_Q), these connecRJ45 and tors provide the physical access (Q3 interf.) to connect an external superviBNC con- sion equipment (1353..). Slot 26 is linked to the ESC board via backpanel link a second board can be plugged in master shelf, slot 27 (LAN_I), to allow nectors the intrashelf communication via a cascade (BNC) or HUB (RJ45) link with the same connector of the LAN_I board, slot 27, of each expansion shelf. If a cable is fitted in RJ45 conn., BNC is unavailable and viceversa
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 63. LAN boards front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 134 / 390
ACRONYM
1696MS 1696MS_C SLOTS SLOTS 36 11
HK
25 pins SUBD female connector for housekeeping alarms (8 inputs and 8 outputs)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 64. Housekeeping board front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 135 / 390
ACRONYM RAI
1696MS 1696MS_C SLOTS SLOTS 37 9; 10

9 pins SUBD female connector (to PDU/TRU)
RACK ALARMS RJ11, 6 pins connector (to the 9 pins SUBD female connector of the shelf below)

9 pins SUBD fe- Used to connect the RAI card of the master shelf with the male connector PDU/TRU RJ11 6 pins connector Used for intrashelf communication. It has to be connected to the 9pin connector of the slave shelf below. Only for 1696MS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 65. RAI front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 136 / 390
ACRONYM
1696MS 1696MS_C SLOTS SLOTS 46; 47
UIC
52 pins SCSI2 female connector

Name Green / Red led Meaning Hardware failure. The LED is Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure Red when the board is in hardware failure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 66. UIC front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 137 / 390
2.5.5 Switching protection, power supply and fans front view
OPC
28 B 35 38 B 45
9, 10, 11
SM & MM OPC with connectors 3AL86708AC 3AL86708AD 3AL95113AA
HardWare Failure LED*
SM & MM OPC with jumpers 3AL86708AA 3AL86708AB
channel 1 Tx Input channel 2 Tx Input channel 1 Rx Output channel 2 Rx Output
To (Rx OUT) / From (Tx IN) transponders or 4xANY drawers
channel1 channel2
Tx input (Tx1IN) Rx output (Rx1OUT) Tx input (Tx2IN) Rx output (Rx2OUT)
Tx output Rx input
To (Tx Out) / From (Rx IN) Client Optical safety label
To (Tx Out) / From (Rx IN) Client
Tx output
Rx input

Name Green / Red led Meaning Hardware failure. The LED is * Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure Red when the board is in hardware failure
N.B.
* The hardware failure led is not managed/provided on the SM optical splitter with jumpers (P/N3AL 86708 AA) Figure 67. OPC front panel
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 138 / 390
ACRONYM
1696MS 1696MS_C SLOTS SLOTS
ACRONYM
1696MS SLOTS 25, 48
1696MS_C SLOTS 7, 12 (master/exp shelves)
PSC PSC2 PSC3
25, 48
1 (male) 3pin SUBD connector
+ VBATT
2 (female) GND 3 (male) VBATT

Name Green / Red led Meaning Hardware failure. The LED is GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and without failure RED when the board is in failure or the power supply cable is not connected
Figure 68. PSC/PSC2/PSC3 front panel
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 139 / 390
ACRONYM PMU
CONTROL UNIT RECTIFIER 1

in1 in2
RECTIFIER 2
1)
2) OUT IN
7) OUT OUT
3) 3)
Two different solutions are provided
3)
4) 7) OUT
5)
6) 1) 2) OUT OUT
in1 F
A
in2 N
IN
5)
4) 3) 6)

Name 1) GREEN/ RED LED Meaning MAJOR alarm. The LED is GREEN when the board is plugged and without failure RED when the alarm is present (raised only if PMU_Presence). It is the OR of both rectifiers aremissing or both rectifiers input voltage < 85V rms both rectifiers output voltage <38V or >60V both fans from PMU case 1 failed (OR fan from PMU case 2 failed) both rectifiers temperature >55 C or output current < 12A MINOR alarm. The LED is GREEN when the board is plugged and without failure RED when the alarm is present (raised only if PMU_Presence). It is the OR of one rectifier is missing or one rectifier input voltage < 85V rms one rectifier output voltage <38V or >60V one FAN from PMU case 1 failed or one rectifier temperature >55 C battery present but battery breaker open BATTERY CONNECTED. The LED is RED if battery connection is failed. The LED is GREEN if battery is connected. TEST BATTERY. The LED is RED if test battery is failed. The LED is GREEN if test battery is OK. The LED is LIT OFF if no battery connected BATTERY CONNECTOR. It has to be conncted to the (optional) backup battery OUTPUT POWER CONNECTORS. SUBD 3p to be connected to the two PSC(2) cards PMU ALARMS CONNECTORS. SUBD 15p to be connected to the FAN_C AC INPUT POWER CONNECTORS. To be connected to the primary AC power supply (100V/5060Hz, 115V/60Hz, 230V/50Hz)
2) GREEN/ RED LED
3) GREEN/ RED LED 4) GREEN/ RED LED 5) 6) 7) 8)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 69. PMU front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 140 / 390
1696MS_C SLOTS Placed below the 1696MS_C Not used master shelf 1696MS SLOTS
ACRONYM
1696MS 1696MS_C SLOTS SLOTS 49 13
FANC FAN_C
FANC (for 1696MS) HardWare Failure LED
HardWare Failure LED 15 pins SUBD female connector (for batteries alarms raising)
EXT PMU
FAN FILTER
FAN_C (for 1696MS_C)

Name Green / Red led
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Meaning Hardware failure. The LED is Green when the board is powered Red when the board is in hardware failure
Figure 70. FANs front panel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 141 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
142 / 390
3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 3.1 General description

This section describes the main functions carried out by the 1696MSPAN 1696MS_C (CPE, housed in a compact shelf, with reduced functionalities)
Alcatel products. The functions carried out by the NE, can be splitted in some subsystems herebelow listed, and described from para. 3.1.1 to para. 3.1.10: Transponder subsystem see para.3.1.1 TDM client signal concentrator subsystem optional, see para. 3.1.2 Optical MUX/DMUX (Wavelength Division Multiplexing) subsystem, see para. 3.1.3 Optical Fiber Amplification (OFA) subsystem optional used in 1696MS only, see para. 3.1.4 Supervision management (Optical Supervisory Channel, OSC) subsystem optional, see para. 3.1.5 Automatic Power Equalization subsystem (APE) optional, see para. 3.1.6 Controller subsystem, see para. 3.1.7 Power supply subsystem, see para. 3.1.8 Protection (OSNCP) subsystem, see para. 3.1.9 Performance Monitoring subsystem, see para. 3.1.10.
Before starting with the presentation of the above listed functions / subsystems, for a better system comprehension, the 1696MS main configurations (Line Terminal, OADM, backtoback terminal, Repeater) and the functions implemented in each of them are described in the following.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 143 / 390
Line Terminal configuration
Client signals
TDM concentrator
MUX
OFA
OSC extraction
Transponder Up to 32 Up to 32 Up to 32
DWDM line
DMUX
OFA
Preamp.
To boards TDM bus LEGEND: Optical link Electrical link Optional function SPI bus
Supervision
OSC
3.6 V
Equipment and shelf control

LANQ3
User Interfaces
2
2 Mbit/s
To boards
5.5 V 48 V
Power supply
NE management application
48 V
User service accesses
Station batteries
If needed DCU modules can be used (placed before BOFA booster input, in both directions). This type of configuration can be provided with one (as shown in current figure) or two OFAs (see also para. 1.1.2 on page 60). Figure 71. Functional synopsis in Line Terminal configuration In the line terminal configuration all the above functions are needed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 144 / 390
Up to 32
Booster
OSC insertion
OADM / backtoback terminal (Hub) configuration Client signals

TDM concentrator
Up to 32
OSNCP Transponder (West)

OSC extraction Preamp. Back panel electrical links
Transponder (East)
Booster OSC insertion
OFA DWDM line (West)
DMUX
Pass through traffic
MUX
OFA DWDM line (East)
OSC insertion
Booster
Preamp.
OSC extraction
OFA
MUX
Pass through traffic OSC
DMUX
OFA
OSC
To boards SPI bus TDM bus
Supervision
48 V
To boards 5.5 V 3.6 V
LEGEND: Optical link

LANQ3
User Interfaces
2
Power supply
Electrical link Optional function
2 Mbit/s
Station batteries
If needed DCU modules can be used (placed before BOFA booster input, in both directions). This type of configuration can be provided with one (as shown in current figure) or two OFAs (see also para. 1.1.4 on page 62). Figure 72. Functional synopsis in OADM configuration The hub configuration is similar to the OADM one, but without passthrough channels (all the channels are added/dropped). In OADM configuration all the optical transmission functions (transponder, MUX and DMUX) are duplicated to transmit the client signals in two directions. This configuration allows optical channel protection functions (OSNCP).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 145 / 390
In line repeater configuration
OFA 1
OSC extraction VOA Stage 1 DCU
OFA 2
OSC insertion Stage 2
DWDM line
OSC insertion Stage 2 DCU Stage 1
OSC extraction VOA
DWDM line
OSC To boards SPI bus TDM bus
OSC
Supervision
48 V
To boards 5.5 V 3.6 V
LEGEND: Optical link

LANQ3
User Interfaces
2
Electrical link
Power supply
Optional function
2 Mbit/s
Station batteries
Figure 73. Functional synopsis in Repeater configuration In In line repeater configuration, the MUX/DEMUX and Transponder functions are not implemented. The equipment acts as an in line amplifier, which allows nevertheless the Optical Supervision Channel (OSC) and the supervision functions.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 146 / 390
3.1.1 Transponder subsystem The transponder subsystem is built with Multirate Channel Cards (MCC) Optical Channel Cards (OCC10) one per client signal. The role of this function is: At the transmit side (from client to DWDM line): to adapt the client incoming optical signals to a dedicated wavelength and deliver those optical signals to the multiplexer (MUX) function. At the receive side (from DWDM line to client): to restitute the client optical signals from the signal delivered by the demultiplexer (DEMUX) function.
The payload type configuration of the client signal is under control of the operator. Up to 32 Client signals
User Tx
User Rx
Up to 32 MCC / OCC10
8x8 Matrix WDM Rx WDM Tx
To MUX function
Up to 32 WDM channels
Transponder function
From DMUX function
Figure 74. Line terminal transponder function In backtoback and OADM configuration, the transponder function is doubled and is able to transmit and receive the clients signals in two directions. It provides optionally Optical SubNetwork Connection Protection (OSNCP), see section 3.1.9, page 169. Up to 32 Client signals OSNCP
Up to 32 MCC/OCC10 West
Up to 32 MCC OCC10 East User Rx
MCC User Tx
MCC User Tx
User Rx : Options
WDM Rx 8x8 Matrix WDM Rx WDM Rx WDM Tx
Backpanel electrical links
WDM Rx 8x8 Matrix WDM Rx WDM Rx WDM Tx
From DMUX function

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To MUX function
To MUX function From DMUX function
Transponder function
Figure 75. Backtoback terminal or OADM transponder function
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 147 / 390
3.1.1.1 Client signals 3.1.1.1.1 MCC client signals The MCC1, MCC2 and MCC3 boards accept all bit rates from 100 Mbit/s to 2.66 Gbit/s in 3R (Retime, Reamplify, Reshape) mode. However beyond 2.5 Gbit/s the performances may be degraded. The typical client signals accepted by the MCCs board are listed in the following table. Some of them are proposed with a 3R regeneration mode for MCC1 and they are indicated with (*) on the table. All the other signals are in 2R mode in MCC1. Table 12. Example of Client signals supported bit rates MCC1, MCC2, MCC3 Bit rates (Mbit/s) 100.000 125.000 132.815 155.520 200.000 265.620 270.000 466.560 531.250 622.080 933.120 1062.500 1244.160 1250.000 1866.240 2125.000 2488.320 2500.000 3.1.1.1.2 OCC10 client signals The OCC10 board accepts the following client signals in 3R (Retime, Reamplify, Reshape) mode: 9953.28 Gbps (STM64 / OC192 / 10GBE WAN) 10.3125 Gbps (10GBE LAN) FDDI FE / FDDI FC (12-M6LEI) STM1 / OC3 (*) ESCON FC (25-M6LLI) DTV / HDTV OC9 FC (50-M5SLI) STM4 / OC12 (*) OC18 FC (100-SMLLI) (*) FICON / InterSystem Coupling Channel (ISC) (*) OC24 GBE (*) OC36 2FC (*) STM16 / OC48 (*) INFINIBAND Signal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 148 / 390
3.1.1.2 Optical channels The 1696MSPAN transmits the 32 possible channels in the Cband. Table 13. on page 149 gives the nominal central frequencies allocation plan, based on the 100 GHz channel spacing anchored to a 193.100 THz reference (ITUT standard grid). The Cband is split into 4 subbands, which support 8 channels each: the long bands L1 and L2, and the short bands S1 and S2. Then, each subband is composed of 2 sets of 4 consecutive channels. Each set is separated from the adjacent sets by one unused channel, except between L1 and S2, where the separation is 3 unused channels. Table 13. Nominal frequencies allocation plan in CBand Band Central frequency (GHz) Channel Number (Craft terminal name) 192,000 192,100 192,200 192,300 L2 192,500 192,600 192,700 192,800 BLUE BAND 193,000 193,100 193,200 193,300 L1 193,500 193,600 193,700 193,800 35 36 37 38 1549,32 1548,51 1547,72 1546,92 30 31 32 33 1553,33 1552,52 1551,72 1550,92 25 26 27 28 1557,36 1556,55 1555,75 1554,94 20 21 22 23 Central wavelength (nm) wavelength deviation : "0,12 nm (EOL) 1561,42 1560,61 1559,79 1558,98
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 149 / 390
Band
Central frequency (GHz) Channel Number (Craft terminal name) 194,200 194,300 194,400 194,500 S2 194,700 194,800 194,900 195,000 47 48 49 50 42 43 44 45
Central wavelength (nm) wavelength deviation : "0,12 nm (EOL)

1543,73 1542,94 1542,14 1541,35
1539,77 1538,98 1538,19 1537,40
RED BAND 195,200 195,300 195,400 195,500 S1 195.700 195.800 195.900 196.000 57 58 59 60 1531,90 1531,12 1530,33 1529,55 52 53 54 55 1535,82 1535,04 1534,25 1533,47
The Central frequency value (in GHz) is the channel name, visualized on the Craft Terminal. The Multirate Channel Cards (MCC1, MCC2 and MCC3), support two channels each. 16 different MCCs (transponders) are able to cover the 32 channels. The 10 Gbps Optical Channel Cards (OCC10), support instead one channel each. Then 32 different OCC10s (transponders) are necessary to cover the 32 channels. Mixed configuration (MCC and OCC10 in the same equipment) are allowed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 150 / 390
3.1.2 TDM client signal concentrator (4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P) subsystem The transponder subsystem supports clients signals from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s. Each client signal connected to a transponder access uses a WDM channel, a wavelength (). The aim of the 4 ANY TDM concentration is to save transponders and to optimize the use of each WDM channel. Client signals from 100 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s can be concentrated in one STM16. For example, 4 x STM1 client signals can be concentrated on a unique STM16 signal and applied on a unique transponder access.
4 Transponders Transponder 1 Transponder Up to 4 client signals Transponder Transponder Transponder Up to 4 WDM optical channels Up to 4 client signals
4xANY TDM concent. Transponder
1 Concentrator
1 STM16
1 WDM optical channel
Figure 76. Principle of the 4xANY TDM concentration The available client signal accesses and their maximum number are: Low bit rate: 4 x Fast Ethernet 4 x FDDI 4 x ESCON 4 x Digital Video SDH: 4 x STM1 3 x STM4 High bit rate: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet 2 x Fiber Channel or FICON
The following mixes are also possible: 3 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x STM4 2 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 2 x STM4 2 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x (FC or GbEth or FICON) 1 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x STM4 +1 x (FC or GbEth or FICON). 2 x (FC or GbEth or FICON). Low bit rate and High bit rates are available at 1310 nm and 850 nm. SDH bit rates are only available at 1310 nm. On the aggregate side, the 4xANY_P board is equipped with a SFP optical module providing I16.1, S16.1, Silver CWDM or Bronze CWDM interfaces, according to the SFP module used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 151 / 390
3.1.3 Wavelength Division Multiplexing subsystem The optical multiplexer function receives from the transponder subsystem the colored optical channels multiplexes them into a DWDM signal launches the DWDM signal on the line. The optical demultiplexer function receives the DWDM line signal demultiplexes this signal sends the recovered optical channels to the transponder subsystem. The multiplexer/demultiplexer subsystem have a scalable architecture. By combining three sorts of basic MUXes and three sorts of basic DMUXes, 4, 8, 12, 16, 24 and 32 channels, the multiplexing and demultiplexing capacities can be obtained. 3.1.3.1 Optical multiplexing The multiplexer function may be obtained with the following optical MUXes: 5:1 and 9:1 MUXes: This sort of optical MUX is able to multiplex 4 or 8 channels issued from the transponder function with an extra input aggregate signal. The extra input may be connected to the output of another MUX (MUX cascading), connected to the extra output of a corresponding DMUX (traffic pass through) or simply not connected. Aggregate signal (n channels) 4 channels 4 from TPD
Extra input
5:1
Channel inputs
Aggregate signal output
Aggregate signal (n+4 channels)
Aggregate signal (n channels) 8 channels 8 from TPD
Extra input
9:1
Channel inputs
Aggregate signal (n+8 channels)
Figure 77. 4 and 8 channels optical MUXes 2:1 expansion MUX: This sort of optical MUX is able to multiplex 2 aggregate signals, one in the long band and the other in the short band. It is necessary to reach the multiplexing capacity of 24 and 32 channels and belongs to the OMDX8100_M_L1_XS and OMDX8100_M_L1_X boards. Aggregate signal (n1 channels) Aggregate signal (n2 channels)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LB input
SB input
2:1 EXP
Aggregate signal (n1+n2 channels)
Figure 78. LB and SB aggregate signals expansion MUX
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 152 / 390
3.1.3.2 Optical demultiplexing The demultiplexer function may be obtained with the following optical DMUXes:
1:5 and 1:9 DMUXes: This sort of optical DMUX is able to demultiplex an input aggregate signal (n channels) into 4 or 8 channels and an output aggregate signal (n4 or n8 channels). The extra output may be connected to the input of another DMUX (DMUX cascading), connected to the extra input of a MUX of the multiplexer function (traffic pass through) or simply not connected. Aggregate signal (n4 channels) 4 channels to TPD
Extra output
1:5
4 Channel outputs
Aggregate signal input
Aggregate signal (n channels)
Aggregate signal (n8 channels) 8 channels to TPD

8
Extra output
1:9
Channel outputs
Aggregate signal (n channels)
Figure 79. 4 and 8 channels optical DMUX 2:1 expansion DMUX: This sort of optical DMUX is able to demultiplex the DWDM line signal into two aggregate signals, one in the long band and the other in the short band. It is necessary to reach the demultiplexing capacity of 24 and 32 channels and belongs to the OMDX8100_M_L1_XS and OMDX8100_M_L1_X boards. Aggregate signal (n1 channels) Aggregate signal (n2 channels)
LB output
SB output
1:2 EXP
Aggregate signal n1 LB channels n2 SB channels
Figure 80. LB and SB aggregate signals expansion MUX
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 153 / 390
3.1.3.3 Example of MUX and DMUX functions Line Terminal configurations In a 4 or 8channels Line Terminal, multiplexing and demultiplexing are performed in one step. The extra input of the MUX and the extra output of the DMUX are not connected.
MUX function
NC
From transponder transmit functions
9:1 DMUX function

NC
8 channels to DWDM line
To transponder receive functions
1:9
8 channels from DWDM line
Figure 81. MUX and DMUX functions of an 8 channels Line Terminal In a 12 or 16channels Line Terminal, multiplexing and demultiplexing are performed in two steps. The example of Figure 82. shows how to cascade 2 MUXes and 2 DMUXes to obtain a 12channels Line Terminal. The extra input of the first MUX is not connected. The 4channels aggregate signal output of the first MUX is connected to the extra input of the second MUX. The extra output of the first DMUX is connected to the 4 channels aggregate signal input of the second DMUX. The extra output of the second DMUX is not connected.
4 channels aggregate
From transponder transmit functions To transponder receive functions
MUX function 9:1 DMUX function 1:9

12 channels from DWDM line 12 channels to DWDM line
4 8
5:1
4 8
1:5
Figure 82. MUX and DMUX functions of a 12 channels Line Terminal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 154 / 390
In a 24 or 32channels Line Terminal, multiplexing and demultiplexing are performed in three steps. The example of Figure 83. shows how the 2:1 expansion MUX multiplexes the 16channels in long band and 16channels in short band.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. 8 channels aggregate
MUX function 9:1

16 channels (LB) aggregate
From transponder transmit functions
8 8 8 8
9:1
2:1
EXP
16 channels (SB) aggregate
9:1 9:1
8 channels aggregate 8 channels aggregate
DMUX function 1:9 1:9

16 channels (LB) aggregate
To transponder receive functions
8 8 8 8
1:9
1:2
EXP
16 channels (SB) aggregate
OMDX_L1_X(S)
1:9
Figure 83. MUX and DMUX functions of a 32 channels Line Terminal OADM configurations The example of Figure 84. is an 8channels OADM. 8 channels are dropped and added on both east and west lines. In this configuration, the extra output of each DMUX is connected to the extra input of the MUX of the opposite transmission direction. This allows to place the other 24 channels in pass through. To/from transponder
8 channels dropped 8 channels added
To/from transponder
8 channels dropped 8 channels added 8
DMUX
8 24 channels aggregate pass through
MUX 9:1
1:9
West line
MUX 9:1
DMUX 1:9
24 channels aggregate pass through
East line
Figure 84. MUX and DMUX functions of an 8 channels OADM

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The same configuration is available with 1, 2, 4 and 8channels (nchannels). In this case, the number of aggregate channels available in pass through is 32 n.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 155 / 390
The example of Figure 85. is a 32channels backtoback terminal. In this configuration, there no is pass through traffic, the 1696MSPAN is like a hubnode.
From/to transponder function

32 channels 32 channels
MUX function 9:1 32 channels to DWDM line 2:1 EXP 9:1 9:1 9:1
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
MUX function 9:1 9:1 2:1 EXP 9:1 9:1 32 channels to DWDM line
East line
DMUX function
8 8 8 8 8 8 8
West line
DMUX function 1:9 1:9 1:2 EXP 1:9 1:9
1:9 1:9 1:2 EXP 1:9 1:9 32 channels from DWDM line
Figure 85. MUX and DMUX functions of a 32 channels backtoback terminal Remote channel to/from CPE. Client signals
Optional functions
One fibre pair
OFA Mux Dmux
TPD
TPD Mux Dmux
OFA
One fibre pair
DWDM line signal
n (up to 32)
Passthrough
n (up to 32)
DWDM line signal
Remote channel
Client signal To/from CPE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 86. 1696MSPAN in backtoback terminal configuration and with a remote channel
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 156 / 390

TPD
3.1.4 Optical Fiber Amplification subsystem The Optical Fiber Amplification (OFA) subsystem can deliver: single or double stages amplification VOA at the first stage entry Up to 17 dBm output power. As shown in Figure 71. and Figure 72. the 1696MSPAN may be equipped with one or two OFAs (one OFA in west side and one in east side or two OFAs in west side and two in east side) in line terminal and OADM/ backtoback configuration. In the following example is shown a double stage amplification. In a single stage amplification, the line terminal or OADM is placed inside the OFA interstage (see Figure 17. on page 62 as an example)
WEST SIDE Stage 1 Preamp. Pump 1 OSC extraction VOA Stage 2 Booster Pump 2 LEGEND: Optional function
OFA 1
OSC insertion
ATTEN/ DCU
OFA 2 MUX function (OMDX/OADM)
DWDM line
OFA 2
ATTEN/ DCU
OFA 1
VOA
Pump 2 Stage 2 Booster
Pump 1 Stage 1 Preamp.
Supervision function Figure 87. OFA subsystem in line terminal or OADM configuration In repeater configuration, the 1696MSPAN is mainly a bidirectional optical amplifier.
WEST SIDE Stage 1 Preamp. Pump 1 OSC extraction VOA Stage 2 Booster Pump 2 LEGEND: Optional function OSC insertion EAST SIDE
OFA 1
OSC insertion
ATTEN/ DCU
OFA 2
OSC extraction
DWDM line
DWDM line
VOA
OFA 2
ATTEN/ DCU
OFA 1
Pump 2 Stage 2 Booster
Pump 1 Stage 1 Preamp.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Supervision function
Figure 88. OFA subsystem in repeater configuration
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 157 / 390
3.1.5 Optical supervisory channel (OSC) subsystem An optional channel named OSC is allocated to the transport of the supervision data. The OSC allows the remote monitoring of the NE in a network and gives some orderwires (data channel and voice channel) to the users. The OSC channel is managed by the SPV management unit. It is inserted at the output of the terminal equipment (input of the WDM line), regenerated in each OADM, backtoback terminal or repeater, dropped at the input of the terminal equipment (output of the WDM line). WDM terminal O M X OADM OADM repeater 1 OSC OADM
OADM OSC
2 OSC
SPVM unit
SPVM unit
SPVM unit
O D X
OSC OADM
OSC 2
OADM 1
OSC
OADM repeater 1 OSC OADM 2 OSC
In Line Repeater
WDM terminal O D X
OSC
SPVM unit
SPVM Unit
SPVM unit
OSC
OADM 2 1 SPVM
OSC 2 1
OSC
O M X SPVM
SPVM
CPE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 89. Optical Supervisory Channel management in Line Terminal, OADM, OADM repeater and InLineRepeater Equipment
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 158 / 390
In case of repeaters the SPV is inserted at the output of the NE: either in the amplifier board or in the last mux board (OMDX or OADM). The optical interfaces are located inside the SPV management unit.
More than one SPVM board can be used in one shelf. A link from/to a Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) carrying only one or two (1550 and/or 1310) data channels can be inserted on any kind of 1696MS node (terminal or OADM).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 159 / 390
3.1.6 Automatic Power Equalization (APE) subsystem Automatic Power Equalization (APE) is a function which allows the automatic balancing of the optical spectrum at node output. The objective is to have a flat spectrum in power per channel. For all information related to automatic power equalization, refer to the commissioning handbook. Two kinds of boards are mandatory to perform APE : OSMC : OSMC board is a embedded optical spectrum analyser. It can measure 8 different spectra at 8 different points of the NE. Only one OSMC per NE is needed. It must be optically connected to monitoring ports of the NE MVAC : all loop, passthrough bands and external colored channels must be connected to MVAC.
Before launching APE, the operator needs to perform some presettings. Firstly, the operator must declare the cabling between : MVAC & OADM or OMDX ports. OSMC & monitored boards.
Then, the operator sets the OSMC configuration parameters : Calibration factors : Because OSMC is connected to board monitoring outputs, calibration of the attenuation path beween real signal on the line and OSMC input is needed. 8 calibration factors are set (one per OSMC input). Calibration can be performed manually or automatically. Each OSMC input can be independently calibrated or not, in automatic or manual mode. Optical LOS threshold : OSMC board detects two kinds of LOS of signals : Total LOS on input #i : Total LOS is raised on input #i if : Maximum channel power of input #i < Total LOS threshold of input #i
Relative LOS on channel x of input #i : relative LOS on channel x of input #i is raised if : Maximum channel power of input #i channel power x > Relative LOS threshold These thresholds are configurable by the operator Finally, the operator must load APE parameters : Installation or Upgrade Direction to equalize Interstage attenuation and maximum number of iterations in case of an OADM repeater.
When the operator launches the equalization, the NE asks for some spectrum acquisitions to the OSMC. Spectrum data are sent from OSMC to the NE. The NE calculates required MVAC & transponders attenuations so to have a flat spectrum at node output. The process can be iterative in case of an OADM repeater. When the output tilt is optimized, resulting spectrum and tilt at node output are displayed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 160 / 390
MVAC
D E M U X
MVAC M U X 2
MVAC
OSMC
Figure 90. Automatic Power Equalization APE is stopped if RUM, RUP, RUTM are raised, in case of communication problem or if maximum number of iterations is reached.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 161 / 390
3.1.7 Controller subsystem See Figure 91. on page 164 and Figure 92. The controller subsystem is based on a two levels model: Shelf Controller (SC) Equipment Controller (EC) In current release the ESC (Equipment and Shelf Controller) is the hardware platform designed to support the Equipment Controller (EC) functions and the Shelf Controller (SC) functions. The Equipment Shelf Controller (ESC) board provides both features or only one (as needed). It performs both EC and SC when it is located in slot 1 of the Master shelf and only the SC functionality when it is plugged in slot 1 of an expansion shelf. The Flash memory of the ESC board must be plugged on its socket and in the correct sense. In this case, it is plugged easily without constraint. On the wrong sense the Flash memory cannot be plugged. Then invert the side to be plugged and try again. Furthermore that flash card must not be installed in a ESC used in Expansion shelf. The Control Platform is also provided by the ESC board for the 1696MS_C. Shelf Controller function SC provides the resources to support the SW functions related to the physical machine control and management and configuration provisioning. In a shelf all the boards are connected to the ESC unit via the SPI bus. By means of the SPI bus, the processor of the ESC, can collect the control information of the boards (e.g.: alarms collection, remote inventory and data EEPROM reading). Equipment Controller function The EC supports the Q3 agent and the VHM (Virtual Hardware Machine). It provides the HW resources (physical interfaces) and the SW functionalities (protocol stack) required for the communication between NE and Management system (OS, craft terminal, etc). It performs as well all the SW functions related to the control and management activities of the virtual (logical) machine: infomodel processing, event reporting and logging, equipment data base management, SW downloading and management, etc. Control bus The SPI bus allows: connection between SC and boards for configuration data provisioning remote inventory data acquisition data collection ( alarms ) and commands handling (ex. loops) The SC processor is master of this bus. The ISLINK (10 Mb/s) is used to realize the communication between the EC in the master shelf and the SC in the expansion shelves. The ISSB bus (not used in current release) connects the Shelf Controllers processor to the ASICs and FPGAs of the different boards in the same shelf. It is used for OChOH management and to carry primitives for OCC10 performance monitoring. It is terminated in the PSC. The Intershelf Link (ILINK) (10 Mb/s) is used in 1696MS_C system only allowing to connect the SPI bus and the Card presence signals from the slave shelves to the ESC board, only provided in master shelf.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 162 / 390
External interfaces toward Craft Terminal, OS... F interface : available from the EC function for connection to a local Craft Terminal; the electrical interface and connector are provided by the ESC card. The standard implementation of the physical layer for the F interface consists of an RS232 UART port accessible from the ESC card front panel. QECC Interface: it is a TMN related communication interface based on the use of the Embedded Communication Channels available in the Optical Supervisory Channel (DCC). Through the QECC interface the equipment can exchange management messages with a remote OS. QAUX interface: it is provided as an additional TMN communication interface for message exchange between the NE and a Remote OS station based on the use of a 2 Mbit/s proprietary protocol. Q3/TL1 interface: it is dedicated to an OS station connection. LAN_Q supports Q3 connection to a WAN or LAN respectively. The physical interfaces are provided by the LAN_Q card. RE / HK interface: this interface consists of parallel I/O signals used for remote alarms and for housekeeping signals. The relevant electrical interfaces are placed on the HK card, and are controlled by the EC function through parallel I/O ports. RA interface: it is dedicated to send commands toward the rack to light up the relevant lamps. Flash backup and Smart Boot The flash backup capability permits the management system to copy files back and forth using an ftp service, between the flash card on the ESC in slot 1 and the ESC in slot 24 of the master shelf.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 163 / 390
Rack leds
Remote/ Housekeeping Alarms RE/HK
OPERATION SYSTEM
RA EXTERNAL INTERFACES RAI HK LAN_Q
Q3/TL1
Local Craft Terminal
FLASH CARD
SLAVE SHELF To all boards in the shelf
F EC ISLINK SC SPI
QECC
To all SPI boards in the shelf
SC ESC BOARD SPVM MASTER SHELF

UIC EXTERNAL INTF
ESC BOARD
QAUX
REMOTE OPERATION SYSTEM
Figure 91. Controller subsystem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 164 / 390
3.1.7.1 Example of control interfaces scheme MASTER SHELF

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. PSC ISPB (not used in current release) PDU/TRU Power Supply A PSC F INTERFACE O M O S M C M V A C O C C 1 0 M C C 4 x A N Y D X / O A D M O M D X / O A D M SC QECC S P V M SPIA SPIB SPV channel (optical) U I C EC E S C LAN LAN HK RAI Q3/TL1 ISLINK HK/RE RA E1/E2 2x2Mbps F1 NU QAUX intf (REMOTE OS) Remote / HK Alarms Rack Leds (OPERATION SYSTEM) Power Supply B Local Craft Terminal
EXPANSION SHELF
PSC ISPB (not used in current release) PSC O M D X / O A D M E S C RAI LAN
Power Supply A Power Supply B
O M O S M C M V A C O C C 1 0 M C C 4 x A N Y D X / O A D M
ISLINK
RA
SPIA SPIB
Figure 92. Example of control interfaces scheme in 1696MS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 165 / 390
MASTER COMPACT SHELF

PSC/2 ISPB (not used in current release)
PDU/TRU Power Supply A PSC/2 F INTERFACE O O M D X / O A D M SC QECC S P V M Audio EC E S C LAN LAN HK RAI Q3/TL1 ISLINK HK/RE RA Remote / HK Alarms Rack Leds (OPERATION SYSTEM) Power Supply B Local Craft Terminal All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
I L I N K _ M O C C 1 0 M C C 4 x A N Y
M D X / O A D M
SPIA
SPV channel (optical)
EXPANSION COMPACT SHELF

PSC2 ISPB (not used in current release) PSC2
Power Supply A Power Supply B
I L I N K _ S O C C 1 0 M C C 4 x A N Y
SPIA
Figure 93. Example of control interfaces scheme in 1696MS_C
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 166 / 390
3.1.8 Power supply subsystem The powering architecture is distributed: two Power Supply Cards are in charge of feeding all the other cards hosted in the shelf by selecting the highest voltage supplied by the two station batteries. Power Supply Cards are fit in slot 25 and slot 48 in 1696MS slot 7 and 12 in 1696MS_C. The main purposes are: Supply and distribute 48V filtered and protected voltage to all the boards housed in the shelf of the 1696MS/1696MS_C equipment Supply and distribute +3V service voltage dedicated to SPIDER circuitry in all the boards Supply and distribute +5V auxiliary voltage Make a bus termination Give alarms on fault battery and voltages loss. The PSC boards work in 1 + 1 protection; this means that (as concerning 48V) only one PSC may be active at once. This circuit select the battery more charged and protect against reverse voltage applied. Figure 94. on page 168 shows the equipment power supply scheme housed on the two PSC. Input power stage It provides adaptation to the customer central power bus by a main power block and supplies all the SPIDER FPGA by means of an onboard converter. Main power block It is used to select the input voltage of the system and to supply a surge protection. It contains an EMI filter to permit the equipment to be reliable in presence of external EMI interferences and to limit the internally generated EMI. The voltages coming from the two station batteries, are applied to PSC A and to PSC B respectively by means of the power connector located on the unit front panel ( ex. +BATT A BATT A to PSC A and +BATT B BATT B to PSC B). The +Batt can be connected to a mechanical ground through a strap setting. Moreover each PSC receives from the back panel connector the BATT voltage coming from the other station battery (i.e. BATT B to PSC A and BATT A to PSC B). Each PSC can therefore select which of the two station batteries provides the highest supply. The selected voltages are ORed and sent to the equipment cards. Protection Circuit The protection circuit is present in the PSC and in all the boards where a DC/DC converter is required i.e. input stage and distributed power stages. It is an interface between +BATT BATT and the DC/DC converter. It provides the following functions: it insulated the DC/DC converter in case of input short circuit. Fuses are fitted in order to prevent a failed unit from shortening the input bus. In fact a input short circuit failure can cause severe fluctuations on the input power of the other DC/DC converters it implements a startup and an inrush current limiting system in order to provide controlled charge up for the input holdup capacitor and therefore it prevents a current surge at the module input when the board is plugged in it insulated the DC/DC converter in case of input voltage lower than 33 V. On board power supply A DC/DC converter generates a +3.3 V voltage used to power the SPIDER FPGA.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Distributed power stage All the boards receive the +3.6 V and the 5.5 V voltage to power the FPGA device located on each card. Moreover, some boards receive the +BATT BATT voltages generated by the input stage of the PSC.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 167 / 390
Abnormal service range The 1696MSPAN equipment operating at 48 V does not suffer any damage when subjected to the following voltage range : 0 V to 40,5 V and 57 V to 60 V. When the equipment operates at 60 V, the voltage range becomes: 0 V to 50 V and 72 V to 75 V. Protection to the station power supply is provided by 16A circuit breakers at the top of the S9 rack. The maximum power consumption of the main rack is about 400 Watts. DC/DC Power supply units output voltages + 3.6 V 3% 5.5 V 3% + 2.5 V 3%
Batt_A GND +Batt_A Batt_B
PSC A
GND
* protection * prefilter * fuse
+Batt * OR Batt * EMI/EMC filter Batt +Batt * OR Batt Batt * soft start * EMI/EMC filter
+Batt_B
PSC B
* protection * prefilter * fuse
3.6V dual DC/DC 5.5V converter
* EMI/EMC filter * threshold * soft start * EMI/EMC filter * threshold dual DC/DC converter 5.5V 3.6V
PRIMARY POWER STAGE
DISTRIBUTED POWER STAGE GENERIC BOARD

* soft start * EMI/EMC filter * threshold OBPS 3.6V 5.5V 2.5V
OR
OR
auxilliary power supply
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SPIDER FPGA
Figure 94. 1696MSPAN equipment power supply scheme
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 168 / 390
Normal service range The normal input voltage range of the power supply module is either: 40,5 V t 48 V t 57,0 V or 50,0 V t 60 V t 72,0 V.
3.1.9 Protection subsystem The protection type used is Optical SNCP (network protection). In a ring network the SubNetwork Connection Protection (SNCP) at optical channel level can be provided either in backtoback terminals or in OADM configuration. The transponders (MCC/OCC10) are duplicated for each protected channel. At the transmit side, the signal is broadcasted on the two arms of the ring. At the receive side one of the two available signals is selected. When a failure occurs on the working path, the system switches on the signal of the protecting path. Client end traffic
Receive side: in case of a failure in one arm of the ring the system select the signal of the other one Transmit side: client signals are split and launched on the two arms of the ring
Backtoback terminal
OADM
OADM
OADM
Figure 95. Channel level protection in a ring network The Optical SNCP (OSNCP) is ensured for each client signal by 2 optical splitters, located between the client interface and the transponder cards: At the transmit side, each client signal is split by a 50/50 optical splitter and sent to two transponder cards. Then, one signal is broadcasted to one arm of the ring and the other signal is broadcasted to the other arm. At the receive side, each WDM signal comes from one arm of the ring to one transponder card. At the User Tx interface, one transponder card is in working mode (laser ON) and the other is in protecting mode (laser OFF). When a fault is detected on the working path, the protection switching is performed by turning off the working User Tx laser and by reactivating the protecting one.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 169 / 390
Client signals
Optical coupling Working: laser ON User Tx Optical splitting Protecting: laser OFF User Tx
User Rx
User Rx
MCC/OCC10 West
WDM Rx WDM Tx WDM Rx WDM Tx
MCC/OCC10 East
DMUX DWDM line (West) MUX 1696MSPAN
MUX DWDM line (East) DMUX
Figure 96. OSNCP principle In the following are shown the Optical SNCP types provided by the equipment. They are the MCC protection (alone and MCC + 4xANY), described on para. 3.1.9.1 the OCC10 protection, described on para. 3.1.9.2. the 4xANY client signals protection, described on para. 3.1.9.3. 3.1.9.1 MCC protection Table 14. MCC protection: switching criteria Alarm HWF C_ABS C_TYPE ILOS_WDM LOC_user / LOC_User_Tx Applicable to the following MCCs All MCCs All MCCs All MCCs All MCCs MCC2, MCC3 Default status always enable always enable always enable always enable always enable
When a MCC detects one of the above criteria, the transmitter is shutdown.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 170 / 390
3.1.9.1.1 MCC alone: MCC1, MCC2, MCC3
MCC West
Rx Rx
MCC East
WDM Tx
WDM Tx
8x8 Matrix
WDM Rx
8x8 Matrix
WDM Rx
Tx
Tx
Figure 97. Optical SNCP with MCC units The function is provided by two optical splitters. The selection is done by switchingoff the user Tx corresponding to the path in failure and reactiving the protecting one. 3.1.9.1.2 MCC + 4xANY MCC
WDM Rx WDM Tx Tx Rx Tx
MCC
WDM Tx WDM Rx Rx
OPC
Tx Rx Tx
Rx Rx Tx
4xANY Rx Rx Tx Tx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 98. Optical SNCP of the MCC associated with the 4xANY (MCC4xANY) The function is ensured by two optical splitters (one OPC card). The selection is done by switchingoff the MCC user Tx corresponding to the path in failure and reactiving the protecting one.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 171 / 390
3.1.9.2 OCC10 protection
OCC10 West
Rx Rx
OCC10 East
WDM Tx
WDM Tx
8x8 Matrix
WDM Rx
8x8 Matrix
WDM Rx
Tx
Tx
Figure 99. Optical SNCP with OCC10 unit The function is ensured by two optical splitters (one OPC card). The selection is done by switchingoff the user Tx corresponding to the path in failure and reactiving the protecting one. Table 15. OCC10 protection: switching criteria Alarm HWF C_ABS C_TYPE LOS_WDM_Rx (or LOC_OTN_WDM_Rx) LOS_user_Tx LOF_OTN_WDM_Rx LOM_OTN_WDM_Rx Managed X X X X X X X always enable Status
When an OCC10 detects one of the above criteria then the transmitter is shutdown.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 172 / 390
3.1.9.3 Protection of the 4xANY client Protection can be performed optically on the 4xANY units.
MCC
WDM Rx WDM Tx Tx Rx
MCC
WDM Tx WDM Rx Tx Rx
Tx Rx Tx
Rx Rx Tx LF Link Rx Tx
Tx
Rx Rx Tx
4xANY Rx Rx Tx Tx
4xANY Rx Rx Tx Tx
OPC
OPC
OPC
OPC
Figure 100. Optical SNCP of the MCC associated with the 4xANY (4xANY client protection) The function is ensured by eight optical splitters (provided by four OPCs). The selection is done by switchingoff the 4xANY user Tx corresponding to the path in failure and reactiving the protecting one. The clients are individually protected: if one is protected, it is not necessary to protect the other ones. In 1696MS, when two 4xANY are used in client protection configuration, the 4xANY on the right side always contains the MAIN/protected drawers, and the 4xANY on the left side, the SPARE/protecting drawers. In 1696MS_C, when two 4xANY are used in client protection configuration, the 4xANY above (slots 4 and 5) always contains the MAIN/protected drawers, and the 4xANY below (slots 2 and 3), the SPARE/protecting drawers. The slot allocation of the OPC according to the drawers in protection of the 4xANY clients is fixed as described in Figure 101. N.B. In some configuration, the OPC slot cannot be provided by an OPC board because this is already allocated by other boards. This concerns LAN, HK and RAI boards. This can limit the number of protected clients.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 173 / 390
DRAWER #3
DRAWER #2
DRAWER #2
DRAWER #3
Figure 101. Correspondance between OPC slots allocation and 4xANY drawers in protection OPC location for drawers protection drawer 1: 31, 35, 39, 43 drawer 2: 30, 34, 38, 42 drawer 3: 28, 32, 40, 44 drawer 4: 29, 33, 41, 45. The 4xANY boards in slot 23 and 2223 cannot be protected.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
ESC 4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
25 P S C
26 27 28 29 30 O O O L P P P A C C C N 49
31 32 O O P P C C
33 O P C
34 35 36 37 38 39 O O H R O O P P K A P P I C C C C
40 O P C
41 42 43 O O O P P P C C C
44 O P C
45 46 47 48 O U U P P I I S C C
FANS
Table 16. 4xANY client protection: switching criteria per each drawer Alarm HWF Link_Failure_DRW_U C_ABS C_ABS_DRW_U
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Managed X X X X X X X
4 x ANY
Status
always enable
C_TYPE_DRW_U SSF_U Pk_AIS_U
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 174 / 390
DRAWER #4
DRAWER #1
OPC #2
OPC #1
OPC #3
DRAWER #1
OPC #4
DRAWER #4
3.1.10 Performance Monitoring subsystem The 1696MSPAN is able to monitor the performance of the optical signal transmission. It is an SDH type Performance Monitoring, based on B1 counter and performed at the RX accesses (for SDH or SONET frames at system inputs only). This function is available for MCC, OCC10 and 4xANY boards (on the received aggregate signal only, as regards 4xANY). These boards monitor the B1 byte. The performance monitoring is available: at the User Rx access in order to monitor the client incoming signal, at the WDM Rx access in order to monitor the client incoming signal and its transmission through the WDM network. It is possible to manage up to 32 PM per NE. PM at WDM Rx side PM on client signal
User RX
WDM TX
WDM RX
User TX
ADM
1696MSPAN
User TX WDM RX
WDM
1696MSPAN
WDM TX User RX
ADM
Figure 102. Two possible monitored sections by the MCC What does the system monitor? Performance monitoring are SDH type. The system monitors: performance primitive 1 CV (Count of Violations). 8 errors by SDH or SONET frame can be detected Defect Seconds (DS): second during which one of the LOS (Loss Of Signal), LOF (Loss Of Frame (SDH) or LOC (Loss Of Clock) events occurred. In SDH ADM devices, the number of EB (Erroneous Blocks) is accumulated, what is no more true here (we perform the count of B1 violations: CV). But we make the approximation that CV = EB for low BER. performance events ES (Erroneous Second): second containing one or more erroneous bits SES (Severely Erroneous Second): second containing at least 30% of erroneous blocks or at least one defect (LOS, LOF or LOC) BBE (Background Blocks Errors): number of B1 erroneous bits outside an SES.
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 175 / 390
How does the system store the performance data? Two counters are provided to store the Performance Monitoring data: 15 minutes counter: The current measurement and measurements of the 4 previous hours (15minute periods) are stored in the NE data base. Measurements of several days are stored in SH base. 24 hours counter: The current measurement and the one of the day before are stored in the NE data base. Measurements on several months are stored in SH base. For both periods, 15 minutes and 24 hours, an adjustable threshold alarm (TCA) on each ES, SES and BBE is provided to the operator. A TCA alarm (QoS alarm) is raised when one of these thresholds is reached (all the counter values are available). Individual PM threshold management. It is provided the ability to set the threshold level on a per entity basis for 15 min or 24 hours on the user side or WDM side of each transponder and on the STM16 signal of each 4xANY board to define user default threshold level on per type of board basis for 15 min or 24 hours. Table 17. Default thresholds for QoS alarms SET/RESET thresholds QoS_24 alarm BBE 36000 QoS_15 alarm BBE 24000 ES 150 SET thresholds ES 50 SES 10 BBE 200 SES 15 RESET thresholds ES 5 SES 0 Implicite RESET after 24 hours
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 176 / 390
3.2 System Configuration

3.2.1 Configuration criteria The basic configuration of the relies on the following criteria: the traffic demand defines the number of channels (1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 16, 24 or 32 channels) the network architecture and the position of the equipment in the network defines the NE type (line terminal, OADM, backtoback terminal, repeater or CPE). the optical power budget determines the need of optical amplification in the line terminal and OADM NEs or the need of repeater NEs.
Once the basic configuration is defined, secondary criteria will be determinant to define the optional features: TDM concentrator (4 ANY) Up to 4 client signals may be multiplexed on a single STM16. The concentration of 4 client signals on a unique transponder access, requires a 4 ANY board but saves 3 MCC board and the corresponding optical channels. Optical SubNetwork Connection Protection (OSNCP) In ring networks, both channels and each client signals can be individually protected: the protection of a channel/wavelenght requires an OPC board and two transponders (MCC/OCC10) the protection of the client signal(s) requires up to four OPCs, two 4xANY and two MCC boards. Supervision function and User interface The supervision feature requires an SPVM (SPVM2; SPVM_H) board. The 2 Mbit/s user interface feature requires in addition an UIC board. These two features also require the OSC insertion MUX and the OSC extraction DMUX implemented in all OADM boards, the OMDX8100_M_L1_XS and in the OAC boards. If the use of one of these features is foreseen, not at the beginning but in the future, the early choice of a board with the OSC MUX and DMUX will allow a further implementation, without interruption of the traffic. Expansion MUX/DEMUX The 2:1 expansion MUX and DEMUX (OMDX8100_M_L1_X and OMDX8100_M_L1_XS boards) are necessary to reach NE configurations with more than 16 optical channels. An NE can be upgraded up to a 32 channel NE without traffic interruption if the expansion MUX and DMUX are already installed. Remote NE The type of Remote NE is defined when few channels are needed for the user to reach from a ring a distant NE or to create a point to point link with CPE using. Boards are generally 1696MS shelf and 1696MS_C shelf compatible except boards explicitly denominated as strictly for 1696MS or strictly for Compact shelf. When a CPE is used in office version, the customer must provide an appropriate ground. CPE metallic housing should be connected to the ground, 0 V_DC of the External power feeding must be also connected to this ground.
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Consequently the ground connection of the positive Battery 48 Vdc should be directly connected on the ground (PSC side) of the power cable.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 177 / 390
Let consider the example of Figure 103.

4 added and dropped client signals All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
8 client signals
Line Terminal
4 passthrough channels
Line Terminal
8 client signals
OADM
Figure 103. Example of starting configuration One 8 channel MUX/DMUX card is sufficient to build this configuration. The Table 18. gives three possibilities and their characteristics. Table 18. Configuration criteria MUX/DMUX board Cost Power budget maximum Upgradability Supervision channel
OMDX8100_M_L2 or OMDX8100_M_S2 or OMDX8100_M_S1
minimum
12 or 16 channels without No traffic interruption. 24 or 32 channels with traffic interruption. 12 or 16 channels without Yes traffic interruption. 24 or 32 channels with traffic interruption. Up to 32 channels without Yes traffic interruption.
OADM8100_M_##_S
intermediate
intermediate
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
maximum
minimum
N.B.
In the OMDX and OADM board name, the characters of the fourth part if any, have the following meaning: S: board with supervision channel extract and insert functions. X: board with expansion MUX.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 178 / 390
3.2.2 1696MS (main shelf) configurations examples 3.2.2.1 Typical configurations

Terminals 1 channel terminal 2 channels terminal 4 channels terminal with two 4 ANY boards 8 channels terminal with supervision and user interface 16 channels terminal with expansion and supervision 24 channels terminal with expansion and supervision 32 channels terminal with two stages amplification
It is also possible to use 12 and 24 channels terminal. Backtoback terminals / OADM 1 channel OADM 2 channels OADM 4 channels OADM 8 channels OADM 8 channels west and 4 channels east btb terminal / OADM 12 channels btb terminal / OADM 16 channels btb terminal / OADM 24 channels btb terminal / OADM 32 channels btb terminal Repeaters: Without supervision With supervision.
Some of these configurations are described hereafter. Examples of configurations with MVAC is also provided. In protected configuration, the OPCs have to be plugged under the MAIN transponder (see the examples shown in the following figures).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 179 / 390
3.2.2.2 Line Terminals (one sided multiplexer / demultiplexer) 3.2.2.2.1 4 channels terminal 4 channels terminal can be designed with 4 channels OADM board. In this case the passthrough link is not connected (Mux/Demux extrainput). the 4xANY board can be used only with MCCs. The 4channels terminal configuration can be applied also to OCC10, but with the 9.953Gbps (STM64/OC192/10GBE WAN) client signal. OADM4100_M_chxy_S user interfaces MCC or OCC10 Transponder Transponder Transponder
1
M U X
4 channels OSC in
Client Signals
4 x ANY
4 1
D M U X
MCC 4 x ANY
4 channels OSC out
4 2Mbps order wire UIC SPVM
Figure 104. 4 channels OADM board used as a terminal
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Equipment Shelf Controller
25 P S C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 L U U H R A I I K A I N C C 49
SPV managenement (opt)

48 P S C
See note
OADM 4 channels Transponder ch. 4
Transponder ch. 3
Transponder ch. 2
Transponder ch. 1
4 x ANY FANS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 105. 4 channels terminal configuration * The ESC board is designed in order to support, in the same board, both Equipment and Shelf Controller facilities. The ESC unit has two microprocessors, one dedicated for each task.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 180 / 390
4 x ANY
3.2.2.2.2 8 channels terminal with expansion, supervision and user interface Whatever the implementation, all the boards can be placed in a single shelf.
Only L1 band is supported, provided by the OMDX8100_M_L1_XS board. When OMDX boards are used to design 8 channels terminals, only one set of channels (L1) can be provided with SPV. If an upgrading up to 32 channels is required, OMDX8 board can perform it. OMDX8100_M_L1_XS 1 (30) 8 client signals 8x MCC / OCC10
M U X
8 channels OSC in
8 (38) 1 (30)
D M U X
8 channels OSC out
8 (38)
2Mbps order wire UIC SPVM
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 P S C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 L U U H R A I I K A I N C C 49
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS SPV managenement (opt)

48 P S C
Transponder ch 30
Transponder ch 31
Transponder ch 32
Transponder ch 33
Transponder ch 35
Transponder ch 36
Transponder ch 37
FANS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 106. Example of 8 channels line terminal with expansion and supervision
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 181 / 390
Transponder ch 38
3.2.2.2.3 8 channels terminal with supervision and user interface and without expansion Whatever the implementation, all the boards can be placed in a single shelf. Four set of channels are supported : L1, L2, S1, S2. By using OADM boards in terminals, SPV is available for each set of channels. However, if an upgrading up to 32 channels is required, using OADM8 boards is not sufficient (need for expansion).
1 8 client signals 8x MCC / OCC10

M U X
8 channels OSC in
8 1
D M U X
8 channels OSC out
2Mbps order wire UIC SPVM
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 P S C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 L U U H R A I I K A I N C C 49
OADM8100_M_xx_S SPV managenement (opt)

48 P S C
Transponder ch 8
Transponder ch 7
Transponder ch 6
Transponder ch 5
Transponder ch 4
Transponder ch 3
Transponder ch 2
FANS
Figure 107. Example of 8 channels line terminal with supervision (no expansion)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 182 / 390
Transponder ch 1
3.2.2.2.4 16 channels terminal with expansion and supervision Whatever the implementation, all the boards can be placed in a single shelf.
In order to upgrade a 8 channel terminal to a 16 channel one, or to design 16 channel terminals with SPV, one 8 channel OADM and one 8 channel OMDX boards can be used. OMDX8100_M_L2 20 8x 8 client MCC/ signals OCC10
M U X
28 20
28
D M U X
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS 30 38
M U X
UNIT 2
OSC in LB SB unused LB SB unused OSC out UNIT 1 16 channels 16 channels
8 client signals
8x MCC/ OCC10 30 38
D M U X
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 P S C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 L U U H I I A K N C C 49
Transponder ch 23 Transponder ch 33 Transponder ch 22 Transponder ch 32 Transponder ch 21 Transponder ch 31 Transponder ch 20 Transponder ch 30 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS SPV managenement (opt)
48 P S C
Figure 108. Example of a 16 channels terminal with expansion and SPV upgradability
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 183 / 390
OMDX8100_M_L2 Transponder ch 28 Transponder ch 38 Transponder ch 27 Transponder ch 37 Transponder ch 26 Transponder ch 36 Transponder ch 25 Transponder ch 35
FANS
3.2.2.2.5 32 channels terminal + supervision with two stages amplification 2 shelves are needed for this configuration. OMDX8100_M_L2 20 8 client signals 8 MCC / OCC10
M U X All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
28 20
D M U X
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
OAC
OAC
28
UNIT 3 8 client signals 8 MCC / OCC10
30 38 30 38 42
M U X
LB SB
EXP
M U X D M U X
OSC in OFA OFA 32 channels
LB
D M U X
SB
OFA
OFA
OSC out UNIT 1

M U X
8 client signals
8 MCC / OCC10
50 42 UNIT 4 52 50
D M U X
8 client signals
8 MCC / OCC10
M U X
OMDX8100_M_S2 UNIT 2
60 52
D M U X
60 OMDX8100_M_S1 Figure 109. Example of a 32 channels terminal + SPV + two stages OAC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 184 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
25 P S C
01
Equipment Shelf Controller (SC)

1 26 L A N 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OMDX8100_M_S2 Transponder ch 50 Transponder ch 60 Transponder ch 49 Transponder ch 59 Transponder ch 48 Transponder ch 58 Transponder ch 47 Transponder ch 57 FANS
FANS
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 U U L H R I I A K A I C C N 49
Figure 110. 32 channels terminal + SPV + 2 stages OAC configuration
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 R L P P A A S S I N C C 49
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
Transponder ch 46 Transponder ch 56 Transponder ch 44 Transponder ch 54 Transponder ch 43 Transponder ch 53 Transponder ch 42 Transponder ch 52 OMDX8100_M_S1
OMDX8100_M_L2 Transponder ch 28 Transponder ch 38 Transponder ch 27 Transponder ch 37 Transponder ch 26 Transponder ch 36 Transponder ch 25 Transponder ch 35 OAC OAC Transponder ch 23 Transponder ch 33 Transponder ch 22 Transponder ch 32 Transponder ch 21 Transponder ch 31 Transponder ch 20 Transponder ch 30 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS SPV managenement (opt)
48 P S C
185 / 390
3.2.2.3 OADM and BacktoBack Terminals In the following configurations we can plug MVAC boards in slots 4 to 11 and/or 14 to 21. Each MVAC is used to replace a transponder in the case of a channel loop or to adjust passthrough port losses. 3.2.2.3.1 4 channels OADM
4 client signals 4 client signals OADM4100_M_chyz_S OSC out

D M U X M U X
OADM4100_M_chyz_S OSC in
4x MCC / OCC10
M U X
4x MCC / OCC10
D M U X
OSC in WEST 2.66 Gb/s backpanel electrical links (MCC only)
OSC out EAST
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OADM 4 ch. West Transponder ch 4W Transponder ch 4E Transponder ch 3W Transponder ch 3E Transponder ch 2W Transponder ch 2E Transponder ch 1W Transponder ch 1E
25 P S C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 L O O O O P H A P P P S P K N C C C C C 49
FANS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 111. 4 channels backtoback terminal / OADM Every combination of east and west sets of channels are possible.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 186 / 390
OADM 4 ch. East
3.2.2.3.2 8 channels OADM The 8channels configuration can be proposed with or without the expansion and the supervision capabilities. With optical protection of each channel (neither SPV nor EXP) 8 add & drop protected client signals
OMDX8100_M_x (n8) channels n channels

D M U X
OPCs
OMDX8100_M_y Mx/DMx 8 ch.

M U X
n channels
8x MCC / OCC10 n channels

M U X
8x MCC / OCC10
D M U X
n channels
WEST
(n8) channels
EAST
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OMDX8100_M_x West Transponder ch 8W Transponder ch 8E Transponder ch 7W Transponder ch 7E Transponder ch 6W Transponder ch 6E Transponder ch 5W Transponder ch 5E
49
25 P S C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 O O O O O O L P O O H P P P P P P A S P P K C C C C C C N C C C
FANS
In protected configuration, the OPCs have to be plugged under the MAIN transponder.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 112. 8 OADM protected channels
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 187 / 390
Transponder ch 4W Transponder ch 4E Transponder ch 3W Transponder ch 3E Transponder ch 2W Transponder ch 2E Transponder ch 1W Transponder ch 1E OMDX8100_M_y East
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
OSC out OSC in
1
Only symmetrical configuration can be provided.
With expansion and supervision upgrade capabilities
01 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
25 P S C

SB LB
2 3 4 M U X 5 6 7 8 D M U X
SB
WEST 8x MCC / OCC10
8 add&drop client signals
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS Transponder ch 38 Transponder ch 38 Transponder ch 37 Transponder ch 37 Transponder ch 36 Transponder ch 36 Transponder ch 35 Transponder ch 35

8x MCC / OCC10
FANS
D M U X
M U X
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 L O O O O O O O O P H A P P P P P P P P S K C N C C C C C C C C 49
Figure 113. 8 channels OADM with EXP and SPV capabilities
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
3AL 95278 AA AA
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
390
EAST
SB
LB
Transponder ch 33 Transponder ch 33 Transponder ch 32 Transponder ch 32 Transponder ch 31 Transponder ch 31 Transponder ch 30 Transponder ch 30 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS SPV managenement
SB OSC out
OSC in
188 / 390
With supervision and without expansion upgrade capabilities Four set of channels are supported : L1, L2, S1, S2.
xx stands for the band used: L1, L2, S1, S2. OADM8100_M_xx_S OSC out
D M U X M U X
OADM8100_M_xx_S OSC in
8x MCC / OCC10
M U X
8x MCC / OCC10
D M U X
OSC in WEST
OSC out EAST
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OADM8100_M_xx_S West Transponder ch 8W Transponder ch 8E Transponder ch 7W Transponder ch 7E Transponder ch 6W Transponder ch 6E Transponder ch 5W Transponder ch 5E
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 R L O O O O H A A P P P P K I N C C C C 49
25 P S C
Transponder ch 4W Transponder ch 4E Transponder ch 3W Transponder ch 3E Transponder ch 2W Transponder ch 2E Transponder ch 1W Transponder ch 1E OADM8100_M_xx_S East SPV managenement
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 U U O O O O I I P P P P C C C C C C 48 P S C
FANS
Figure 114. 8 channels OADM with supervision upgrade capability
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 189 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
WEST 8 channels 8 channels
1
3.2.2.3.3 8 channels west and 4 channels east
01
OSC out
OSC in
OADM8100_M_x_S
25 P S C 2 3 4 5 6
Equipment Shelf Controller OADM8100_M_xx_S West Transponder ch 8W Transponder ch 7W

8 1 1 8
7 8
8 client signals
Transponder ch 6W Transponder ch 5W
8x MCC / OCC10
4x MCC / OCC10
FANS
1 4
Figure 115. 8 West / 4 East channels OADM
4 client signals
OSC in
OSC out
OADM4100_M_chyz_S
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 L O O O O P H A P P P P S K N C C C C C 49
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
Transponder ch 4W Transponder ch 4E Transponder ch 3W Transponder ch 3E Transponder ch 2W Transponder ch 2E Transponder ch 1W Transponder ch 1E OADM4100_M_chyz_S East SPV managenement
4 channels
4 channels EAST
190 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
25 P S C
xx stands for the band used: L2, S1, S2.
For the OMDX boards, three set of channels are supported : L2, S1, S2.
3.2.2.3.4 12 channels OADM with supervision and without expansion
01

1 26 L A N 27 L A N 49 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Equipment Shelf Controller OADM 4 channels West Transponder ch 4W Transponder ch 4E Transponder ch 3W Transponder ch 3E Transponder ch 2W Transponder ch 2E Transponder ch 1W Transponder ch 1E
OMDX8100_M_xx West Transponder ch 8W Transponder ch 8E Transponder ch 7W Transponder ch 7E Transponder ch 6W Transponder ch 6E Transponder ch 5W Transponder ch 5E FANS
FANS
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 U U O O O O H R I I P P P P K A I C C C C C C
Figure 116. 12 channels OADM with supervision and without expansion
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 R O L O O O O O O O P P A P A P P P P P P P S S I C N C C C C C C C C C 49
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
Transponder ch 4W Transponder ch 4E Transponder ch 3W Transponder ch 3E Transponder ch 2W Transponder ch 2E Transponder ch 1W Transponder ch 1E OMDX8100_M_xx East
48 P S C
OADM 4 channels East SPV managenement (opt)
191 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
25 P S C
yy has to be different from xx.
xx and yy stands for the band used: L2, S1, S2.
Three set of channels are supported : L2, S1, S2.
3.2.2.3.5 16 channels OADM with supervision and without expansion
01
1 1 2 26 L A N 3 27 L A N 49 4 5 6 7 8

2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Equipment Shelf Controller OADM8100_M_xx_S West Transponder ch 8W Transponder ch 8E Transponder ch 7W Transponder ch 7E Transponder ch 6W Transponder ch 6E Transponder ch 5W Transponder ch 5E
OMDX8100_M_yy_West Transponder ch 8W Transponder ch 8E Transponder ch 7W Transponder ch 7E Transponder ch 6W Transponder ch 6E Transponder ch 5W Transponder ch 5E FANS
FANS
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 U U O O O O O O O H R O I I P P P P P P P K A P I C C C C C C C C C C
Figure 117. 16 channels OADM with supervision and without expansion
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
3AL 95278 AA AA
48 P S C
390
Transponder ch 4W Transponder ch 4E Transponder ch 3W Transponder ch 3E Transponder ch 2W Transponder ch 2E Transponder ch 1W Transponder ch 1E OMDX8100_M_yy_East
Transponder ch 4W Transponder ch 4E Transponder ch 3W Transponder ch 3E Transponder ch 2W Transponder ch 2E Transponder ch 1W Transponder ch 1E OADM8100_M_xx_S East SPV managenement (opt)
192 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
25 P S C
yy can be different from xx.
yy stands for the band used: L2, S1, S2.
xx stands for the band used: L2, S1, S2.
3.2.2.3.6 16 channels OADM with supervision and expansion
01
1 1 2 26 L A N 3 27 L A N 49 4 5 6 7 8

2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Equipment Shelf Controller OMDX8100_M_L1_XS Transponder ch 38 Transponder ch 38 Transponder ch 37 Transponder ch 37 Transponder ch 36 Transponder ch 36 Transponder ch 35 Transponder ch 35
OMDX8100_M_xxEast Transponder ch 8W Transponder ch 8E Transponder ch 7W Transponder ch 7E Transponder ch 6W Transponder ch 6E Transponder ch 5W Transponder ch 5E FANS
FANS
Figure 118. 16 channels OADM with supervision and expansion
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 U U O O O O O O O H R O I I P P P P P P P K A P I C C C C C C C C C C
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
3AL 95278 AA AA
48 P S C
390
Transponder ch 4W Transponder ch 4E Transponder ch 3W Transponder ch 3E Transponder ch 2W Transponder ch 2E Transponder ch 1W Transponder ch 1E OMDX8100_M_yy_East
Transponder ch 33 Transponder ch 33 Transponder ch 32 Transponder ch 32 Transponder ch 31 Transponder ch 31 Transponder ch 30 Transponder ch 30 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS SPV managenement (opt)
193 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ESC (SC)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1314 15 16 171819 20 2122 23 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1314 15 16 171819 20 2122 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 3132 33 3435 36 3738 39 40 414243 44 4546 47 48 P L L O O O O R O U U P O O O S A A P P P P A P P P P I I S C N N C C C C I C C C C C C C 49 FANS
25 26 27 28 29 30 3132 33 3435 36 3738 39 40 414243 44 4546 47 48 O O O O O O P L L O U U P H R O P P P P P P P S A A P I I S K A C C C C C C C C N N C I C C C 49 FANS
ED
OMDX8100_M_L2 Transponder ch 28 Transponder ch 28 Transponder ch 27 Transponder ch 27 Transponder ch 26 Transponder ch 26 Transponder ch 25 Transponder ch 25 4 shelves are needed for this configuration. Transponder ch 23 Transponder ch 23 Transponder ch 22 Transponder ch 22 Transponder ch 21 Transponder ch 21 Transponder ch 20 Transponder ch 20 OMDX8100_M_L2 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS Transponder ch 38 Transponder ch 38 Transponder ch 37 Transponder ch 37 Transponder ch 36 Transponder ch 36 Transponder ch 35 Transponder ch 35 OAC OAC Transponder ch 33 Transponder ch 33 Transponder ch 32 Transponder ch 32 Transponder ch 31 Transponder ch 31 Transponder ch 30 Transponder ch 30 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS SPV managenement (opt) 3.2.2.3.7 32 channels OADM/backtoback terminals ESC (SC) ESC (SC)
01
In protected configuration, the OPCs have to be plugged under the MAIN transponder
Herebelow is shown a 32 channels backtoback configuration with the optical protection of each channel, supervision and amplification. In this configuration is there one OAC on west side and one OAC on east side.
Figure 119. 32 protected channels backtoback with supervision and one OAC per side
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 15 16 171819 20 2122 23 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 15 16 171819 20 2122 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 3132 33 3435 36 3738 39 40 414243 44 4546 47 48 P L L O R O U U P O O O O O O S A A P A P I I S P P P P P P C N N C C C C I C C C C C C C 49 FANS
25 26 27 28 29 30 3132 33 3435 36 3738 39 40 414243 44 4546 47 48 O O O O O O P L L O R O U U P P P P P P P S A A P A P I I S C C C C C C C N N C I C C C C 49 FANS
3AL 95278 AA AA Transponder ch 55 Transponder ch 55 Transponder ch 54 Transponder ch 54 Transponder ch 53 Transponder ch 53 Transponder ch 52 Transponder ch 52 OMDX8100_M_S1
390
OMDX8100_M_S1 Transponder ch 60 Transponder ch 60 Transponder ch 59 Transponder ch 59 Transponder ch 58 Transponder ch 58 Transponder ch 57 Transponder ch 57
OMDX8100_M_S2 Transponder ch 50 Transponder ch 50 Transponder ch 49 Transponder ch 49 Transponder ch 48 Transponder ch 48 Transponder ch 47 Transponder ch 47 Transponder ch 45 Transponder ch 45 Transponder ch 44 Transponder ch 44 Transponder ch 43 Transponder ch 43 Transponder ch 42 Transponder ch 42 OMDX8100_M_S2
194 / 390
3.2.2.4 Repeater with supervision OAC1

Attenuator or DCU
OSC extraction VOA DWDM Line OSC insertion
OAC2 OSC insertion
Preamp
Booster OSC extraction DWDM Line VOA
Booster
Attenuator or DCU
Preamp
OSC
SPVM
OSC
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 P S C
26 27 28 29 30 31 L A N 49
H R K A I

P S C
FANS
Figure 120. Repeater with supervision
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 195 / 390
OAC OAC
3.2.2.5 Configurations with MVAC MVAC boards can be used for three main applications: channel loop power adjustement band passthrough power adjustement extraloop expansionloop power adjustment of external colored wavelengths.
MVAC card can also be used for post emphsys of MCC2, MCC3. The default configuration depends on the configuration. Please refer to the installation handboook for card location in the shelf, according to the application.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 196 / 390
3.2.2.6 4 x ANY node configuration Without drawers protection

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
ESC 4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY 4 x ANY
44 O P C
25 P S C
26 L A N
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 L H R U U P A K A I I S I N C 49
FANS
Figure 121. 4 x ANY node without drawers protection configuration With drawers protection
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
ESC 4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
25 P S C
26 27 28 29 30 O O O L P P P A C C C N 49
31 32 O O P P C C
33 O P C
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 O O H R O O O P P K A P P P I C C C C C
41 42 43 O O O P P P C C C
45 46 47 48 O U U P P I I S C C
FANS
Figure 122. 4 x ANY node with drawers protection configuration OPC location for drawers protection drawer 1: 31, 35, 39, 43 drawer 2: 30, 34, 38, 42 drawer 3: 28, 32, 40, 44 drawer 4: 29, 33, 41, 45. 4xANY boards can be partially protected (drawers 3 & 4 for the 1st couple, drawers 1 & 2 for the 2nd couple).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 197 / 390
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
3.2.3 1696 MS_C (Compact Shelf) configurations examples The 1696MS_C must be able to set many different configurations Terminals up to 12 unprotected channels Line terminal (with/without supervision) up to 8 channels Line terminal with OAC (with/without supervision) Backtoback terminals or OADM with/without protection up to 4 channels backtoback terminal or OADM asymmetrical configurations are allowed (i.e. 2 channels west and 1 channel east) CPE (Customer Premises Equipment) configurations These configurations are preferably exploited with a 1696MS_C but they can be implemented in a 1696MS, too. Remote 4xAny (unprotected) Remote 4xAny + Protection MCC on 1310 nm or 1550 nm Remote MCC or MCC+4xANY OADM 1 channel with or without protection Remote 4xANY + MCC One protected transponder (one signal on 2 channels) Backtoback 4xANY SPV manager (used to connect a SH Manager to supervise the ring). 2channel terminal: MCC + 4xANY with drawers protection
1696MS or 1696MS_C configured to connect a CPE or a 1696MS_C in a small ring 1696MS or1696MS_C receiving/emitting a supervised blackandwhite signal 1696MS or 1696MS_C receiving/emitting a supervised colored signal 1696MS or 1696MS connected to a 1696MS_C located in a small ring 1696MS as a remotization Two 1696MS or 1696MS_C rings connected together With supervision through optical link (DCC) With supervision through electrical link (LAN_Q)
Some of these configurations are described hereafter. N.B. All configurations using a 4 x ANY board are also available with the 4 x ANY_S and 4 x ANY_P.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 198 / 390
3.2.3.1 Examples of Line Terminal configurations 3.2.3.1.1 8channel terminal with SPV and OAC
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
UNUSED
OAC
OAC
L2 30 38
M U X
LB SB
UNUSED
EXP
M U X D M U X
OSC in OFA OFA 8 channels OFA OFA
8 client signals
8 MCC / OCC10
UNUSED
L2 30 38
LB
D M U X
SB
UNUSED
OSC out
PSC2 Transponder ch 8 Transponder ch 7 Transponder ch 6 Transponder ch 5 ILink_S PSC2 PSC2 Transponder ch 4 Transponder ch 3 Transponder ch 2 Transponder ch 1 ILink_S ILink_M OMDX8100_M_L1_XS SPVM OAC / OAC_L (optional) OAC / OAC_L (optional) ESC PSC2 PSC(2) HK RAI LAN_Q PSC(2)
12 11 10 9 8 7
F A N _C
5 4 3 2 1
13
12 11 10 9 8 7
F A N _C
5 4 3 2 1
13
12 11 10 9 8 7
F A N _C
5 4 3 2 1
13
Figure 123. 8channel terminal with SPV and OAC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 199 / 390
3.2.3.1.2 12 unprotected channels terminal without SPV OADM4100_M_chxy_S 1

M U X All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
4 4 client MCC / signals OCC10
4 1
D M U X
OADM8100_L1_X
OAC
OAC
30 38 30 38
M U X
LB SB
UNUSED
EXP
M U X D M U X
OSC in OFA OFA 12 channels OFA OFA
8 client signals
8 MCC / OCC10
LB
D M U X
SB
UNUSED
OSC out
OADM4100_M_chxy_S Transponder ch 4 Transponder ch 3 Transponder ch 2 Transponder ch 1 ILink_S OADM8100_L1_X Transponder ch 38 Transponder ch 37 Transponder ch 36 Transponder ch 35 ILink_S ILink_M Transponder ch 33 Transponder ch 32 Transponder ch 31 Transponder ch 30 ESC
PSC2
12 11 10 9 8
F A N _C
5 4 3 2 1
13
PSC2 PSC2
12 11 10 9 8
F A N _C
5 4 3 2 1
13
PSC2 PSC(2) HK RAI LAN_Q PSC(2)
12 11 10 9 8 7
F A N _C
5 4 3 2 1
13
Figure 124. 12channel terminal without SPV

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 200 / 390
3.2.3.2 OADM 4 channels protected backtoback with supervision and OAC 4 add & drop protected client signals
OPC OPC
OPC OPC
OAC OSC out
OADM4100_M_chxy_S Mx/DMx 4ch

D M U X
OADM4100_M_chxy_S Mx/DMx 4ch

M U X
OAC OSC in
n4 ch
OFA
OFA
4x n channels MCC / OCC10 OFA OSC in WEST

M U X
4x MCC / OCC10
D M U X
n channels
OFA
n4 channels EAST
OSC out
PSC2 Transponder ch 4 W Transponder ch 4 E Transponder ch 3 W Transponder ch 3 E ILink_S OADM4100_M_chxy_S Transponder ch 2 W Transponder ch 2 E Transponder ch 1 W Transponder ch 1 E ILink_S ILink_M OADM4100_M_chxy_S SPVM OAC / OAC_L (opt) OAC / OAC_L (opt) ESC OPC OPC PSC2 PSC2 OPC OPC PSC2 PSC(2) HK RAI LAN_Q PSC(2)
12 11 10 9 8 7
F A N _C
5 4 3 2 1
13
12 11 10 9 8 7
F A N _C
5 4 3 2 1
13
12 11 10 9 8 7
F A N _C
5 4 3 2 1
13
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 125. OADM 4 channels protected backtoback with supervision and OAC
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 201 / 390
3.2.3.3 CPE (Customer Premises Equipment) configurations 3.2.3.3.1 Remote 4xANY In this case, OADM is not needed since the data signal is carried by a Black & white 1310 nm wavelength. The OSC is extracted to/from the 1310 nm data signal on a special 1310/1510 filter SPV_F_C card. OSC is managed by the SPVM board.
1550 nm MCC 1310 nm SPVF 1696MS SPVM SPVM MCC
SPVF SPVM 1310 nm 4xANY 1696MS_C UI

SPV_F_C 1310
UI 1310 nm to/from 1696MSPAN 1310 nm
OSC 1510 nm
4xANY
SPVM
CPE
UI
SPVM F A N _C 4xANY
PSC
HK RAI SPV_F_C LAN_Q

PSC

Figure 126. Remote 4xANY N.B.
All configurations using a 4 x ANY board are also available with the 4 x ANY_S and 4 x ANY_P.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 202 / 390
3.2.3.3.2 Remote MCC or MCC+4xANY wihtout protection The situation is the same with or without the 4xANY board : the signal transmitted from the CPE to the 1696MS in a core ring or in a pointtopoint configuration is colored and carries a 1510 nm OSC. The Remote MCC is connected to the Metro ring via one MCC or directly from the WDM path. This configuration allows a greater Span Budget.
1550 nm MCC 1310 nm SPVF 1696MS SPVM SPVM MCC
SPVF SPVM 1550 nm MCC 1696MS_C 1310 nm 4xANY Colored signal

OSC 1510 nm
UI
4xANY
MCC
SPVM
UI
SPV_FC 1550
CPE
UI
SPVM F A N _C 4xANY
PSC
MCC

PSC

Figure 127. Remote MCC or MCC+4xANY
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 203 / 390
3.2.3.3.3 Remote 4xANY plus MCC In this configuration, the CPE supports 2 data channels, one from the 4xANY board (B&W), and one from the MCC (colored). The SPV_F_1310_1550 enables to insert/extract them with an OSC. Thus the fiber carries 3 wavelengths : 1510 (OSC), 15xx (MCC) and 1310 (4xANY). MCC+4xANY
SPV_F 1310_1550
SPVM
UI
1550 nm + 1310 nm + OSC
CPE 4xANY
SPV_F 1310+1550 SPVM OSC 1310 nm 4xANY 1696MS_C UI UI 1550 nm MCC
UI
SPVM F A N _C SPV_F_1310_1550 MCC 4xANY
PSC
HK RAI LAN_Q
PSC
Figure 128. Unprotected remote MCC or MCC+4xANY
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 204 / 390
MCC
3.2.3.3.4 One protected transponder In this configuration OPC card is used to protect transponder cards. The same signal is launched into the fiber on two different wavelengths. This configuration is used in a pointtopoint link. One protected transponder on the same fiber (2 wavelengths) with OADM 2channel
MCC/OCC10
OPC
User interface
To/from CPE SPVM Not from 1696 ring
MCC/OCC10
OPC User interface
CPE
SPVM 1696MS_C
OADM1 MCC/OCC10 MCC/OCC10
OPC User PSC OADM1100_M_xx_S F A N _C SPVM MCC /OCC10 spare MCC/OCC10 main
HK RAI OPC LAN_Q

PSC
SPVM must be set in slot 4 of the master shelf when it is linked to OADM board Figure 129. One protected transponderon the same fiber (2 channel wavelengths)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In this case an OADM is needed to multiplex the main signal and the spare in one fiber if only one fiber is used. When two fibers are available, the main and spare signals do not need to be launched in the same fiber, and they also do not need to have different wavelengths.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 205 / 390
3.2.3.3.5 Backtoback 4xANY This configuration is designed to drop/(insert) some of the 4 services carried by the 4XANY functionality. The others are bypassed to a second 4XANY board to be launched to their destination. In the following figure, 2 services are dropped (inserted) and 2 are passedthrough. N.B. Less than 4 services can be carried. 4xANY UI 4xANY
SPV_F_C SPVM
SPVM SPV_F_C
UI CPE
SPVM F A N _C 4xANY 4xANY
PSC
HK SPV_F_C SPV_F_C LAN_Q

PSC
Figure 130. Backtoback 4XANY intended to drop some of the carried services and bypass the others.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 206 / 390
4xANY
4xANY
3.2.3.3.6 Remote unprotected MCC 1550 nm

1696MS
Transp Transp
Transp Transp OADM 4 ch West SPVF SPVM SPVM
OADM 4 ch East
1550 nm + OSC OSC SPVM Transponder ch.2E 1696MS_C SPVF
SPVM F A N _C
PSC
Transponder ch 2E

PSC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Equipment Shelf Controller SPVM OADM 4 ch. West Transponder ch 4W Transponder ch 4E Transponder ch 3W Transponder ch 3E Transponder ch 2W
Transponder ch 1W Transponder ch 1E
25 P S C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 R S L P H A P U U S A K I V I I C N 49
FANS
OADM 4 ch. East SPVM

45: SPV Filter
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 131. Remote unprotected MCC
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 207 / 390
3.2.3.3.7 1 protected channel OADM 1696MS_C

SPVM
OADM1 1310 nm
1550 nm Transponder Transponder
OADM1
OPC
User
OADM1ch+OSC W OADM1ch+OSC E F A N _C SPVM Transponder W Transponder E ESC
PSC
RAI HK OPC LAN_Q

PSC
Figure 132. OADM 1 channel protected
3.2.3.3.8 Remote 4xANY+ Protected MCC The remote 4xANY + protected MCC is the combination with the 2 MCC protected at each other with an OPC on different NE, and use of the 4xANY on the User side.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 208 / 390
1696MS 1550 nm
1696MS MCC MCC OADM SPVF SPVM SPVM OADM MCC
1550 nm
OADM
OADM SPVF SPVM SPVM
SPVF SPVM MCC
SPVF 1310 nm on WDM side MCC 1310 nm OPC 4xANY
1696MS_C
UI
Figure 133. Remote Spur 4xANY + protected MCC on 1310 nm
1696MS 1550 nm MCC OADM SPVF SPVM SPVM 1550 nm + OSC OSC SPVM OADM
1550 nm
OADM
OADM SPVF SPVM SPVM 1550 nm + OSC SPVF SPVF 1550 on WDM side MCC 1310 nm OPC 4xANY MCC
1696MS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1696MS_C
UI
Figure 134. Remote Spur 4xANY + protected MCC on 1550 nm
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 209 / 390
3.2.3.3.9 2channel Line Terminal The line Terminal 2 Channels use OADM 2 in order to deliver 2 different channels.
OADM2 OSC SPVM 1 MCC/OCC10 1696MS_C UI UI PSC OADM1ch+OSC E F A N _C SPVM Transponder W Transponder E ESC 2 MCC/OCC10
LAN_Q
PSC
Figure 135. 2 channels Line Terminal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 210 / 390
3.2.3.3.10 Remote CPE, 2channel terminal: MCC + 4xANY with drawers protection
Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx
OADM2100_M_chxy_S
#1 #2 4xANY #3 Rx #4
SPVM OSC in
OPC #1
MCC ch1
ch1 ch2
M U X
Tx
OPC #2
2 channels
OPC #3 Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx #1
ch1 MCC ch2 ch2
OPC #4
#2 4xANY #3 Rx #4
D M U X
Tx
OSC out
F A N _C
5 4 3 2 1
4xANY 4xANY ILink_S ILink_M OADM2100_M_chxy_S SPVM MCC ch2 MCC ch1 ESC
13
PSC2 OPC #4 OPC #3 OPC #1 OPC #2 PSC2 PSC(2) HK RAI LAN_Q PSC(2)
12 11 10 9 8 7
12 11 10 9 8 7
F A N _C
5 4 3 2 1
13
Figure 136. Remote CPE, 2channel terminal: MCC + 4xANY with drawers protection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 211 / 390
3.2.3.3.11 SPV manager The SPV manager is used only when the customer want to connect a SH Manager to supervise the ring.
SPVM 1550 nm + OSC SPV_F_C OADM LAN_Q 1696MS_C SH PSC F A N _C SPVM SPV_F_C SPV_F_C 1550 nm + OSC SPV_F_C OADM
LAN_Q
ESC PSC
N.B.
In this configuration two OADM boards must be provisionned by the software even if they are not needed for the Hardware function. Then the associated alarm (RUM) will raise on the craft Equiment even if the working is normal. Figure 137. SPV Manager
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 212 / 390
3.2.4 1696MS configured to connect a CPE In this paragraph, we describe the configuration of 1696MS in a core ring, host of a link to a distant CPE. In current release two data signals plus OSC can be managed as such a one fiber link (1310 nm, 1550 nm or 1310+1550 nm). 3.2.4.1 1696MS receiving/emitting a supervised B&W signal This situation is the same as a customer signal arriving on a B&W port of 1696MS, except that the incoming signal carries the OSC which has to be extracted/inserted in the 1696MS. OMDX or OADM OMDX or OADM
Transponder
Transponder
To 1696 WDM ring
SPVM
SPVM
To 1696 WDM ring
OPC 1310 nm 1310 nm SPVM
1696MS
SPV_F
Black & White signal To/From CPE In this configuration the 1696MS node has to support 3 Optical Supervisory Channels (2 x SPVM boards needed). Figure 138. 1696MS connected to a CPE through a supervised blackandwhite signal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 213 / 390
3.2.4.2 1696MS receiving a supervised colored signal In this configuration, the signal coming from the CPE is plugged on the User Interfaced of the 1696MS. In this case the signal from the 1696MS to the CPE is carried by a 1310 nm wavelength, and the contrapropagative signal is carried by a 1550 nm wavelength. The optical budget is then limited by the Black and White span optical budget. 3.2.4.2.1 Protected signal in the ring The signal coming from the CPE is launched in both directions in the 1696MS ring (East and West). In this case, the 1696MS node has to support 3 Optical Supervisory Channels (2 SPVM boards are needed). OMDX or OADM OMDX or OADM
To 1696 WDM ring
SPVM
SPVM
To 1696 WDM ring
OPC 1550 nm SPVM 1310 nm
1696MS
SPV_F_1550 To/From CPE
Figure 139. 1696MS connected to a CPE through a supervised blackandwhite and colored signal and protected in the ring
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 214 / 390
Transponder
Transponder
3.2.4.2.2 Unprotected signal in the ring In this case the signal coming from the CPE is launched only on one side of the ring.
In this configuration the 1696MS node has to support 3 Optical Supervisory Channels (2 SPVM boards needed). OMDX or OADM OMDX or OADM
Transponder
To 1696 WDM ring
SPVM
SPVM
To 1696 WDM ring
1550 nm or 1310 nm
1696MS
To/From CPE
Figure 140. 1696MS connected to a CPE through a supervised blackandwhite and colored signal and unprotected in the ring
SPVM
1310 nm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 215 / 390
3.2.4.3 1696MS as a remotization In this configuration one channel is demultiplexed and the other one is sent directly to the CPE without MCC using. 3.2.4.3.1 Without OSC OMDX or OADM OMDX or OADM
To 1696 WDM ring
SPVM SPVM
To 1696 WDM ring
1696MS
To/From CPE
Figure 141. Optical channel optically passed through the NE without being regenerated. 3.2.4.3.2 With OSC OMDX or OADM OMDX or OADM
To 1696 WDM ring
SPVM
SPVM
To 1696 WDM ring
1696MS
SPV_F To/From CPE
SPV_F
Figure 142. Optical channel optically passed through the NE without being regenerated and with OSC insertion.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When the optical budget is available, this configuration can be used to reach a CPE. In this case, the 1696MS node has to support 3 OSC channels and then 2 SPVM boards are needed.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 216 / 390
SPVM
3.2.5 Two 1696MS or 1696MS_C rings connected together It is possible to make two 1696MS rings (made up of 1696MS and/or 1696MS_C) communicate. It is not necessary that both communicating nodes are located on the same spot. User interfaces are interconnected (data transmission), and the OSC is launched on one 1310 nm black and white signal from one ring to the other through two SPV_F_C boards (one on each ring).
PSC OADM1 F A N _C SPVM Transponder Transponder ch. 3E
RAI OPC SPV_F_C LAN_Q

PSC
(1550 nm)
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Equipment Shelf Controller OADM 4 ch. East OADM 4 ch. West Transponder ch 4W Transponder ch 4E Transponder ch 3W
25 P S C 28: SPV Filter
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 S R L H A U U P P A K I I I S V N C 49
FANS
Figure 143. Interconnection of two rings with a 1696MS and a 1696MS_C
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 217 / 390
Half SPVM Board SPV managenement (opt)
Transponder ch 2W Transponder ch 2E Transponder ch 1W Transponder ch 1E
Supervision through optical link (DCC) It is possible to make two 1696MS Rings communicate (made up of 1696MS and/or 1696MS_C). Both the communicating nodes are not necessary to be located on the same spot. User interfaces are interconnected (data transmission), and the OSC is launched on one 1310 nm blackandwhite signal from one ring to the other through two SPV_F_C boards (one on each ring). Protection is provided for remote MCC Boards of both rings with OPC boards. This protection type allows two failures at a time, one in each ring. OMDX or OADM 1ch OMDX or OADM 1ch
To 1696 WDM ring
SPVM
SPVM
To 1696 WDM ring
OPC SPVM SPV_F_C User interfaces User interfaces SPV_F_C SPVM OADM 1 channel +OSC OPC
SPVM 1696MS
OADM 1 channel +OSC
To 1696 WDM ring
SPVM
SPVM
To 1696 WDM ring
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
PassThrough
1696MS_C
Figure 144. Two 1696MS rings connected together through user interfaces.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 218 / 390
MCC/OCC10 MCC/OCC10
MCC/OCC10 MCC/OCC10
Supervision through electrical link (LAN_Q) The supervision is transmitted from one ring to the other through the LAN_Q boards. This avoid to have one SPVM in the 1696MS shelf and one in the MS_C shelf. OMDX or OADM 1ch OMDX or OADM 1ch
MCC/OCC10
MCC/OCC10
To 1696 WDM ring
SPVM
SPVM
To 1696 WDM ring
SPVM User interfaces LAN_Q 1696MS
User interfaces OADM 1 channel +OSC
LAN_Q OADM 1 channel +OSC
MCC/OCC10
MCC/OCC10
To 1696 WDM ring
SPVM
SPVM
To 1696 WDM ring
1696MS_C
PassThrough
Figure 145. Two 1696MS rings connected together through user interfaces.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The transponders shown in the figure are not protecting each other, but only transmitting the signal they receive. In this configuration both NEs located in the same spot are necessary because of the electrical link length.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 219 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
220 / 390
4 UNITS DESCRIPTION
This chapter describes the cards and units of the 1696 Metro Span for this release. It gives for each card a functional diagram, description and interfaces definition.
4.1 Tributaries
4.1.1 Multirate Channel Card I (MCC1) 2.5 2.66 Gb/s backpanel electrical links to/from corresponding to/from to/from transponder future matrix future matrix copy 0 copy 1
Client input
User Rx (optional)
User Tx (optional)
Client output
B1 non intrusive monitoring
WDM Tx WDM input WDM Rx 8 x 8 MATRIX
WDM output
Alarm & Control unit
to/from corresponding transponder
Figure 146. Block diagram of the MCC1 boards

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 221 / 390
4.1.1.1 Description The MCC1 unit is a bidirectional multiclock interface. The blockdiagram is shown on Figure 146. The receivers (WDM and user) are 2R. Two multi bitrate clockselectable CDR (Clock and Data Recovery) units are used so that the MCC is globally 3R for some bit-rates between 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s (155Mbit/s - 622Mbit/s - 1.06Gbit/s - 1.25Gbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s). The electrical matrix gives some flexibility and additives features: drop / Insert with or without OpticalSNCP electrical passthrough internal (local) loopback line (remote) loopback line (remote) loopback dropinsert user loopback user loopback passthrough possibility to broadcast either the user or the WDM signal to the B1 monitoring unit
The alarm and control unit ensures the following functions: matrix management interface Clock and Data Recovery (CDR) units management (bit rate selection, passthrough,...) alarms collection and interface to the craft terminal via the shelf controller Optical Channel protection control (configuration, switch decision unit) if OpticalSNCP (OSNCP): user Tx ON/OFF control safety procedure management (ALS_WDM). In OCh protection scheme, each MCC transfers its alarms information to the corresponding one (the MCC just beside) via parallel backpanel links in order that each one is able to select the unfailed signal. Each MCC unit is characterized by its particular Tx WDM wavelength (2 wavelengths are selectable so that one shall be chosen before being able to perform a mismatch). On the MCC, the set of channels are written on the card support. Two EEPROM contain both the remote inventory data (construction date, code number, maker number, board identification...) and the set of channels the card support. These information are sent to the ESC board by means of the SPI bus. 4.1.1.2 Optical characteristics See para. 5.3.1.1 on page 331.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 222 / 390
4.1.1.3 Optical safety Alcatel recommends the customers to preset:

the APSD enable mode for all the transponders in terminating nodes the APSD disable mode for all the transponders in regeneration.
Optical safety, fault localization and protection criteria are based on the LOS alarm only. How does it work? ILOS at user Rx input implies a consecutive LOC at WDM or user Tx input and the SD of the WDM Tx. ILOS at WDM Rx input implies the shutdown of the WDM Tx and the start of the ALS mechanism (if available). A consecutive LOC will appear at user Tx input and this interface will be shut down. To restart, the WDM Tx will send restart pulses. Shutdown time is defined to be less than (or equal to) 10 ms.
4.1.1.4 MCC crossconnection configurations On the following schemes, are presented the two adjacent MCCs and the MCC matrix configurations. The HF backpanel links shown in the following drawings are those between the slots 4&5, 6&7, 8&9, 10&11, 14&15, 16&17, 18&19, 20&21. 4.1.1.4.1 Default configuration By default, both optical transmitters are OFF, the 8x8 matrix has no connection. After software configuration, the way of working will be one of the following. backpanel connections MCC West
Rx Tx
MCC East
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8 Matrix
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 147. MCC in default configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 223 / 390
4.1.1.4.2 Drop / Insert without optical channel protection The MCC can accept this configuration in terminals, backtoback terminals, and OADM nodes. The two adjacent boards have an independent configuration (one can be in dropinsert, the other one can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loopback mode). backpanel connections MCC West
Rx Tx
MCC East
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8 Matrix
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 148. Drop / Insert without OpticalSNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration)
Table 19. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC alarms WDM Rx user Tx user Rx ILOS ILOS (LOC)* WDM Tx (LOC)* SD of the WDM Tx shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board) and beginning of the ALS_WDM procedure (if ALS enabled) shutdown of the user Tx consecutive action
(LOC)* CDR
concerns the LOC alarms consecutive to the ILOS one in when the bitrate is managed by the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 224 / 390
4.1.1.4.3 Drop / Insert with Optical channel protection The MCC can accept this configuration in terminals, backtoback terminals, and OADM nodes. The two adjacent boards have the same matrix configuration and must be placed in the two adjacent slots 4&5, 6&7, 8&9, 10&11, 14&15, 16&17, 18&19 or 20&21 because of Low Frequency links used to pass information between them.
MCC West
Rx Rx
MCC East
WDM Tx
WDM Tx
8x8 Matrix
WDM Rx
8x8 Matrix
WDM Rx
Tx
Tx
Figure 149. Drop / Insert with OpticalSNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration)
Table 20. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC alarms WDM Rx user Tx user Rx ILOS ILOS (LOC)* WDM Tx (LOC)* shutdown of the WDM Tx shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board) and beginning of the ALS_WDM procedure (if ALS enabled) shutdown of the user Tx protection action: activation of the protecting user Tx laser consecutive action
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(LOC)* CDR
concerns the LOC alarms consecutive to the ILOS one when the bitrate is managed by the
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 225 / 390
4.1.1.4.4 Electrical passthrough The MCC can accept this configuration in backtoback terminals or OADM nodes for flexibility and/or to enable a regeneration of the signal. The user interfaces are not used and this board do not manage the protection. backpanel connections MCC West
Rx Tx
MCC East optional interfaces

WDM Rx
WDM Tx
8x8
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 150. PassThrough
Table 21. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC alarms WDM Rx user Tx inhibited ILOS inhibited user Rx inhibited inhibited WDM Tx LOC* (LOC)* no action shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board) and beginning of the ALS_WDM procedure (if ALS enable) ShutDown of the WDM Tx on the adjacent board consecutive action
(LOC)* CDR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 226 / 390
4.1.1.4.4.1 Master board The board is refered to as master because its user interfaces are those used and it is this board that manages the protection. Table 22. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC alarms WDM Rx user Tx user Rx ILOS ILOS (LOC)** WDM Tx (LOC)** SD of the WDM Tx shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board) and begining of the ALS_WDM procedure (if ALS enable) protection action consecutive action
LOC* (LOC)** CDR
for the bitrates managed by the CDR concerns the LOC alarms consecutive to the ILOS one in when the bitrate is managed by the
4.1.1.4.4.2 Slave board The user interfaces are not used and this board does not manage the protection. Table 23. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC alarms WDM Rx user Tx inhibited ILOS inhibited user Rx inhibited inhibited WDM Tx LOC* no action shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board) and begining of the ALS_WDM procedure (if ALS enable) transmission of the alarm to the master board (for protection control) consecutive action
LOC* (LOC)** CDR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 227 / 390
4.1.1.5 Loopback 4.1.1.5.1 Local loopback This configuration is used for tests only. backpanel connections MCC West
Rx Tx
MCC East
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 151. Local LoopBack The two adjacent board have an independant configuration (one can be in local loopback, the other one can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loopback mode). As this configuration is used for tests, the alarm management is controlled by the operator (he should look at all the alarms and activate or inhibit the ALS_WDM procedure).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 228 / 390
4.1.1.5.2 Remote loopback dropinsert This configuration is used for tests only.
backpanel connections MCC loopin

Rx Tx
MCC loopout
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 152. Remote LoopBack in ring application (backtoback or OADM) The two adjacent boards are linked and have a different configuration so that the operator must set the MCC to work in loopin or loopout mode. As this configuration is used for tests, the alarm management is controlled by the operator (he should look at all the alarms and activate or inhibit the ALS_WDM procedure). 4.1.1.5.3 User loopback This configuration is used for tests only. backpanel connections MCC West
Rx Tx
MCC East
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 153. User LoopBack
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 229 / 390
4.1.1.5.4 User loopback & passthrough This configuration is used for tests only. backpanel connections MCC loopin
Rx Tx
MCC loopout
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 154. User LoopBack & passthrough The two adjacent boards are linked and have a different configuration so that the operator must set the MCC to work in loopin or loopout mode. As this configuration is used for tests, the alarm management is controlled by the operator (he should look at all the alarms and activate or inhibit the ALS_WDM procedure).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 230 / 390
The two adjacent board have an independant configuration (one can be in local loopback, the other one can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loopback mode). As this configuration is used for tests, the alarm management is controlled by the operator (he should look at all the alarms and activate or inhibit the ALS_WDM procedure).
4.1.1.5.5 Remote loopback This configuration is used for tests only.

backpanel connections MCC West

Rx Tx
MCC East
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 155. Remote LoopBack in ring application (backtoback or OADM) The two adjacent board have an independant configuration (one can be in local loopback, the other one can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loopback mode). As this configuration is used for tests, the alarm management is controlled by the operator (he should look at all the alarms and activate or inhibit the ALS_WDM procedure).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 231 / 390
4.1.1.6 Protection management In Optical SNCP, if the master MCC (master for protection control) is in failure (Hardware failure, board absent,...), the selected path is automatically the protecting one. By this way, when the board in failure is retrieved, there is no impact on the traffic. At the creation of the protection function, the operator define one main and one spare channel. The switch criteria and ways of control are the followings: software locked protection on the main channel software forced selection of the spare channel ILOS at WDM Rx access on the current working channel and no alarm on the protecting one nor HardWare Failure on the board. The software forcing has the highest priority level. The manual switch has a lower priority level than the alarms on the signals. A clear function allows, via software, to reinitialize the protection board (clear all the switches commands), and a lockout of protection function gives the possibility to block the switch in the main position (whatever the status of the signals). The priority order for the switch criteria is the following (from the highest to the lowest): lockout of protection software forcing automatic switching Total switching time < 50 ms.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 232 / 390
4.1.2 Multirate Channel Card II (MCC2) 2.5 2.66 Gb/s backpanel electrical links
to/from corresponding to/from future matrix copy 0 transponder to/from future matrix copy 1
Client input
User Rx (optional)
8 x 8 MATRIX User Tx (optional) Client output
B1 non intrusive monitoring
OPL OOPV Optical Receiver VOA
WDM input
WDM Tx WDM Rx
WDM output
Alarm & Control unit
Figure 156. Block diagram of the MCC2 unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 233 / 390
4.1.2.1 Description The MCC2 transponder unit is a bidirectional multiclock interface. The blockdiagram is shown on Figure 156. All the signals are 3R. The board is configured for application with optical amplifiers. In the Craft Terminal, the operator can select bit rate by : selecting it in a list entering its exact value A Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA) is inserted after the WDM Tx. The operator monitors the VOA by choosing a VOA value. In addition to the optical interfaces (user Rx and Tx, WDM Rx and Tx), an electrical matrix, a B1 performance monitoring unit and an alarm and control unit are present on the board. The B1 performance monitoring unit enables the operator to achieve PM on B1 in a non intrusive way on SDH/SONET signals either at user Rx side, or at WDM Rx side (selection made by software provisioning). The electrical matrix gives some flexibility and additives features: drop / Insert with or without OpticalSNCP electrical passthrough internal (local) loopback line (remote) loopback line (remote) loopback dropinsert user loopback user loopback passthrough possibility to broadcast either the user or the WDM signal to the B1 monitoring unit
This matrix is managed by the craft terminal via the SPI interface and the alarm and control unit. The alarm and control unit ensures a few functions: matrix management interface Clock and Data Recovery (CDR) units management (bit rate selection, passthrough,... B1 device management alarms collection and interface to the craft terminal via the shelf controller Optical Channel protection control (configuration, switch decision unit) if opticalSNCP: user Tx ON/OFF control safety procedure management (ALS_WDM, ...) In OCh protection scheme, each transponder transfers its alarms information to the corresponding one (the transponder just beside) via parallel backpanel links in order that each one is able to select the unfailed signal. Each transponder unit is characterized by its particular Tx WDM wavelength (2 wavelengths are selectable so that one shall be chosen before being able to perform a mismatch). Two EEPROMs contain both the remote inventory data (construction date, code number, maker number, board identification...) and the set of channels the card support. These information are sent to the ESC board by means of the SPI bus. On the MCC, the set of channels are written on the card support.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 234 / 390
4.1.2.2 Optical characteristics See para. 5.3.1.1 on page 331.

4.1.2.3 Optical safety Alcatel recommends the customers to preset: the APSD enable mode for all the transponders in terminating nodes the APSD disable mode for all the transponders in regeneration.
Two types of alarms are available for optical safety / fault localization / protection criteria: LOC: Loss Of Clock. Alarm detected by the CDR modules, before Tx inputs for all bit rates between 100 Mbit/s and 2.66 Gbit/s. ILOS: Input Loss Of signal. Alarm detected by the Rx modules as a low power. Way of working 1st case : ILOS at user Rx input implies a consecutive LOC at WDM or user Tx input and the SD of the WDM Tx. LOC at WDM Tx input (signal coming either from the user Rx or the WDM Rx) implies the SD of the WDM Tx. ILOS at WDM Rx input implies the shutdown of the WDM Tx and the start of the ALS mechanism (if available & enable). A consecutive LOC will appear at user Tx input and this interface will be shutdown. To restart, the WDM Tx will send restart pulses. Shutdown time is defined to be less than (or equal to) 10 ms. LOC at user Tx input (signal coming from WDM world) implies shutdown of the user Tx laser and protection mechanism (if available). During the switch on and the switch off time, the output power remains between ITU 500 pm.
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 235 / 390
4.1.2.4 MCC2 configurations On the following schemes, are presented the two adjacent transponders and the transponder matrix configurations. The HF backpanel links shown in the following drawings are those between the slots 4&5, 6&7, 8&9, 10&11, 14&15, 16&17, 18&19, 20&21. 4.1.2.4.1 Default configuration By default, both optical transmitters are OFF, the 8x8 matrix has no connection. The board is on APSD disable state. After software configuration, the way of working will be one of the following. backpanel connections MCC West
Rx Tx
MCC East
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8 Matrix
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 157. MCC2 in default configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 236 / 390
4.1.2.4.2 Drop / Insert without optical channel protection The transponder can accept this configuration in terminals, backtoback terminals, and OADM nodes. The two adjacent boards have an independent configuration (one can be in dropinsert, the other one can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loopback mode). backpanel connections MCC West
Rx Tx
MCC East
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8 Matrix
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 158. Drop / Insert without OpticalSNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration)
Table 24. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC alarms WDM Rx user Tx user Rx ILOS ILOS (LOC)** WDM Tx (LOC)** ShutDown of the WDM Tx shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board) and beginning of the ALS_WDM procedure if ALS enable ShutDown of the user Tx activation of the protecting user Tx laser if protection activated shutdown of the user Tx laser activation of the protecting user Tx laser if protection activated shutdown of the WDM Tx laser consecutive action
LOC*
LOC* LOC* (LOC)**

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
for the bitrates managed by the CDR concerns the LOC alarms consecutive to the ILOS one. If WDM Tx is Forced ON, shutdown of the WDM Tx does not occur.
N.B.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 237 / 390
4.1.2.4.3 Drop / Insert with optical channel protection The transponder can accept this configuration in terminals, backtoback terminals, and OADM nodes. The two adjacent boards have the same matrix configuration and must be placed in the two adjacent slots 4&5, 6&7, 8&9, 10&11, 14&15, 16&17, 18&19 or 20&21 because of Low Frequency links used to pass information between them.
MCC West
Rx Rx
MCC East
WDM Tx
WDM Tx
8x8 Matrix
WDM Rx
8x8 Matrix
WDM Rx
Tx
Tx
Table 25. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC alarms WDM Rx user Tx user Rx ILOS ILOS (LOC)** WDM Tx (LOC)** ShutDown of the WDM Tx shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board) and beginning of the ALS_WDM procedure if ALS enable ShutDown of the user Tx activation of the protecting user Tx laser if protection activated shutdown of the user Tx laser activation of the protecting user Tx laser if protection activated shutdown of the WDM Tx laser consecutive action
LOC*
LOC*
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LOC* (LOC)**
for the bitrates managed by the CDR concerns the LOC alarms consecutive to the ILOS one.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 238 / 390
4.1.2.4.4 Electrical Passthrough (regeneration configuration) The MCC2 can accept this configuration in backtoback terminals or OADM nodes for flexibility and/or to enable a regeneration of the signal. The user interfaces are not used and this board do not manage the protection. The two adjacent boards have the same matrix configuration and must be placed in the two adjacent slots 4&5, 6&7, 8&9, 10&11, 14&15, 16&17, 18&19 or 20&21 because of Low Frequency links used to pass information between them. backpanel connections MCC West
Rx Tx
MCC East optional interfaces

WDM Rx
WDM Tx
8x8
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 160. Passthrough (regeneration configuration) Table 26. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC
alarms WDM Rx user Tx inhibited ILOS inhibited user Rx inhibited inhibited WDM Tx LOC* (LOC)* no action
consecutive action
shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board) and beginning of the ALS_WDM procedure (if ALS enable) ShutDown of the WDM Tx on the adjacent board
(LOC)* CDR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 239 / 390
4.1.2.4.4.1 Master board The board is refered to as master because its user interfaces are those used and it is this board that manages the protection. Table 27. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC
alarms WDM Rx user Tx user Rx ILOS ILOS (LOC)** WDM Tx (LOC)**
consecutive action
SD of the WDM Tx shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board) and begining of the ALS_WDM procedure (if ALS enable) protection action
LOC* (LOC)** CDR
4.1.2.4.4.2 Slave board The user interfaces are not used and this board does not manage the protection. Table 28. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC
alarms WDM Rx user Tx inhibited ILOS inhibited user Rx inhibited inhibited WDM Tx LOC* no action
consecutive action
shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board) and begining of the ALS_WDM procedure (if ALS enable) transmission of the alarm to the master board (for protection control)
LOC* (LOC)** CDR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 240 / 390
4.1.2.5 Loopback 4.1.2.5.1 Local loopback

This configuration is used for tests only. backpanel connections MCC West
Rx Tx
MCC East
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 161. Local LoopBack The two adjacent board have an independant configuration (one can be in local loopback, the other one can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loopback mode). As this configuration is used for tests, the alarm management is controlled by the operator (he should look at all the alarms and activate or inhibit the ALS_WDM procedure). 4.1.2.5.2 Remote loopback dropinsert This configuration is used for tests only. backpanel connections MCC loopin
Rx Tx
MCC loopout
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 162. Remote LoopBack in ring application (backtoback or OADM)
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 241 / 390
4.1.2.5.3 User loopback This configuration is used for tests only. backpanel connections MCC West
Rx Tx
MCC East
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 163. User LoopBack The two adjacent board have an independant configuration (one can be in local loopback, the other one can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loopback mode). As this configuration is used for tests, the alarm management is controlled by the operator (he should look at all the alarms and activate or inhibit the ALS_WDM procedure).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 242 / 390
The two adjacent boards are linked and have a different configuration so that the operator must set the MCC to work in loopin or loopout mode. As this configuration is used for tests, the alarm management is controlled by the operator (he should look at all the alarms and activate or inhibit the ALS_WDM procedure).
4.1.2.5.4 User loopback & passthrough This configuration is used for tests only.
backpanel connections MCC loopin

Rx Tx
MCC loopout
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 164. User LoopBack & passthrough The two adjacent boards are linked and have a different configuration so that the operator must set the MCC to work in loopin or loopout mode. As this configuration is used for tests, the alarm management is controlled by the operator (he should look at all the alarms and activate or inhibit the ALS_WDM procedure).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 243 / 390
4.1.2.5.5 Remote loopback This configuration is used for tests only. backpanel connections MCC West
Rx Tx All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
MCC East
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 165. Remote LoopBack in ring application (backtoback or OADM) The two adjacent board have an independant configuration (one can be in local loopback, the other one can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loopback mode). As this configuration is used for tests, the alarm management is controlled by the operator (he should look at all the alarms and activate or inhibit the ALS_WDM procedure).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 244 / 390
4.1.2.6 Laser and VOA status The next table gives the default state of the lasers and VOA according to the configuration of the MCC3. The default configuration is APSD_Disable. Table 29. MCC2 default Lasers and VOA states MCC3 configuration Plugged not declared Declared but no crossconnection Crossconn declared but no signal Crossconnection + signal 4.1.2.7 Protection management In Optical SNCP, if the master MCC (master for protection control) is in failure (Hardware failure, Card absent,...), the selected path is automatically the protecting one. By this way, when the board in failure is retrieved, there is no impact on the traffic. At the creation of the protection function, the operator defines one main and one spare channel. The switch criteria and ways of control are the followings: software locked protection on main channel software forced selection of spare channel ILOS (on WDM Rx) or LOC (on user Tx for the available bitrates) on the current working channel and no alarm on the protecting one software manual selection of spare channel (forced selection only if no degradation of this spare signal) The software forcing is highest priority. The manual switch is less priority than the alarms on the signals. The priority order for the switch criteria is the following (from the highest to the lowest): lockout of protection software forcing automatic switching When a software command (lockout or software forcing) is released (clear function), the switch remains in its current position to avoid the useless switches. Total switching time < 50 ms. WDM Tx laser OFF OFF OFF VOA WDM Tx 20 dB 20 dB 20 dB User Tx laser OFF OFF OFF according to configuration
according to configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 245 / 390
4.1.3 Multirate Channel Card III (MCC3) 2.5 2.66 Gb/s backpanel electrical links Client Client input output STM1, STM4, STM16, GBE, FC, CWDM SFP module
USER Rx
FPGA
WDM input
WDM Rx
2x2
USER Tx
WDM output
VOA WDM Tx
2x2
Pin amp OOPV to/from adjacent board
Alarm & Control Unit
N.B.
links from Control Unit to components have been greyed for clarity)
Figure 166. Block diagram of the MCC3 unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 246 / 390
4.1.3.1 Description The MCC3 transponder unit is a bidirectional multiclock interface. The blockdiagram is shown in Figure 166. All the signals are 3R. The board is configured for application with optical amplifiers. MCC3 is built on the model of the MCC2 board. It is a MCC2 with a SFP Pluggable module in place of RxTx USER Interface. This feature permits to have S16.1, I16.1, CWDM ... type optical interfaces. It also enables to have Bitrate specific optical Interfaces (Gigabit Ethernet, ...). Small Formfactor Pluggable modules are optical transceivers enabling the building of a transponder board with a client oriented User Interface. The following SFP modules are supported by the MCC3 board (the complete list is shown in Table 8. on page 76 and in Figure 47. on page 118): CWDM Silver/Bronze: 8 CWDM colored modules with APD detector (bitrates = 125 Mb/s B 2.7 Gb/s) I16.1 / S16.1 / : STM16 Interoffice reach / Short reach at 1310 nm MS16.1: S16.1 multirate up to 2.66Gb/s at 1310 nm S4.1 / S1.1: STM4 / STM1 short reach at 1310 nm GbESX / GbeLX: Gigabit Ethernet at 850 nm / 1310 nm 2FC / FCS / FCL: 2 Fiber Channel (2.125 GHz) / Fiber Channel at 850 nm / 1310 nm In the Craft Terminal, the operator can select the bit rate by selecting it in a list entering its exact value Concerning WDM optics, the MCC3 board is equipped with a 3200 ps/nm WDM Tx. The WDM Rx supports 19 dB OSNR at EOL. A Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA) is inserted after the WDM Tx. The operator monitors the VOA by choosing a VOA value. In addition to the optical interfaces an electrical matrix, an alarm and control unit and a FPGA devoted to B1based performance monitoring and G.709 optical layer management are present on the board. The FPGA / PM block enables the operator to achieve PM based on B1 in a non intrusive way on SDH/SONET signals either at user Rx side, or at WDM Rx side (selection made by software provisioning). User signal is monitored after the 8x8 electrical matrix whereas the line signal is monitored before the matrix. The electrical matrix gives some flexibility and additives features: Drop / Insert with or without OpticalSNCP Electrical passthrough internal (local) loopback line (remote) loopback line (remote) loopback dropinsert user loopback user loopback passthrough possibility to broadcast either the user or the WDM signal to the B1 monitoring unit
This matrix is managed by the craft terminal via the SPI interface and the alarm and control unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 247 / 390
In OCh protection scheme, each transponder transfers its alarms information to the corresponding one (the transponder just beside) via parallel backpanel links in order that each one is able to select the unfailed signal. Each transponder unit is characterized by its particular Tx WDM wavelength (2 wavelengths are selectable so that one shall be chosen before being able to perform a mismatch). Two EEPROMs contain both the remote inventory data (construction date, code number, maker number, board identification...) and the set of channels the card support. These information are sent to the ESC board by means of the SPI bus. On the MCC, the set of channels are written on the card support. 4.1.3.2 Optical characteristics See para. 5.3.1.1 on page 331. 4.1.3.3 Optical safety Alcatel recommends the customers to preset: the APSD enable mode for all the transponders in terminating nodes the APSD disable mode for all the transponders in regeneration.
Two types of alarms are available for optical safety / fault localization / protection criteria: LOC: Loss Of Clock. Alarm detected by the CDR modules, before Tx inputs for all bit rates between 100 Mbit/s and 2.66 Gbit/s. ILOS: Input Loss Of signal. Alarm detected by the Rx modules as a low power. Way of working 1st case : ILOS at user Rx input implies a consecutive LOC at WDM or user Tx input and the SD of the WDM Tx. LOC at WDM Tx input (signal coming either from the user Rx or the WDM Rx) implies the SD of the WDM Tx. ILOS at WDM Rx input implies the shutdown of the WDM Tx and the start of the ALS mechanism (if available & enable). A consecutive LOC will appear at user Tx input and this interface will be shutdown. To restart, the WDM Tx will send restart pulses. Shutdown time is defined to be less than (or equal to) 10 ms. LOC at user Tx input (signal coming from WDM world) implies shutdown of the user Tx laser and protection mechanism (if available). During the switch on and the switch off time, the output power remains between ITU 500 pm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 248 / 390
The alarm and control unit ensures a few functions: matrix management interface Clock and Data Recovery (CDR) units management (bit rate selection, passthrough,... B1 device management alarms collection and interface to the craft terminal via the shelf controller Optical Channel protection control (configuration, switch decision unit) if opticalSNCP: user Tx ON/OFF control safety procedure management (ALS_WDM, ...)
4.1.3.4 MCC3 configurations Refer to para. 4.1.2.4 on page 236

4.1.3.4.1 Default configuration (no crossconnection) Refer to para. 4.1.2.4.1 on page 236. 4.1.3.4.2 Drop / Insert (with and without optical channel protection) Refer to para 4.1.2.4.2 on page 237 and para. 4.1.2.4.3 on page 238. 4.1.3.4.3 Electrical passthrough, with/without SPF client interface (regeneration config) Refer to para 4.1.2.4.4 on page 239. When two transponders are configured in passthrough, there is no need of User Interfaces, hence the user interface (SFP modules) in MCC3 can be equipped or not. In case it is not equipped, neither alarms nor measurements should be shown to the operator. 4.1.3.4.4 Loopbacks Refer to para. 4.1.2.5 on page 241 where are described the following loopbacks: local loopback remote loopback and drop/insert user loopback user loopback and passthrough remote loopback.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 249 / 390
4.1.3.5 Laser and VOA status Refer to para. 4.1.2.6 on page 245. 4.1.3.6 Protection management In Optical SNCP, if the master MCC (master for protection control) is in failure (Hardware failure, Card absent,...), the selected path is automatically the protecting one. By this way, when the board in failure is retrieved, there is no impact on the traffic. At the creation of the protection function, the operator defines one main and one spare channel. The switch criteria and ways of control are the followings: software locked protection on main channel software forced selection of spare channel ILOS (on WDM Rx) or LOC (on user Tx for the available bitrates) on the current working channel and no alarm on the protecting one software manual selection of spare channel (forced selection only if no degradation of this spare signal) SFP removed (missing) The software forcing is highest priority. The manual switch is less priority than the alarms on the signals. The priority order for the switch criteria is the following (from the highest to the lowest): lockout of protection software forcing automatic switching When a software command (lockout or software forcing) is released (clear function), the switch remains in its current position to avoid the useless switches. Total switching time < 50 ms.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 250 / 390
4.1.4 MCC_RGN The MCC_RGN board is the same physical board as the MCC2 one without the client optical interfaces (no B&W optics). It is used in pair in passthrough mode only to form a regenerator. It is managed on the Q3 interface as a MCC2 and provides the same features (refer to para. 4.1.2), except for the client interfaces. Due to the missing client optical interfaces, no adddrop configuration is possible, no user nor local loopbacks, no protection... This board is a legacy card strictly dedicated to passthrough configurations. The same functionality is provided with two MCC3 without SFP client interfaces and used in passthrough configuration. When the passthrough configuration is required, MCC3 should be used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 251 / 390
4.1.5 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card (OCC10) Client input
Client
9.95328 Gbps 10.3125 Gbps
Client output
User Rx
User Tx
CDR to/from front panel connectors
CDR
10 Gbps input 10 Gbps output
8 x 8 MATRIX
to/from Matrix 1
G.709, FEC, PM
some functionalities can be shortcut
G.709, FEC, PM
WDM Tx
WDM Rx Photodiode
VOA Photodiode 10.709 Gbps 11.096 Gbps WDM output

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
VOA
WDM
WDM input
Figure 167. OCC10 unit block diagram
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 252 / 390
Back panel
4.1.5.1 Description The OCC10 unit transponder is a bidirectional multiclock interface for 10 Gbps native signals. It is hardware compliant with ITUT G.709 Rec. This transponder can be provisioned to accept any digital signal at the nominal bit rate of 9.953 Gbps (STM64/OC192/10 GBE WAN) 10.3125 (GBE LAN). All the signals are 3R. The board is configured for application with optical amplifiers. Two Variable Optical Attenuators (VOAs) are present on the board: one is inserted after the WDM Tx and the other one is placed before the WDM Rx in order to maintain the power constant at the Rx input. By O.S. (CT, 1353SH) the operator can set (and monitor) the WDM Tx VOA value. In addition to the optical interfaces (user Rx and Tx, WDM Rx and Tx), an electrical matrix and an alarm and control unit are present on the board. The B1 performance monitoring unit enables the operator to achieve PM on B1 in a non intrusive way on SDH/SONET signals at user Rx side and at WDM Rx side simultaneously. The electrical matrix is managed by the craft terminal via the SPI bus and the Alarm and control unit; it gives some flexibility and additives features: drop / Insert with or without OpticalSNCP electrical passthrough internal (local) loopback line (remote) loopback line (remote) loopback dropinsert user loopback user loopback passthrough possibility to broadcast either the user or the WDM signal to the B1 monitoring unit The alarm and control unit performs the following functions: matrix management interface Clock and Data recovery (CDR) units management (bit rate selection, passthrough..) alarms collection and interface to the craft terminal via the shelf controller optical channel protection control (configuration, switch decision unit) if Optical SNCP: user Tx ON/OFF control safety procedure management (ALS). In OCh protection scheme, each transponder transfers its alarms information to the corresponding one (the transponder just beside) via parallel backpanel links in order that each one is able to select the unfailed signal. Each transponder unit is characterized by its particular Tx WDM wavelength. The channel/wavelength is written on the card support. The card mismatch is managed via information (ECID) contained in an EEPROM present on the board. The Remote Inventory of the module is available via the SPI bus. The EEPROM containing specific data of the board is accessed via the SPI bus. The O/E/O regeneration for OCC10 is supported by connecting the client interfaces (general). Mandatory with a 2.5 Gbps backpanel supported via 10 Gbps backpanel links (requires 3AL96270AA CO shelf). On the front panel of the OCC10 are located four electrical connectors allowing passthrough configuration even with back panel not 10 Gbps compatible (for future rel.).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 253 / 390
4.1.5.2 OCC10 optical characteristics See para. 5.3.1.2 on page 333. 4.1.5.3 Optical safety In case of upstream error (fiber break, transponder failure,...) a mechanism that enables to propagate a kind of FDI along the trail is proposed (allowing for optical safety / fault localization / protection criteria): LOC: Loss Of Clock. Alarm detected by the CDR modules, before Tx inputs for the 9953.28 Gbps bit rate. LOS: Loss Of Signal. Alarm detected by the Rx modules as a low power. generic AIS detection. If the protection is activated, only the shutdown mode is authorized. This mechanism is independant from safety procedure. The next table sums up different OCC10 behaviour according to safety + LOS + LOC + generic AIS propagation command. Table 30. OCC10 Shut down mode Behaviour Alarm LOS on User Rx APSD disable a) b) Line Terminal Add & Drop in OADM or backtoback APSD disable forced ON node LOS on WDM Rx LOC on User Tx LOC on WDM Tx LOS on WDM Rx LOC on User Tx SD of WDM Tx SD of User Tx SD of User Tx SD of WDM Tx WDM Tx always ON SD of User Tx SD of User Tx WDM Tx always OFF APSD disable LOS on WDM Rx forced OFF LOC on User Tx SD of User Tx SD of User Tx Consecutive action
Node Type
OCC10 state APSD enable
Example of way of working for ADD & DROP with APSD Disable: ILOS at user Rx input implies the SD of WDM Tx LOC at WDM Tx input (signal coming either from user Rx or WDM Rx) implies SD of WDM Tx ILOS at WDM Rx input implies the shutdown of the WDM Tx and the start of the ALS mechanism (if available & enable). A consecutive LOC will appear at user Tx input and this interface will be shutdown. To restart, the WDM Tx will send restart pulses. Shutdown time is defined to be less than (or equal to) 5 ms. LOC at user Tx input (signal coming from WDM world) implies shutdown of the user Tx laser and protection mechanism (if available). During the switch on and the switch off time, the output power remains between ITU 500 pm.
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 254 / 390
4.1.5.4 OCC10 configurations On the following schemes, are presented the two adjacent transponders and the transponder matrix configurations. The HF backpanel links shown in the following drawings are those between the slots 4&5, 6&7, 8&9, 10&11, 14&15, 16&17, 18&19, 20&21. Table 31. OCC10 configurations
Configuration type Client bit rate (Gbps) Dropinsert Optical SNCP Passthrough Remote loopback passthrough (IN and OUT) Remote loopback drop/insert Remote loopback Local loopback User loopback
UNI 9.95328 / 10.3125 YES YES Not Applicable Not Applicable YES Not Applicable YES YES
NNI 10.709 / 11.096 Future rel. Future rel. YES YES Future rel. YES Future rel. Future rel.
In the following tables the alarms which are not shown or not applicable are alarms with potentially consequent actions but not displayed to the craft user. Notice that _User is used for B&W link or back panel link. The switch criteria are described in the protection para. 3.1.9 on page 169.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 255 / 390
4.1.5.4.1 Default configuration By default, both optical transmitters are OFF, the 8x8 matrix has no connection. After software configuration, the way of working will be one of the following. 4.1.5.4.2 Drop / Insert without optical channel protection The transponder can accept this configuration in terminals, backtoback terminals, and OADM nodes. The two adjacent boards have an independent configuration (one can be in dropinsert, the other one can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loopback mode). backpanel connections OCC10 West
Rx Tx
OCC10 East
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8 Matrix
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 168. Drop / Insert without OpticalSNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration) For User to Network Interface (UNI) both ODU and OTU are terminated at the WDM interfaces.
9953.28 Gbps ODU OTU

FEC ODU OTU WDM O/E DEFEC OTU B&W O/E B&W O/E
10.709 Gbps
DEFEC ODU OTU WDM O/E FEC OTU
8x8 Matrix
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 169. Dropinsert (UNI)
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 256 / 390
4.1.5.4.3 Drop / Insert with optical channel protection The transponder can accept this configuration in terminals, backtoback terminals, and OADM nodes. The two adjacent boards have the same matrix configuration and must be placed in the two adjacent slots 4&5, 6&7, 8&9, 10&11, 14&15, 16&17, 18&19 or 20&21 because of Low Frequency links used to pass information between them.
OCC10 West
Rx Rx
OCC10 East
WDM Tx
WDM Tx
8x8 Matrix
WDM Rx
8x8 Matrix
WDM Rx
Tx
Tx
4.1.5.4.4 Electrical passthrough The transponder can accept this configuration in backtoback terminals or OADM nodes for flexibility and/or to enable a regeneration of the signal. The user interfaces are not used and this board do not manage the protection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 257 / 390
front panel (future rel.) OCC10 West

Rx Tx
OCC10 East
WDM Tx
OR 8x8 10 Gbps backpanel
OR 8x8 OR
Rx
WDM Rx
WDM Rx
OR
Tx
WDM Tx
front panel (future rel.) Figure 171. Passthrough (NNI) For the regeneration configuration, OTU is terminated at the WDM interfaces and ODU is bypassed. A dummy OTU is sent through the matrix
ODU OTU Dummy OTU

Front Panel (future rel.)
FEC ODU OTU WDM O/E DEFEC OTU DEFEC OTU FEC ODU OTU WDM O/E
OTU
OR 8x8 Matrix 10 Gbps BP
OR 8x8 Matrix
10.709 Gbps
DEFEC ODU OTU WDM O/E FEC OTU
10.709 Gbps
FEC OTU DEFEC ODU OTU WDM O/E
OR
OR
Board 1
Front Panel (future rel.)
Board 2
Figure 172. Regeneration (two passthrough linked by 10G backpanel) The Dummy OTU does not correspond to a real transmission section: it is used to monitor the matrices connections.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 258 / 390
4.1.5.4.5 Remote loopback When the board is configured in loopback the RXA and TXA LEDs, located on its front plate, are always turned OFF. 4.1.5.4.5.1 Passthrough remote loopback This configuration is used for tests only. OCC10 West
Rx Tx
OCC10 East
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Rx
10 Gbps backpanel
8x8 OR
Rx WDM Tx
OR
Tx
front panel (future rel.) Table 32. Remote LoopBack passthrough (NNI) in ring application (backtoback or OADM) The two adjacent boards are linked and have a different configuration so that the operator must set the OCC10 to work in loopin or loopout mode.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 259 / 390
4.1.5.4.5.2 Dropinsert remote loopback backpanel connections
Rx
Tx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 173. Dropinsert remote loopback (UNI) in ring application (backtoback or OADM) This configuration is used for tests only. The two adjacent boards have an independent configuration (one can be in loopback, the other one can be unequipped, in dropinsert configuration or in local loopback mode). 4.1.5.4.5.3 Remote loopback backpanel connections
Tx
OCC10 West
Rx
OCC10 East
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Table 33. Remote loopback (NNI) in ring application (backtoback or OADM) This configuration is used for tests only. The two adjacent boards have an independent configuration (one can be in loopback, the other one can be unequipped, in dropinsert configuration or in local loopback mode).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 260 / 390
OCC10 West
OCC10 East
4.1.5.4.6 Local loopback 4.1.5.4.6.1 Local loopback

OCC10 West
Rx
backpanel connections
Tx
OCC10 East
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 174. Local LoopBack (UNI) This configuration is used for tests only. The two adjacent boards have an independent configuration (one can be in local loopback, the other one can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loopback mode). 4.1.5.4.7 User loopback (UNI): foreseen for Hardware and Software. backpanel connections OCC10 West
Rx Tx
OCC10 East
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 175. User LoopBack (UNI) This configuration is used for tests only. The two adjacent boards have an independent configuration (one can be in local loopback, the other one can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loop back mode).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 261 / 390
4.1.5.5 Laser and VOA status The next table gives the default state of the lasers and VOA according to the configuration of the OCC10. The default configuration is APSD_Disable and LOS_mode_SD. Table 34. OCC10 default Lasers and VOA states OCC10 configuration Plugged not declared Declared but no crossconnection Crossconn declared but no signal Crossconnection + signal 4.1.5.6 Protection management In Optical SNCP, as for MCC, if the master OCC (master for protection control) is in failure (Hardware failure, Card absent,...), the selected path is automatically the protecting one. By this way, when the board in failure is retrieved, there is no impact on the traffic. At the creation of the protection function, the operator defines one main and one spare channel. The switch criteria and ways of control are the followings: software locked protection on main channel software forced selection of spare channel ILOS (on WDM Rx) or LOC (on user Tx) on the current working channel and no alarm on the protecting one software manual selection of spare channel (forced selection only if no degradation of this spare signal) The software lockout of protection is the highest priority. The priority order for the switch criteria is the following (from the highest to the lowest): lockout of protection software forcing automatic switching When a software command (lockout or software forcing) is released (clear function), the switch remains in its current position to avoid useless switches. Total switching time < 50 ms. An example of optical protection is given in Figure 170. on page 257. WDM Tx laser OFF OFF OFF VOA WDM Tx 20 dB 20 dB 20 dB User Tx laser OFF OFF OFF according to configuration
according to configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 262 / 390
4.1.6 4xANY, 4xANY_S and 4xANY_P cards 4.1.6.1 Description

TDM concentrators are able to multiplex in the time domain up to 4 low bitrate (client) signals into a 2.5 Gbps B&W WDM signal. The multiplexed client signals are listed below: 4 x Fast Ethernet 4 x FDDI 4 x ESCON 4 x Digital Video 4 x STM1 3 x STM4 2 x Gigabit Ethernet 2 x Fiber Channel or FICON some mixes are also possible: 3 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x STM4 2 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 2 x STM4 2 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x (FC or GbEth or FICON) 1 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x STM4 +1 x (FC or GbEth or FICON) 2 x (FC or GbEth or FICON). The following type of boards are provided: the 4xANY board with an I16.1 optical port for the 2.5 Gbit/s, is available from release 1.1. It allows to cover a 2 Km distance approx the 4xANY_S board with a S16.1 optical port for the 2.5 Gbit/s, is available from release 1.3. It allows to cover a 15 Km distance approx. This functionality enables to use a 4XANY board without the need of a transponder to have the necessary optical budget to launch the 1310 nm signal on the fiber. It is then possible to use a 4XANY_S board alone in a 1696MS_C (for example) thus emitting only one 1310 nm wavelength. the 4xANY_P board with a pluggable 2.5 Gbit/s optical module, hosting a I16.1 B&W or S16.1 B&W or CWDM (Bronze/Silver) transceiver (transmitter + receiver) has been introduced in R.2.0. The transceiver is included into a SFP module. The CWDM wavelenght range is 1470 B 1610 nm and only one wavelength per module is accessible.
The architecture of the TDM concentrator board is based on the concept of virtual concatenation, and on the mapping of SDH on OTN: the data traffic is packet into VC4 structures virtually concatenated. Virtually concatenated means that any VC4 can follow an indpendent path crossing any SDH/SONET network (included legacy ADM). Each VC4 is then concatenated again in the remote 4xANY. the VC4s are groomed into a STM16 structure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 263 / 390
In Figure 176. on page 265 is shown the block diagram. The board is divided into: one mother board one daughter board 1 to 4 (client) drawers plugged on the mother or daughter board (2 on each one). a 1310 nm B&W transceiver for 4xAny and 4xANY_S a 1310 nm B&W or CWDM pluggable transceiver for 4xANY_P only. The board consists essentially in: 4 slots for bidirectional client optical interfaces One 2.5 Gbit/s transceiver The 4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P unit interfaces with the MCC board via the 2.5 Gbit/s transceiver. Receivers and transmitters can be locked either on the received clock or the local clock: Default configuration : Tx locked to local clock and Rx locked to the received clock. Loopback configuration. LoopBack and Continue managed. From R.2.2 the B1 performance monitoring is enabled consisting in monitoring the B1 byte of the aggregate signal received (WDM Rx). It is also provided the 4xANY 1+1 protection consisting in protecting each client individually.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 264 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
to/from corresponding transponder 2.5 Gb/s
STM16 mapper
STM16 Regenerator

2 Rx Rx Tx drawer #1 drawer #3 CONCENTRATOR Tx Tx Tx Rx Rx drawer #4 drawer #2 CDR CDR CDR CDR Alarm & Control unit E/O Rx Tx
Client signal
Client signal
Client signal
Client signal
Card presence
ED
01
Figure 176. 4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P block diagram
3AL 95278 AA AA
390 SFP pluggable module for 4xANY_P
STM16
265 / 390
Configuration Client side, three different kinds of drawers are provided: high frequency 1310 nm optical interfaces drawers (Gigabit Ethernet, Fiber Channel), which can be plugged only on the ports #3 et #4 (HF_1310_DRAWER). STM1/4 drawers, which can be plugged on any slots. But, STM_4 Bit rate can only be set for ports #3 and #4 (SDHSONET_1310_DRAWER). Particular Case: For the 3 x STM4 configuration, the slot #1 is exceptionnally occupied by a STM4 bit rate. Low frequency drawers (Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, Digital Video) with 1310 nm optical interfaces, which can be plugged in any slots (LF_1310_DRAWER). Low frequency drawers equipped with 1310 nm detector and laser. The optical interfaces are have better jitter figures. The rules followed for the position of these drawers are only imposed by the low frequency nature of the drawer (LF_1310_2_DRAWER). High frequency drawers equipped with 850 nm detector and laser. The rules followed for the position of these drawers are only imposed by the high frequency nature of the drawer (HF_850_DRAWER). Low frequency drawers equipped with 850 nm detector and laser. The rules followed for the position of these drawers are only imposed by the low frequency nature of the drawer (LF_850_DRAWER). Furthermore, a limited number of configurations of drawers can be provided. Rules must be followed : If High Frequency drawer in ports #3, the port #1 must be non provisioned If High Frequency drawer in ports #4, the port #2 must be non provisioned
The following table lists the allowed configurations. Table 35. Allowed drawers association Drawer #1 Not provisioned Low Frequency / STM1 Drawer #3 High Frequency Drawer #2 Not provisioned Drawer #4 High Frequency Low Frequency / STM1 / STM4 Low Frequency / STM1 / STM4
Low Frequency / STM1 Low Frequency / STM1 / STM4 High Frequency / Low Low Frequency / STM1 Frequency / STM1 / STM4 Low Frequency / STM1 Not provisioned / STM4
Not provisioned
Low Frequency / STM1
High Frequency / Low Frequency / STM1 / STM4 STM4
STM4
STM4
Not provisioned
Any couple (DRW#1 ; DRW#3) can be associated to any couple (DRW#2 ; DRW#4) except for the last line (3 x STM4 configuration is fixed for the 4 drawers). 4.1.6.2 Optical characteristics
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
See para. 5.3.1.4 on page 336.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 266 / 390
4.1.7 Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP) optical modules The SFP optical modules are the optical physical access for the client (B&W) side of the MCC3 aggregate (STM16) side of the 4xANY_P. Various type of optical modules are used (also refer to Table 8. on page 76) Silver (APD) and Bronze (PIN) CWDM STM1 SFP : S1.1, FE, FDDI, 100BaseLX STM1 SFP L1.1 and L1.2 STM4 SFP : S4.1, ESCON STM4 SFP L4.1 and L4.2 1.25GBE SFP : Gbe1000LX/LH, 1 FiberChannel 1300nm stop gap 1.25GBE SFP : Gbe 1000 SX, 1 Fiber Channel 850 nm stop gap 1.25GBE SFP Gbe 1000 ZX SFP 1FC, 2FC 850 / 1310 nm STM16 SFP : S16.1, 2FC stop gap STM16 SFP I16.1 STM16 SFP S16.1 multirate/multiformat STM16 SFP L16.1 and L16.2. Each module contains on transmitter side an automatic optical output power control circuit, a laser driver and a laser diode module. The transmitter is based on an uncooled DFB laser. The laser safety class for the complete integrated module is CLASS 1 according to IEC 60825 2001 Edition. It can manage command for TX disable and provides TX Fault alarm. Depending on the SFP type, the optical access is compatible with a single mode fiber (9/125 m) or multi mode fiber (50/125 m or 9/125 m) with standard LC optical connector. TX Fault indicates a laser fault of some kind. The Transmitter is not disabled when TX Fault signal is active. Tx Disable is an input that is used to shut down the transmitter optical output. On receiver side each module contains a PIN or APD photodetector for light to electrical current conversion and a limiting amplifier. The photo detected current is amplified by a an electrical circuit which delivers two complementary data signals. The module provides LOS alarm (Loss of input Power Signal alarm). This output signal indicates the received optical power is below the worstcase receiver sensitivity (as defined by the standard in use). Depending on the SFP type, the optical access is compatible with a single mode fiber (9/125 m) or multi mode fiber (50/125 m or 9/125 m) with standard LC optical connector. The Transceiver has an EEPROM inside to provide Remote Inventory, containing information about transceivers capabilities, standard interfaces, manufacturer, and others. The serial interface uses the 2wire serial CMOS EEPROM protocol defined for the ATMEL AT24C01A/02/04 family of components. Digital diagnostic monitoring (DDM) of analog parameters is supported.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 267 / 390
To board (MCC3 or 4xANY_P) processing TRANSMITTER
to/from MCC3 client or 4xANY_P client

LC PIN Laser diode Optical output
DATA+
Electrical DATA
DATA
LASER DRIVER
APC
TX Fault
TX Disable
EEPROM
P RECEIVER
Remote Inventory / DDM
DATA+
LC Main Amplifier PRE PIN* Optical input
Electrical DATA
DATA
LOS
SFP Optical Module
* PIN or APD, according to the SFP type Figure 177. SFP modules general block diagram (with PIN photodetector)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 268 / 390
4.1.8 Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC) 4.1.8.1 Description

The board contains 2 x VOAs (Variable Optical Attenuators). It can be located between the demux and the mux of an OADM / OMDX. A VOA can be placed between the two stages of an amplifier, too. Purpose of MVAC is to manually adjust the channel emphasis in order to optimize the transmission. Coupled with the OSMC board it allows an automatic emphasis (automatic power adjustment).
From: OADM/OMDX demux 1st stage OAC
In1 In2 VOAs Photodiodes Alarm & Control Unit
To: OADM/OMDX mux a MCC 2st stage OAC
Out1 Out2
Front panel PC Electrical interface
PC Electrical Link
Figure 178. MVAC unit block diagram In Figure 179. on page 270, some examples of system configuration is given, where MVAC is connected: between demux and mux of a multiplexer card (OADM/OMDX) at the input of a MCC2 (dropped channel) between the first and the second stage of the optical amplifier(s).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MVAC Can be used for any type of equipment connections: looped/expansion/extra/external channel. 4.1.8.2 MVAC optical characteristics See para. 5.3.1.5 on page 343.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 269 / 390
Card presence
Bundle passthrough In1 Out2 1 MVAC 2 Out1 In2

In1 Out2
1 MVAC 2
Out1 In2
Single Channel In1
MUX
Out2
1 MVAC 2
Out1
MUX
In2
In1
VOA in MVAC 1 MVAC
In2
Post Emphasis
VOA in MCC2 MCC2 MCC2
Out1
Out2
EXTERNAL SIGNAL
In1 MVAC Out2
1 2
Out1 In2
M U X
1st stage
2nd stage
VOA in OAC
In1 Out2
Optical Amplifier 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1 MVAC 2
Out1 In2
Optical Amplifier 2
VOA in OAC
2nd stage
1st stage
Figure 179. Example of MVAC location in the system
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 270 / 390
4.2 Multiplexers
4.2.1
OMDX unit
The following Mux/Demux (OMDX) boards are used the Mux/Demux with the LB/SB combiner/splitter and the SPV couplers : OMDX8100_M_L1_XS the Mux/Demux with the LB/SB combiner/splitter : OMDX8100_M_L1_X the upgrade Mux/Demux: OMDX8100_M_L2 , OMDX8100_M_S1 and OMDX8100_M_S2 4.2.1.1 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS SPV Tx in OPL OOPV Extra Tx in ch 30 ch 31 ch 32 WDM ch 33 Tx in ch 35 ch 36 ch 37 ch 38 SB Tx in SB Rx out ch 30 ch 31 ch 32 Line Rx in WDM 1:9 ch 33 WDM ch 35 Rx out ch 36 ch 37 ch 38 Extra Rx out Monitor Rx out Optical Receiver IPL IOPV SPV Rx out WDM 9:1 LB/SB combiner Optical Receiver Monitor Tx out
MUX
Line Tx out
DEMUX LB/SB
splitter
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
Monitoring Access: Optical power level at monitoring access is around 20 dB less the mean optical power of the line. Figure 180. OMDX8100_M_L1_XS: block diagram
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 271 / 390
4.2.1.1.1 Description a ) MUX side The wavelength multiplexer component collects the 8 optical signals (corresponding to the first part of the Long Band) and the signal coming from the extrainput (multiplexed signal corresponding to the second part of the Long Band) and multiplexes them into one optical signal. The following LB/SB combiner multiplexes the Long Band and the Short Band. b ) DEMUX side At the receive side, a coupler is used to monitor the input signal (power presence and monitoring connector). Then, a WDM coupler is used to extract the supervisory channel. Then, the Long Band and the Short Band are separated via the LB/SB splitter. The long Band signal is demultiplexed into 8 channels plus one that corresponds to the multiplexed 8 other channels of the LB. 4.2.1.2 Optical characteristics See para. 5.3.2.1 on page 344.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 272 / 390
4.2.1.3 OMDX8100_M_L1_X OPL OOPV Optical Receiver Extra Tx in Monitor Tx out
ch 30 ch 31 ch 32 WDM Tx in ch 33 ch 35 ch 36 ch 37 ch 38 SB Tx in SB Rx out ch 30 ch 31 ch 32 WDM 9:1 LB/SB combiner
MUX
Line Tx out
SPV filter Line Rx in WDM 1:9
DEMUX LB/SB
splitter
ch 33 WDM ch 35 Rx out ch 36 ch 37 ch 38 Extra Rx out
Monitor Rx out Optical Receiver IPL IOPV
Figure 181. OMDX8100_M_L1_X: block diagram 4.2.1.3.1 Description a ) MUX side The wavelength multiplexer component collects the 8 optical signals (corresponding to the first part of the Long Band) and the signal coming from the extrainput (multiplexed signal corresponding to the second part of the Long Band) and multiplexes them into one optical signal. The following LB/SB combiner multiplexes the Long Band and the Short Band.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
b ) DEMUX side At the receive side, the Long Band and the Short Band are separated via the LB/SB splitter. The long band signal is demultiplexed into 8 channels plus one that corresponds to the multiplexed 8 other LB channels. The optical characteristics are described in para. 5.3.2 on page 344.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 273 / 390
4.2.1.4 OMDX8100_M_L2 , OMDX8100_M_S1 , OMDX8100_M_S2
L2 ch 20 ch 21 ch 22 ch 23 ch 25 ch 26 ch 27 ch 28 OR
S2 42 43 44 45 47 48 49 50
S1 52 53 54 55 57 58 59 60
OR
MUX
Line Tx out
Extra Tx in
WDM Rx out
L2 ch 20 ch 21 ch 22 Line Rx in S2 42 43 44 45 47 48 49 50 S1 52 53 54 55 57 58 59 60
DEMUX
ch 23 ch 25 ch 26 ch 27 ch 28
OR
OR
Extra Rx out
Figure 182. OMDX8100_M_L2 , OMDX8100_M_S1 , OMDX8100_M_S2 : block diagram 4.2.1.4.1 Description MUX side The wavelength multiplexer component collects the 8 optical signals and the signal coming form the extra input and multiplexes them into one optical signal, ready to be launched on the WDM line. DEMUX side The wavelength demultiplexer component receives the WDM line signal and demultiplexes it into 8 channel plus one possible extra aggregate signal. OADM application Connecting the Extra Rx out access to the Extra Rx in access allows to passthrough the channels that are not dropped and added. The board works in OADM configuration. These boards are supplied in power by the PSC. The optical characteristics are described in para. 5.3.2.2 on page 346.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 274 / 390
WDM Tx in
4.2.2 OADM units 4.2.2.1 8 channels OADM unit

The components, MUX and DEMUX used in the OADM boards are the same than those used in the OMDX boards. Thus, 4 OADM boards are defined: OADM8100_M_S2_S, the dropped and added channels are the channels 42 to 50 OADM8100_M_S1_S, the dropped and added channels are the channels 52 to 60 OADM8100_M_L1_S, the dropped and added channels are the channels 30 to 38 OADM8100_M_L2_S, the dropped and added channels are the channels 20 to 28 1510 nm filter Monitor Rx out
Optical Receiver
IPL IOPV SPV Rx out ch #1 dropped channels WDM Rx out
DEMUX
Line Rx in 1510 nm filter WDM 1>8
ch #2 ch #3 ch #4 ch #5 ch #6 ch #7 ch #8
Extra Rx out Extra Tx in ch #1 ch #2 added channels WDM Tx in ch #3 ch #4 ch #5 ch #6 ch #7 ch #8 OLOS OOPV SPV Tx in OPL OOPV Figure 183. OADM8: blockdiagram 4.2.2.1.1 Description
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
WDM 8 > 1
MUX
Optical Receiver
Line Tx out
Optical Receiver
Monitor Tx out
The OADM8 unit is used on the west or east side. The 8 channels are dropped when all the other channels (passthrough) are sent on the extraoutput port. On the transmit side, the 8 concerned channels are added to the passthrough channels via the multiplexer and thus, the SPV (coming from the SPVM unit) is inserted using a WDM coupler. The optical characteristics are described in para. 5.3.3.1 on page 348.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 275 / 390
4.2.2.2 4 channels OADM unit The function of the OADM4_x units is to extract and insert 4 channels between the 32 available. Optical Receiver 1510 nm filter Monitor Rx out SPV Rx out IPL IOPV
DEMUX
Line Rx in WDM 1>4
dropped channels WDM Rx out
ch #1 ch #2 ch #3 ch #4
Extra Rx out Extra Tx in
added channels WDM Tx in
ch #1 ch #2 ch #3 ch #4 WDM 4>1 Line Tx out
MUX
OLOS OOPV Optical Receiver
SPV Tx in OPL OOPV Optical Receiver
Monitor Tx out
Figure 184. OADM4: blockdiagram 4.2.2.2.1 Description The SPV channel is extracted and the signal is sent on a front panel connector. The 4 channels are dropped and sent on a front panel connector. The aggregate of all the other channels (passthrough) is also sent to a front panel connector to be connected to the multiplex. On the transmit side, the 4 concerned channels are added to the passthrough channels via the multiplexer and thus, the SPV (coming from the SPVM unit). The output signal is monitored (detection of ILOS, OOPV) and an external optical access is given to the operator for monitoring purpose too. The optical characteristics are described in para. 5.3.3.2 on page 349. The different possible sets of channels are the following: 20 to 23 25 to 28 30 to 33 35 to 38 42 to 45 47 to 50 52 to 55 and 57 to 60.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 276 / 390
4.2.2.3 2 channels OADM unit The function of the OADM2100_M_XX_S is to extract and insert 2 channels between the 32 available.
IPL OOPV SPV IN OLOS OOPV extra input Optical Receiver Optical Receiver Monitor
MUX
ch #1 Output
ch #2 extra output
SPV filter Input
ch #2
DEMUX
Monitor Optical Receiver
ch #1
SPV OUT IPL IOPV Figure 185. Block diagram of the OADM2100_M_xx_S unit 4.2.2.3.1 Description The SPV channel is extracted and the signal is sent on a front panel connector. The two channels are dropped while all the other channels are sent to a frontpanel connector (extraoutput). On the transmit side, the concerned channel is added to the other channels (passthrough or just multipled in an other board) via the multiplexer and thus, the SPV (coming from the SPVM unit) is inserted using a coupler. The output signal is monitored (detection of ILOS, OOPV) and an external optical access is given to the operator for monitoring purpose too. The optical characteristics are described in para. 5.3.3.3 on page 350. Available couple of channels per each OADM2 board: 30-31; 3233; 3536; 3738; 4748.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 277 / 390
4.2.2.4 1 channel OADM unit The function of the OADM1100_M_XX_S units is to extract and insert 1 channel between the 32 available.
SPV IN OPL OOPV OLOS OOPV Optical Optical Receiver Receiver Monitor
MUX
extra input Output
Add Ch
extra output SPV filter Monitor Input
DEMUX
Drop Ch
SPV OUT Optical Receiver IPL IOPV
Figure 186. OADM1100: block diagram 4.2.2.4.1 Description The SPV channel is extracted and the signal is sent on a front panel connector. The channel is dropped while all the other channels are sent to a frontpanel connector. On the transmit side, the concerned channel is added to the other channels (passthrough or just multipled in an other board) via the multiplexer and thus, the SPV (coming from the SPVM unit) is inserted using coupler. The output signal is monitored (detection of ILOS, OOPV) and an external optical access is given to the operator for monitoring purpose too. The optical characteristics are described in para. 5.3.3.4 on page 351. The available channels are 25, 30, 31, 32, 33, 35, 36, 37, 38 in Long Band and 47, 48, 57 in Short Band.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 278 / 390
4.2.3 SPV_F_1310_1550 The function of the SPV_F_1310_1550 unit is used to multiplex / demultiplex one 1310 nm channel (for instance coming from a 4xANY, one 1550 nm multiplexed signal and the SPV channel.
SPV IN OPL OLOS OOPVOOPV Optical Optical Receiver Receiver Monitor
COUPLER
1310 Output
1550
1310
SPV filter Input
SPLITTER
1550
Monitor Optical Receiver IPL IOPV
SPV OUT
Figure 187. Block diagram of the SPV_F_1310_1550 unit 4.2.3.1 Description At demux side, the SPV channel is extracted by a filter while at the mux side, a 95/5 coupler is used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
this board should moreover be able to accomodate whatever channel in the CBand (and not only a channel at 1550 nm). A 95/5 coupler is used to monitor the signal (power presence and monitoring connector) in both directions. The optical characteristics are described in para. 5.3.4 on page 352.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 279 / 390
4.2.4 SPV_F_C This board is able to insert/extract the OSC channel to/from one 1310 nm channel or one 1550 nm channel.
Common In
SPV Filter
SPLITTER
Extra Out
10dB
Optical Receiver Optical Input Power Detection
SPV Out LOS IPL
Extra In SPV In
SPV Coupler
COUPLER
10dB
Common Out
Optical Receiver Optical Output Power Detection
LOS
OPL
N.B.
For Input power and Output power alarm detection, the optical receiver is calibrated at 1550 nm. Figure 188. Block diagram of the SPV_F_C unit
4.2.4.1 Description The board allows to perform both mux and demux function of two signals which are either Cband WDM signal or Second windows signal (B&W or 1310 nm) by extra ports and Supervisory channel (1510 nm) by SPV ports. The single channel can be extracted or inserted to the multiplexed signal. 2 different channel filterings are available:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1310 / 1510 nm 1510 / 1550 nm
This compact board can be plugged in slots 28-35 or 38-45 on a 1696MSPAN shelf and in a slots 910 or 11 in the 1696MS_C shelf and subshelf.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 280 / 390
4.2.4.2 Board location in the system This board has to take place in both the 1696MSPAN and 1696MS_C shelves. The basic configuration may be with one wavelength among predefined WDM range or B&W user signal, however it could be set with a multiplexed signal.
4.2.4.3 Optical characteristics The optical characteristics are described in para. 5.3.5 on page 353.
Transponder unit
Transponder unit
SPV_M
Transmission Line
SPV_M
SPV_F unit West Side
SPV_F unit East Side
Figure 189. Position of SPV_F_C unit in a transmission line
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 281 / 390
4.3 Optical Amplifier (OAC)

4.3.1 Description The Optical Amplifiers are designed to amplify the C bands wavelengths in WDM transmission system. This functionality is necessary to extend the transmission capacity of the optical fibers network. They can perform optical amplification through the optical line as a booster, in line, OADM repeater and preamplifier. The Optical Amplifiers provide up to +17 dBm output power (for 32 wavelengths) in C Band without external pump module. A tunable attenuator (VOA) allows a good gain flatness. This unit contains two independent stages : a preamplifier and a booster. The board receives electrical data from the Equipment Controller and from the Craft Terminal. It receives optical data from SPV and from the OADM/OMDX or another optical amplifier. The aim of this boards is to allow an output Power Per Channel (P/ch) of 2 dBm for 32 channels max loading and to allow a correct behaviour whatever the number of channels and whatever the variation of the loss at the input of the preamplifier. There are four types of optical amplifiers OAC1 (OFA 22/9), introduced in R.1.1, used for short spans transmission (metro amplifier) OAC1_L (OFA 28/9), introduced in R.2.0, used for long spans transmission (regional amplifier). OAC2 (OFA 22/9), introduced in R.2.2, used for short spans transmission (metro amplifier) OAC2_L (OFA 28/9), introduced in R.2.2, used for long spans transmission (regional amplifier).
OAC2 and OAC2_L, the new boards introduced in R.2.2, compared to OAC1 and OAC1_L are designed to decrease power consumption. In the 1696MS_C shelf, only OAC2 and OAC2_L can be used. Table 36. sums up the main differences between OAC1, OAC1_L, OAC2 and OAC2_L
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 282 / 390
Table 36. Main differences between OAC1, OAC1_L, OAC2 and OAC2_L optical amplifiers
Feature Optical amplifier Introduced in release Gain block Example of Span performance (32 channels x 10Gbps or 2.5 Gbps) Preamplifier Booster VOA tuning fail alarm OAC1 R.1.1 OAC1_L R.2.0
Values OAC2 R.2.2 22/9 1 span x 21 dB 1 span x 28 dB (with double stage amplifier at IN and OUT of the node up to 7 spans x19 dB Cooler @ 980 nm OAC2_L R.2.2 28/9 1 span x 27 dB 1 span x 29 dB (with double stage amplifier at IN and OUT of the node up to 4 spans x 22dB
22/9 28/9 1 span x 21 dB 1 span x 27 dB 1 span x 28 dB 1 span x 29 dB (with double (with double stage amplifier stage amplifier at IN and OUT at IN and OUT of the node of the node up to 7 spans up to 4 spans x x19 dB 22dB Cooler @ 1480 nm
Managed from R.2.2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 283 / 390
Block diagram description (see Figure 190. on page 285) The optical part consists of two optical gain block modules, 22/9 for OAC1/OAC2 and 28/9 for OAC1_L/OAC2_L (1st and 2nd stage; they can be a preamplifier and a booster an optical attenuator (VOA) allowing to fix the attenuation before the first stage of the amplifier and to compensate the variation of the span attenuation. The VOA input and output are accessible to the operator via front panel connectors. four 99/1 couplers for the 1st and 2nd stage signal monitoring (input and output) a DEMUX 1550/1510 (SPV filter) for the extraction of the supervisory channel (SPV OUT). It separates data and supervisory channel a 95/5 coupler for the insertion of the supervisory channel (SPV IN). It couples data and supervisory channel monitoring photodiodes (optical recevers).
The electrical part consists of two optical gain block modules for regulations, performing output optical power regulation : a comparaison is made between the measured optical output power OOPV and the needed optical output power OPAV which is either calculated by the FPGA (control unit) or fixed by the user temperature regulation: in each gain block a thermistance allows to evaluate the temperature inside the gain block. Thereafter a comparison is done between a reference voltage and the thermistances voltage to determine the control current
alarm generation card presence indicator Remote Inventory power supply interface with alarms generation. The board is supplied by 48V voltage from batteries via backpanel, and by +3.6V voltage from the PSC card. On the board, 3 different volatges are used: +5.5V; 5.5V; +3.6V. visual system alarming by means of 5 leds located on front panel (PW, OOS, ABN, APSD, HW).
The card mismatch is managed via information (ECID) stored in an EEPROM. As the maximum power is +17 dBm, the amplifiers operates in safety class 1M. In the interconnection stage (between the 1st stage output and the 2nd stage input) can be located a DCU and/or an OADM/OMDX and/or a MVAC board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 284 / 390
VOA IN 1st stage OUT

99/1 coupler
Variable Optical Attenuator
VOA OUT
99/1 coupler
2nd stage IN
Monitor Optical Receiver SPV filter

99/1 coupler 1 2 1 1550 nm 1510 nm
1st stage
2nd stage
99/1 coupler 95/5 coupler
2nd stage OUT

Pump laser 2
1st stage IN
Pump laser 1
Optical Receiver
OLOS1 IOPV1
Optical Receiver
OLOS2 IOPV2
Monitor Monitor SPV OUT Alarm & Control Unit Optical EPOPV Receiver
SPV IN
EXTRA PUMP IN
Restart Button
Card presence
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
Figure 190. Amplifier boards blockdiagram
390
Optical Receiver
Monitor
3AL 95278 AA AA
ILOS1 IOPV1
ILOS2 IOPV2
285 / 390
4.3.2 Way of working The way of working is described in the next figure.
P1 INPUT 1 1 DCU OADM DCU OUTPUT 2 P2
P2 2 OUTPUT
VOA
1 P1
VOA
INPUT
Figure 191. Optical amplifiers configuration In order to use the amplifier with its optimum performances, the output power per channel must be constant whatever the number of channels and whatever the variation of loss of the previous span. In order to achieve such a requirement, two tuning mechanisms are foreseen: Variation of the span loss, for a given number of channels Variation of the number of channels, for a given span loss. 4.3.2.1 Variation of the span loss, for a given number of channels The VOA attenuation is adjusted manually or semiautomatically according to the previous span attenuation in order to match with the EOL span losses. At the amplifier installation, the VOA is set in order to match with the foreseen EOL span losses. Then, when the span changes, the VOA is tuned in order to always match with that EOL span losses. EOL span losses
P1 Current span losses VOA 1 1
2 P2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Local Board Figure 192. Span variation compensation
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 286 / 390
For a given number of channels, when the previous span loss increases (ie. when the total input power decreases), the total output powers of the 1st and 2nd stage have a tendency to follow the corresponding linear curve. As a consequence, when the span loss variation becomes greater than 1 dB, the VOA attenuation must be tuned in order to keep the total losses constant. The range of variation of the interstage attenuation is included between 1 and 15 dB. Two VOA tuning functions are foreseen: manual setting: the operator enters the value of the VOA (VOA_OP). semiautomatic setting: the value of the VOA is calculated by the NE via parameters entered by the operator. This action is not automatic: the operator must command it.
4.3.2.2 Variation of the number of channels, for a given span loss Refer to Figure 193. on page 288. Two pump tuning functions are foreseen: manual setting: the output powers of the 1st and 2nd stages are fixed and set by the operator (independently from the input power) automatic setting: 1st stage: for a given EOL previous span loss, when the number of channels changes, the 1st stage output power is tuned without operator intervention 2st stage: for a given interstage (IT) attenuation, when the number of channels changes, the 2st stage output power is tuned without operator intervention
The output power of the 1st and 2nd stage is adjusted automatically according to the input power of the corresponding stage: 1st stage pump: it is enslaved on the 1st stage output power, which value is given as a function of the input power and the previous EOL span losses. For a given EOL previous span loss and for a given IT (interstage) attenuation, when the number of channels changes (ie. when the total input power changes), the total output power follows the corresponding linear curve. The full arrows correspond to a number of channels increasing. The dashed arrows correspond to a number of channels decreasing. When the number of channels is less than 4, the output power of the 1st & 2nd stage remains constant. 2nd stage: it is enslaved on the 2nd stage output power, which value is given as a function of the input power of the second stage and the interstage attenuation. For a given IT attenuation, when the number of channels changes (ie. when the total input power changes), the total output power of the 2nd stage follows the corresponding linear curve. The full arrows correspond to a number of channels increasing. The dashed arrows correspond to a number of channels decreasing. When the number of channels is less than 4, the output power of the 1st & 2nd stage remains constant.
The nominal operating configuration of the optical amplifiers (Pout = +17dBm) is associated with a 32 channels loading. Consequently, when 32 channels are loaded, the output power per channel is about 2 dBm. For a given EOL span losses or IT, the range of variation of the total input and output powers is 9 dB (from 32 to 4 channels). When the number of channels is less than 4, the output power of the 1st & 2nd stage remains constant.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 287 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
+3 +12 Pout 2 Pout 1 +8 +17 (dBm) (dBm) 23 12 20 17 14 11 8 first stage tuning pump 9 IT = 15dB IT = 12dB IT = 9dB IT = 6dB IT = 3dB SPAN = 31dB SPAN = 28dB SPAN = 25dB 5 SPAN = 22dB 2 SPAN = 19dB 2 4 SPAN = 16dB SPAN = 13dB Pin 1 (dBm) 6 3 0 3 second stage tuning pump 6 9
01
Figure 193. Amplifier tuning for number of channels changes (previous span loss constant)
3AL 95278 AA AA Pin 2 (dBm)
390
288 / 390
4.3.3 Optical characteristics See para. 5.3.6 on page 354.

4.3.4 Optical safety IEC 608252, Ed.03: Safety of Laser ptroducts Part 2: Safety of optical fibre communication system: in restricted areas no APSD scheme is required below +21.3 dBm output power (see para. 3.6, 4.5.1, table D.1). Amplified or not amplified equipment is always well below this limit. Alcatel recommend the APSD disable mode (default mode). The next table describes the way of working of the optical amplifiers. The boards may be in APSD disable state APSD disable forced ON or OFF state APSD enable state (not available). The following tables sum up the way of working for each APSD state. a) APSD disable state
Table 37. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD disable alarms consecutive action 1st stage Input ILOS1 ILOS2 b) 2nd stage Input ShutDown of the 1st stage ShutDown of the 2nd stage
APSD disable forced ON or OFF state
Table 38. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD disable forced ON/OFF alarms consecutive action 1st stage Input ILOS1 ILOS2 c) N.B. APSD enable state (not available) In current Release OAC APSD is always disabled. 2nd stage Input 1st stage forced ON / OFF. No action. 2nd stage forced ON / OFF. No action.
Table 39. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD enable alarms consecutive action 1st stage Input
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2nd stage Input ILOS2 Shutdown of the 1st stage and 2nd stage of the same board. Shutdown of the 2nd stage.
ILOS1
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 289 / 390
4.4 Controller
4.4.1 ESC board The ESC (Equipment and Shelf Controller) board is the hardware platform designed to support the Equipment Controller (EC) functions and the Shelf Controller (SC) functions for the 1696 MSPAN and 1696MS_C equipment from the release 1.3. The EC functions has in charge of the processing activities concerning the Virtual Equipment Control Element (VECE) function: Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF) Message Communication Function (MCF)
The SC function of ESC has in charge of the processing activities concerning the Physical Equipment Control Element (PECE) function: Physical Machine Management Function (PMMF) Basic Process Control Function (BPCF)
It provides the resources to support the SW functions related to the physical machine control and management and configuration provisioning. In an Expansion Shelf, the ESC board needs only to provide a SC functionality. It is the same board, and its identification is made through shelf id and slot id numbers. The ESC consists in a double processor board. It is mainly composed of : A ESC mother board, A daughter board achieving the EC function, A daughter board achieving the SC function, A non volatile mass storage device PCMCIA 2.1 compatible. Each of these functions (EC and SC) are realized using a PQSCC daughter board. They are plugged on the ESC mother board. The PQSCC module is developed in order to provide a common HW (and SW) platform for different applications requiring a Shelf Controller (SC) function. The processors used are members of Motorola MPC860 family. Various kinds of serial communication channels and parallel I/O ports for alarm & status signals are provided by the ESC card. Thanks to the ESC board, it is no more necessary to plug a LAN_Q card in each shelf since the ESC is now able to manage the SPI bus. One only needs to plug a LAN_Q card in the master shelf if one needs the LAN supervision functionality. The flash backup capability permits the management system to copy files back and forth using an ftp service, between the flash card on the ESC in slot 1 and the ESC in slot 24 of the master shelf. 4.4.1.1 EQUICO to ESC Upgrade procedure information When the system software is upgraded from version 1.1, both EQUICO boards (SC+EC) should be replaced by one ESC board in the master shelf, and one ESC board in expansion shelves in slot 1. The upgrade procedure is perform with the Craft terminal Equipment or OS (1353SH) and for this:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
Refer to 3AL 86602 ABAAPGZZA document. The procedure of NE software management is detailled on the Operator Handbook. 01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 290 / 390
ED
4.4.2
Supervision units (SPVM2, SPVM_H)
The SPVM cards are used for the management of the 1696 supervision and service channels. The set of service channels managed by the supervision unit is a subset of the section overhead of STM1 frame, as defined in ITU Recommendation G70X (March 1994); the unit will be able to multiplex/demultiplex the optical service channels in 2048 kb/s or 4864 kb/s proprietary supervision frames. In case of a 4864 kb/s supervision data channels, the SPVM will multiplex/demultiplex them in two 2048 kb/s frames, only one of these contains the supervision information, the other is an extra traffic frames. Furthermore, others four bidirectional 2048 kb/s user auxiliary data channels are provided for extra traffic needs. A matrix is used to interconnect these channels. The supervision units types availabale are: SPVM2 and SPVM_H. The supervision unit (SPVM) is composed of one optical part (SPV channel receiver and transmitter) two main electrical blocks: a matrix to route the 2 Mbit/s inputs an FPGA dedicated to the supervision frames management. From Rel. 1.3, is available the SPVM + OW (SPVM2) board, able to drop the 2 Mb/s extra channels and the audio channel. In Rel. 2.0, has been introduced the SPVM_H board; it provides all the features of the SPVM2 board but manages only one Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC). In the following is briefly described the block scheme (see Figure 194. on page 292) The unit is composed of a main board, implementing the larger part of the functionalities, and two daughter boards (TXSPVM) devoted to optical transmitter. The board can be split in three main parts: 2/4 Mbps MUX/DEMUX (gate array). It multiplexes/demultiplexes a 4864 kb/s stream into two 2048 kb/s channels. It extracts and inserts from/to these streams three auxiliary service channels. Supervision Manager (FPGA); it can be divided in the cited major functions: Matrix function between the four users channels at 2048 kb/s, the streams of the supervison channels processed by the OSC MUXs and two internal streams reserved to the mux/demux of the service channels contained in the supervision channels. In case of a 2048kb/s supervision frame it can bypass the OSC MUXs Supervision frames and service channel management extract/insert the slots containing F1, E1, E2, from the supervision frames. The F1, E1, E2 service channels and those coming from the OSC MUXs, which is supervision information coming from both sides (EST and WEST), are re routed to the ESC board OSC MUX configuration: this block function gives the access to the configuration and alarm pins of the two OSC MUXs via internal registers SPI interface which assumes the software interface. Through this interface, the register of the Supervision Manager is accessible in read and write sequences. It permits the application software to configure the SPVM. TXSPVM is a daughter board containing the optical unit (transmitter), having in charge of transmitting the SPVM frame on an optical fiber support in both sides (east and west), if required. This function is realized with two LASERS at 1510 nm wavelenght. The LASERS are supported by two identical daugter boards (TXSPVM), managed by SPVM.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Remote Inventory of the board is available via the SPI bus.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 291 / 390
AGGREGATE SIGNAL (32 CH) 1550 NM
AGGREGATE OSC (32 CH + OSC) ADD/DROP FROM/TO LINE
OAC
OAC
AGGREGATE (32 CH + OSC) FROM/TO LINE
AGGREGATE OSC SIGNAL (32 CH) ADD/DROP 1550 NM
1510 nm 4Mb: OSC (D1D3; D4D12) + UDC
FRONT PANEL TELEPHONE HANDSET (J1)
BACK PANEL TO UIC2 TO UIC1 TO ESC
EOW (E2 at 64K) Voice Channel
TXSPVM OPTICAL INTERFACE 2Mbps OSC
TDM1 (2M)
TDM2 (2M)
TXSPVM OPTICAL INTERFACE 2Mbps OSC
FRONT PANEL
2/4Mb /E MUX/ OSC+UDC DEMUX 2Mbps UDC SUPERVISION MANAGER
4Mbps
4Mbps 2/4Mb MUX/ 2Mbps DEMUX OSC+UDC UDC
FRONT PANEL
E/
SPI INTERFACE
Figure 194. SPVM2 block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 292 / 390
1510 nm 4Mb: OSC (D1D3; D4D12) + UDC
UDC (2 x 2 Mbps)
4.4.2.1 Description of the supported functionalities The following functionalities are supported:
1) 2)
3) 4)
Management of one or two bidirectional supervision streams at 2 048 Kbit/s, one for Line terminal applications and one for each side of the link in backtoback or OADM applications. Management of Data Communication Channels DCCm and DCCr; four data streams are made available to the Equipment Controller (EC) via a backpanel bus, and are used for network management. Management of K1/K2 data stream at 128 Kbit/s; this data stream (terminated in the unit) is made available to the equipment controller. Management of E2 audio channel: The default configuration enables to drop the audio channel. It is possible to call a specific NE or to make a conference call. The phone number of the NE is set with the two front panel coding wheels. dial #00 for a conference call and #XX (with XX strictly greater than 10 for a specific call).
The Line Terminal or backtoback terminals and OADM configurations are done by software. 4.4.2.1.1 Functional Description of the configurations As described on two following figures the data of OSC channel at 1510 nm are sent to the matrix into a 2 Mbit/s signal to the supervision frame management functional block. This block generates one/or two TDM signals according to the NE configuration.
(daughter board) Tx1 optical transmitter

MCC
WDM Rx
OSC 1510 nm
Matrix
Rx1 optical receiver
OMDX, OADM or OAC board
Supervision frame management

TDM1
SPVM
ESC board Figure 195. SPVM board in a Line Terminal configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 293 / 390
West
(daughter board) Tx2 optical transmitter (daughter board) Tx1 optical transmitter
MCC
WDM Rx
East
MCC
OSC 2 1510 nm
OSC 1 1510 nm
Matrix
Rx2 optical receiver Rx1 optical receiver
Supervision frame management
SPVM
TDM2
TDM1
ESC board Figure 196. SPVM board in an OADM or BackToBack configuration N.B. When the network comprises NEs connected in a ring, at least one NE must be configured with the SPVM board in Local Clock configuration (to avoid clock loop). SPVM board for the others NE can be configured in Remote Clock configuration.
User channels The 2Mbps and 64Kbps channels exchanged with UIC, are dropinsert connected by default. 4.4.2.2 Optical characteristics See para. 5.3.7 on page 355. 4.4.2.3 Management of two SPVM boards From the Release 1.3 and in a configuration where a CPE is linked to a 1696MS in a ring, the 1696MS is able to manage the first SPVM board (East and West of the Ring), plus one SPVM managing the OSC to/from CPE(s).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 294 / 390
4.4.3 Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card (OSMC) The Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card (OSMC) is used along with the MVAC board as a key element of the automatic equalization process into the 1696MS system, providing the ITUT entire Cband monitoring function in terms of channel power and wavelength (no OSNR).
up to 8 monitored points)
MP1 1x8 fiber optic switch MP8 Front panel PC electrical interfaces Optical Channel Monitoring Alarm& Control Unit
PC Electrical Link
OSMC
Figure 197. OMSC block diagram
The purpose of this board is to measure the power per channel at several points of a node. This board receives its optical input signals from any point of the tranmission path and it measures the power of each channel. Up to 8 locations (4 per direction) are possible on monitoring or direct ports (see Figure 198. on page 295) before and after first and second stage of an amplifier before a demultiplexer after a multiplexer. Rx Tx
1
Rx Tx
OSMC
Tx
Rx
2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1
Tx Rx
Figure 198. OSMC connection (measured points)
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 295 / 390
card presence
The front panel PC electrical interface is used to send the data directly to a PC. For the absolute channels power measurement, an offset (called calibration factor) must be available in order to consider the loss of the monitoring splitter. Each power is given before the monitoring splitter. Functional Description The 8 x input ports are connected to a 1 x 8 electro mechanical latching fiber optic switch: when the system wants to select a specific port, it sends an order thru the SPI bus that in turns make the Control Unit to properly bias the switch command pins by making it switching to the selected position. As soon as the new position is raised the switch will rest in that position until a new stimuli occurs. The output WDM signal is then forwarded to the OCM module through a 90/10 TAP coupler, the 10% branch being devoted to a broadband photodetection, performed by a PIN photodiode followed by a logaritmic amplification in order to provide system calibration. The OCM goal is to perform a spectral analisys of the Cband, from 192 THz (ch#20) to 196 THz (ch#60), every 100 GHz, as regards channel power and wavelength. The Alarms and Control unit provides a digital interface between peripheral components (OCM, Optical switch..) the NE needs to get access to and the SPIDER local interface it is connected to. Main functions are channel power calibration and board calibration OCM interfacing, data postprocessing and alarms generation optical switch control and monitoring photo detection and board temperature digital processing OOS led control The SPI interface terminates the SPI bus used for control and monitoring between OSMC (slave) and ESC. The two EEPROMs provides Remote Inventory data and board specific parameters (ECID). The power supply module performs incoming 48V rails filtering, overvoltage and current protections, board feeding generating the needed voltages (+3.3V, +5V..), alarms monitoring.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 296 / 390
4.4.4 1696MS_C Master Intershelf Link (ILINK_M) This board is dedicated to the 1696MS_C shelf and allows to manage up to three shelves (one master shelf and two slave shelves) by using only one ESC board (costsaving solution). The ILINK_M board is located in the master compact shelf; it has to be used in conjunction with the I LINK_S board (slave board) located in each slave shelf, to which it has to be linked to be able to stack up to three subracks. Hence the ESC board has to be plugged in slot 1 of the master shelf the ILINK_M board has to be plugged in slot 6 of the master shelf the ILINK_S board has to be plugged in slot 1 of each slave shelf. The ILINK_M is mainly dedicated to connect the SPI bus (and the card presence signals) from the ESC to the slave shelves, where no ESC unit is provided. The connection between ILINK_M and each ILINK_S is done by using dedicated cables. After having provisioned it, swapping cables is not possible. When the connection between ILINK_M and other ILINK_S is removed, a Card Absent alarm is raised on every board of the expansion shelves.
BACK PANEL
M1
48Vdc VBatt
+
card pres
Power supply
+5V +3.3V +2.5V HWF +3.6V
ILink_M
FRONT PANEL
RS485 Transceiver M2
Power Supplies
SLOT ID
sLAVE SHELF 1 CONNECTOR SPI
M7 SPI Interface (Spider)

BOARD DATA (ECID) EEPROM
Card Presence
Card Presence Bus SLAVE 1
REMOTE INVENTORY EEPROM
sLAVE SHELF 2 CONNECTOR SPI
M8
Card Presence
M5
Card Presence Bus Card Presence
sLAVE SHELF 3 CONNECTOR (NOT USED) SPI Card Presence
M9 RS485 Transceivers
FPGA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 199. ILink_M block diagram
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 297 / 390
4.4.5 1696MS_C Slave Intershelf Link (ILINK_S) This board is dedicated to the 1696MS_C slave shelf giving the possibility to add up to two 1696MS_C slave shelves to the master shelf. Using the ILink_S unit allows to save the cost of the reuse of an ESC unit giving the possibility to link the SPI bus and the Card Presence signal of each slave shelf to the master shelf, thus connecting these signals to the ESC boards, only provided in Master shelf. The ILINK_S board has to be plugged in each slave compact shelf; it has to be used in conjunction with the ILINK_M board (master board) located in master shelf, to which it has to be linked to be able to stack up to three subracks (1 master shelf and two slave shelves). Hence the ILINK_S board has to be plugged in slot 1 of each slave shelf. the ILINK_M board has to be plugged in slot 6 of the master shelf The connection between ILINK_M and each ILINK_S is done by using dedicated cables. After having provisioned it, swapping cables is not possible. When the connection between ILINK_M and other ILINK_S is removed, a Card Absent alarm is raised on every board of the expansion shelves. The ILink_S unit includes SPIDER, Remote Inventory and Data EEPROM (ECID) 1 connector for the master shelf.
BACK PANEL
M1
48Vdc VBatt
+
card pres
Power supply
+5V +3.3V +2.5V HWF +3.6V
ILink_S
FRONT PANEL
RS485 Transceiver M2
Power Supplies
SLOT ID
SPI Interface (Spider)

REMOTE INVENTORY EEPROM BOARD DATA (ECID) EEPROM sLAVE SHELF CONNECTOR SPI
M10
Card Presence
Card Presence Bus
M5
Card Presence Bus Card Presence
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FPGA
RS485 Transceivers
Figure 200. ILink_S block diagram
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 298 / 390
4.5 General user interfaces

Two main functions are supported by the various small units: provide the power supply to the other units and provide the electrical interfaces to the operators. The various functions are divided into small boards plugged in the bottom of the shelf (cf. Figure 201. ). Each of these boards supports a SPI Bus interface and some card presence wires.
QB Power supply A
LAN access
ESC OMDX + EXP + SPV OMDX MCC MCC MCC MCC MCC MCC MCC MCC Matrix Slot Matrix Slot MCC MCC MCC MCC MCC MCC MCC MCC
L P A S N C C
optical protection units
H R K A I
optical protection units
U U P I I S C C C
FANC
House Keeping
Figure 201. Electrical access, slot description
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 299 / 390
Rack alarms
Power supply B
User Interface
User Interface
4.5.1 LAN board

IELAN INPUT
ETHERNET INTERFACE ADAPTER
TP RJ45 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
IELAN OUT
COAX hex rotary switches EQTYPE SHELFID
TRANSC
N.B.
If a wire is plugged on J45, BNC is unavailable.
Figure 202. Block diagram of control LAN board 4.5.1.1 Lan board purposes The purposes of the LAN board are the following: to provide the physical layer for the QB interface between the Equipment shelf (ESC board) and an external supervisor (e.g. 1353SH),. to provide the 4 bits Equipment type Codification, necessary to give to the application stored in the Equuipment Controller. to provide the 8 bits Shelf IDentification number (i.e.: MAC address), necessary to build up the IP address of the shelf where the LAN board is installed.
4.5.1.2 Lan board description The LAN board has to be plugged in the slot 26 for the Maser shelf (LAN_Q) or slot #8 of 1696MS_C shelf. It is linked to the ESC board by backpanel link. A second LAN (LAN_I) in the slot 27 is used to link to the Slave shelf with a LAN board on the slot 27. The link to an external supervision equipment is ensured by 2 BNC connectors or by one RJ 45 connector. The Equipment Type Codification is ensured by the hexadecimal rotary switch CW3. The Shelf IDentification is ensured by the two hexadecimal rotary switches CW1 and CW2. N.B. The LAN_I functionality is not foreseen in a 1696MS_C shelf.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 300 / 390
4.5.1.3 Lan board Hardware setting Equipment Type Codification

The hexadecimal rotary switch CW3 is in charge of setting up the equipment type. The CW3 factory setting is the value 5, for the 1696MSPAN. It must not be changed. Shelf Identification number The hexadecimal rotary switches CW1 and CW2 are in charge of setting up the shelf Identification number. The CW1 factory setting is the value B and the CW2 factory setting is the value F. These default values are the identification number of the master shelf. For the different shelves, the switches setting values are: Shelf Slot Function CW1 Master Master Expansion 1 Expansion 1 Expansion 2 Expansion 2 Expansion 3 Expansion 3 26 27 26 27 26 27 26 27 ELAN ILAN ELAN ILAN ELAN ILAN ELAN ILAN B B 7 7 3 3 E E Switch settings CW2 F F F F F F F F CW3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
CW 1
CW 2
CW 3 D E F
Front Panel Rotary Wheels 6 pins host for jumper
Back Panel
Figure 203. LAN board settings

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
It is not necessary to configure expansion shelves in this order, but it is necessary to give the corresponding expansion number to the craft Terminal. For example if only one drop shelf is present, its LAN baord can be configured (3, F, 5) but then to be defined as Expansion 2.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 301 / 390
Jumper configuration For operation with the ESC, 1696 MS R1.3 and later, the jumper setting equipment for all LAN cards is the same regardless of which slot they are installed in. Only the following jumper settings are permitted: N.B. No jumper Jumper between pins AD During NE upgrade from R1.1, the jumper settings of all installed LAN cards should be checked and modified as necessary to comply with the above.
For a Compact NE (1696MS_C), the switches setting values are mandatory (B, F, 5).
4.5.2 HouseKeeping board (HK) 8 housekeeping accesses are provided in both direction (8 inputs and 8 outputs). The HK board is plugged in the slot 36 of the master shelf. Connector: subD 25 pins (see section 2.4.2.1, page 111).
4.5.3 Rack Alarm Interface (RAI) The RAI board monitors the rack alarms. Each shelf (master and expansion shelf) is equipped with this card in the slot 37in 1696MSPAN and in slot 9 or 10 in master shelf of 1696MS_C. 1696 MSPAN alarms are analysed either by the Equipment Shelf Controller or directly by the Rack Alarm Interface board. In function of the importance of these alarms, the ESC generates signals to turn on LEDs on PDU or TRU card and so to alert the user. 2 ways of working are available: for the Interfacing with the PDU The RAI cards in the same rack are linked to each other as shown on Figure 204. And the RAI card in the master shelf is linked with the PDU. for the Interfacing with the TRU The same way of working can be proposed, but also a direct link between each shelf and the TRU (cf. Figure 204. ).
The RAI card inputs are alarms coming from the FAN card, from the PSC, from the shelf just below (if any) and from the Equipment Controller (for the RAI card in the master shelf). Taking the various inputs into account the rack lamps are lit on or off. Rack lamps are different in ETSI and ANSI worlds. The RAI card is made to interface with both standards.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 302 / 390
Rack Alarms It is used to connect the rack lamps. These lamps differ from the ETSI rack to the ANSI one.
Table 40. PDU Front Panel LED Markings Marking CRI MAJ MIN RACK LED Color red red yellow red DESCRIPTION Critical: critical alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack Major: major alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack Major: minor alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack Rack Alarm: alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack or in the PDU
Table 41. TRU Front Panel LED Markings Marking URG NURG ATTD SIG PRSC LED Color red yellow red green DESCRIPTION Urgent: major alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack Non urgent: minor alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack Attended: aknowledged URG or NURG alarm signal presence (power on)
Connectors: (see section 2.4.2.2, page 111). SUBD 9 pins female RJ11 6pins female.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 303 / 390
OPTINEX RACK NEBS 2000 RACK

Top rack unit Power Distribution Unit All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Air deflector
Air deflector
Slot 37
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 204. Electrical links between RAI cards (slot 37) and TRU & PDU
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 304 / 390
4.5.4 User Interfaces Card (UIC) 4.5.4.1 Description

Some user information are carried by the SPV channel: they are extracted from the SPV frame by the SPVM board and access via dedicated electrical connectors on the User Interfaces cards. Those small boards have to be plugged under the corresponding SPVM board and in the slot beside.
SPVM
AUXA2
AUXA1
SPI NRZ G703 AUX1, AUX2 UIC NRZ G703 NRZ G703 AUX1, AUX2 NRZ G703
AUXB1
AUXB2
SPI
UIC
2Mbps USER ACCESS
2Mbps USER ACCESS
Figure 205. 2 Mbit/s backpanel links between UIC Cards and the SPVM unit The E2 analogic voice channel is available through a jack in the front panel of the SPVM board. Auxiliary Channels Interfaces: up to two 2 Mb/s bidirectional links (user 2 Mb/s) G 703 one analogic link. N.B. In default configuration the E2 channel is configured in drop/insert configuration. In a CPE configuation, auxiliary channels are in a hardware configuration (fixed). The UIC possibility is provided for 1696MS and not for 1696MS_C Equipment.
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 305 / 390
4.6 Switching Protection (OPC)

4.6.1
4.6.1.1 Description See Figure 206. on page 307. The purpose of this protection unit is to perform passive OCh protection (linear configuration), OSNC Protection (ring configuration). There are five types of Optical Protection Card (OPC), listed in the following: Single Mode OPC with jumpers (SM OPC) Multi Mode OPC with jumpers (MM OPC) Single Mode OPC with connectors (SM OPC FCP) Multi Mode OPC with connectors (MM OPC FCP) Multi Mode OPC with connectors 850 nm (MM OPC 850) Only OPC cards with connectors can be used with all interface cards (MCC, OCC10, 4xANY). The main difference between the Single Mode OPC and the Multi Mode OPC (with connectors and with jumpers) boards is the 50/50 Rx optical splitter: the SM OPCs have a single mode splitter the MM OPCs have a multi mode splitter and a higher optical loss. The OPC board can be connected to two transponders (protected channel / protecting channel) two drawers of two different 4xANY (_S, _P) boards. It can be placed in slots 28 to 35 and in slots 38 to 45, just below the two transponders/4xANY. As an example, if the two transponders are plugged in slots 4 and 5, to perform the channel protection the OPC is plugged in slot 28 or 29 if the two 4xANY_P are plugged in slots 4,5 and 6,7 to perform the channel protection the up to four OPCs (MM OPC 850) are plugged in slots 28, 29, 30, 31. The signal coming from the client is connected on RX input and crosses the board through a 3 dB splitter. By means of the RX 1&2 OUT OPC cables/connectors, it is then sent to the two transponders (RX user inputs), placed in the slots just above in the double shelf. The signal coming from the WDM world is transmitted by the two adjacent transponders (user Tx outputs) to the inputs of the other splitter of the OCh protection unit (TX1IN and TX2IN). The selected signal is sent to the client via the Tx OUT port. On each board are located two broadband (1310 nm and 1550 nm) 3 dB splitters/couplers for SM/MM OPC and SM/MM OPC FCP two 850 nm 3 dB splitters/couplers for MM OPC 850 Depending on the configuration, are available: a single mode splitter on RX line of the SM OPC a multi mode splitter on RX line of the MM OPC a single mode coupler on TX line of both the SM and MM OPCs. LOS detection and power measurement are provided on the following input signals Rx IN, coming from the client Tx 1 IN and Tx 2 IN, coming from the main and spare transponders / 4xANY_P by means of three 95/5 couplers (one per monitored signal) which extract the 5% of the received optical signals and send each of them to a photodiode (optical receiver) performing LOS detection and measurements. The LOS alarm is sent to the Alarm Interface and then to: the two transponders / 4xANY_P via backpanel connections the ESC board via the SPI bus.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 306 / 390
Single and Multi Mode Optical Protection Cards
The selection of the signal is made by the transponders. The Remote Inventory data are available via the SPI bus.
Two external voltages are supplied by the PSC units. Onboard fuse protection and hardware failure control are available. to transponders/4xANY_P drawers to client 307 / 390
from client
MMF or SMF* RX IN 95/5
3dB optical splitter 50/50 MMF or SMF*
RX OUT Channel1 RX OUT Channel2
from transponders/4xANY_P drawers
Optical Receiver**
LOS
TX IN Channel1 TX IN
95/5 SMF 95/5
3dB optical coupler 50/50 SMF TX OUT Backplane connector towards transponders 390
Channel2 Optical Receiver** Optical Receiver** LOS1
LOS2
Alarm Interface**
Card presence
N.B. * on Multi Mode OPC boards, the RX line is MMF type on Single Mode OPC boards, the RX line is SMF type. The TX line is always SMF. N.B. ** The optical receivers and the alarm interface are not available on SM OPC without connectors board. Figure 206. OPC block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
4.6.1.2 Optical characteristics See para. 5.3.9 on page 357.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA
4.7 Power Supply Card (PSC/PSC3)

Two power supply units are used: working and protecting. They are located at each side of the shelf, in the slots 25 and 48. For the block diagram, refer to Figure 207. on page 308. The Power Supply Cards are monitored via the SPI bus. PSCs provide some +3.6 V and 5.5 V for service use to all units and a 48 V power supply when needed. The input voltage range of the Power Supply Cards is 36 / 72 V. Front panel Connector: subD 3 poles (see section 2.4.3, page 111). LEDs signification Table 42. PSC and PSC3 LEDs signification HardWare Failure: GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and without failure RED when one of the On Board Power Supply (OBPS) is in failure (OR on the power supply alarms)
4.8 Power Supply Card (PSC2)

This board is the same as PSC and PSC3 but needs to supply less power, because it has been designed for 1696MS_C, hosting only 13 slots. PSC2 are used in main and slave compact shelves. Two power supply units are used: working and protecting. They are located at each side of the shelf, in the slots 7 and 12, and they are monitored via the SPI bus. These boards are with the 0V isolation. PSCs provide some +3.6 V and 5.5 V for service use to all units and a 48 V power supply when needed. The current limit is 6A. The input voltage range of the Power Supply Cards is 36 / 72 V. Front panel Connector: subD 3 poles (see section 2.4.3, page 111). The LEDs signification is shown in Table 42.
PSC2
Batt_A GND +Batt_A * protection * prefilter * fuse * OR Batt * EMI/EMC filter +Batt Batt
3.6V dual DC/DC 5.5V converter
* soft start * EMI/EMC filter * threshold
TO GENERIC BOARD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TO GENERIC BOARD
Figure 207. PSC2 block diagram
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 308 / 390
4.9 Power Management Unit (PMU)

The PMU is strictly dedicated to the 1696MS_C. It is an external shelf able to feed the compact shelf providing the 48 Vdc to the power supply cards. Hence the 1696MS_C can be fed by the classical 48Vdc provided by the telecom rack by the 48Vdc provided by the PMU, able to deliver this powering from any alternative voltage source. The PMU is an external shelf of the same size that the 1696MS_C, which can be installed in 19, 21 and 23 racks. This additional shelf is 1U high (1U = 44.45mm). The PMU works in a worldwide environment, which applies to the following requirements: US requirements : NEBS compliant (115V/ 60Hz), Japan requirements (100V/ 50/60Hz), Europe requirements (230V/ 50Hz). PSC boards are connected to the rectifiers of the PMU which provide the power. PMU Control unit is connected to the FAN_C board and the tw0 PSC/PSC2 to provide alarms to the Network Element since this unit in not managed by the software.
6 5
12 11 10 9 8 7
PSC(2) 48Vdc (power supply) 309 / 390
F A N _C
4 3 2
13
PSC(2)
PMU alarms
in1 in2
RECTIFIER 1
RECTIFIER 2
CONTROL UNIT
PMU
48Vdc from any alternative voltage source (100Vac, 115Vac, 230Vac) from backup batteries (optional)
Figure 208. PMU cabling scheme Description Refer to Figure 209. on page 310. The PMU architecture is made up of: 2 VAC inputs 2 VDC outputs without fuses 1 battery connection one cintrol unit 2 rectifiers modules
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
On DC voltage outputs, no fuses are required because the 1696MS_C has on his PSC unit fuses on inputs. The outputs are connected together, so they can protect each all the DC outputs.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390
The Control Unit must be able to provide the following functions deliver 2 outputs 48VDC transmit alarms to the host (FAN_C board) manage the battery manage Status Leds.
DC output 1
AC input 1 M5
+ +
M1 M2 DC output 2
AC input 2 M6
+ Batt M3 Discarge Protect Batt To Batt
AC in1 presence AC in2 presence Batt presence Control Unit M4 Alarms
Figure 209. PMU block diagram
4.9.1 Batteries for PMU Batteries are optional units used with the PMU in order to supply the 48V to the 1696MS_C in case of power outage of the alternative power source (100V/115V/220V supply). Battery units are linked to the Control unit of the PMU by cascading the units. The first battery gives a temperature measurement of the unit to the PMU so as to generate an alarm when out of the range. It is possible to add up to three optional batteries. This depends of the current consumption of the shelves (150W per battery).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Performance. The battery must be charged in a maximum of 15 hours with 1 PMU and 1 shelf. The battery must be charged in a maximum of 60 hours with 1 PMU and 4 shelves. The Battery duration for 150W must be of 3 hours.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 310 / 390
Two rectifiers modules are present in one PMU. Each modules is able to supply with power up to 4 stacked 1696MS_C. One module enables to supply the 4 stacked shelves. If one module fails, the other one can still supply the 4 shelves.
Mechanical dimension of each battery: W = 446.02 mm; L = 284 mm; H = 133.35 mm. Batteries can be inserted in a 19, 21 (ETSI) and 23 (ANSI) rack or put on table.
In Rack Version, the batteries are located below the PMU.

6 5 4 3 2 1 in2 RECTIFIER 1 RECTIFIER 2 12 PSC(2) 11 10 9 8 7 PSC(2)
CONTROL UNIT
F A N _C
13
PMU
in1
Battery with captor of temperature Optional
48Vdc
Figure 210. Minimum configuration of the batteries in 1696MS_C Rel. 2.2, rack version In table version, batteries are located and stacked besides the PMU and 1696MS_C shelves; only this configuration is supported since a battery is not likely to hold the full stack of batteries, PMU and shelves.
6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 in2 RECTIFIER 1 RECTIFIER 2 12 PSC(2) 11 10 9 8 7 PSC(2) 12 PSC(2) 11 10 9 8 7 PSC(2) 12 PSC(2) 11 10 9 8 7 PSC(2)
CONTROL UNIT
F A N _C
48Vdc 48Vdc 48Vdc 48Vdc
Optional Battery
13
F A N _C
48Vdc
Optional Battery
13
F A N _C
13 in1
Battery with captor of temperature Optional
PMU
Figure 211. Maximum configuration of the batteries in 1696MS_C Rel. 2.2, table version
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 311 / 390
4.10 FANS unit

4.10.1 FANC unit for 1696MS shelf As the power consumption of the transponder is high enough (about 2025 W / unit), fans are necessary to dissipate the heat. The fans are located at the bottom of the shelf. The use of fans requires to put an air filter just below. This is shown on Figure 212.
FANS
Air filter Figure 212. Fan shelf description and Rack partitioning One FAN module is placed at the bottom of the shelf, in the slot 49. The FANS are monitored via SPI bus and some direct wires are sent to the House Keeping/Remote Alarms module to monitor a possible failure of the cooling system. Max Power dissipation per shelf: 400 W.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 312 / 390
ESC OMDX + EXP + SPV OMDX TRSNAPONDER TRANSPONDER TRANSPONDER TRANSPONDER TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER TRANSPONDER TRANSPONDER OAC (OPTIONAL) OAC (OPTIONAL) TRSNAPONDER TRANSPONDER TRANSPONDER TRANSPONDER TRANSPONDER TRANSPONDER TRANSPONDER TRANSPONDER
4.10.2 FAN_C unit for 1696MS_C shelf On the 1696MS_C shelf, FAN unit is located on the left side of the compact shelf. The use of fans requires to put an air filter just below.
Air filter
OOADM1ch+OSCE FAN_C OOADM1ch+OSCW SPV managenement TRNSPONDER TRNSPONDER ESC
PSC(2) Hk RAI OPC Lan_Q PSC(2)
Figure 213. FAN_C description and Rack partitioning FAN_C unit takes place in the left slot of 1696MS_C shelf and is equipped with two fans with speedometer sensor to dissipate the heat coming from Transponder and 4xANY boards essentially. FAN_C board is mandatory provided. FAN_C board enables the link to the Power Management Unit (PMU) which is an external frame containing the rectifier AC/DC to enable the plugging in the main supply). The logical alarms generated by the PMU (PMU presence, Minor and Major) are sent to the FAN_C boards SPIDER where they are red by the shelf Controller (ESC). This alarm is used by the software to inhibit or not both others. If the alarm is not raised, (PMU absent), the MAJOR and MINOR alarms are inhibited. MINOR (resp. MAJOR) alarm means that one (resp. two) rectifier is defective or out of the functioning range.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 313 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
314 / 390
5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 5.1 1696MSPAN System characteristics

5.1.1 Main system characteristics General Optical bit rate, client side MCC2, MCC3 MCC1 the bit rates indicated with (*) are 3R, the others are 2R (MCC1 only) any bit rate between 100Mbps and 2.66Gbps (*) 100 Mbps 125 Mbps 132.815 Mbps 155.520 Mbps 200.00 Mbps 265.620 Mbps 270 Mbps 275.176 Mbps 400.352 Mbps 466.560 Mbps 531.250 Mbps 622.080 Mbps 933.120 Mbps 1062.5 Mbps 1244.160 Mbps 1250 Mbps 1866.240 Mbps 2125.00 Mbps 2488.320 Mbps 2500 Mbps 9953.28 Mbps 10.3125 Gbps 125 Mbps 155.520 Mbps 200.00 Mbps 270 Mbps 622.080 Mbps 1062.5 Mbps 1250 Mbps : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : FDDI Fast Ethernet, FDDI FC (12-M6LEI) STM1/OC3 (*) ESCON FC (25-M6LLI) Digital Video (DTV) / HDTV DS4 J5 OC9 FC (50-M5SLI) STM4/OC12 (*) OC18 Fiber Channel / FICON (*) OC24 Gigabit Ethernet (*) OC36 2FC (*) STM16/OC48 (*) Infiniband STM64/OC192/10 GBE WAN (*) 10 GBE LAN (*) Fast Ethernet, FDDI (*) STM1/OC3 (*) ESCON (*) Digital Video (DTV) / HDTV (*) STM4/OC12 (*) Fiber Channel / FICON (*) Gigabit Ethernet (*)
0CC10 4xANY
Optical bit rate, WDM side MCC1/MCC2/MCC3/ MCC_RGN the same of all the clients bit rates, in the correspondent wavelength ()
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
4xANY OCC10
2488.320 Mbps 10.709 Gbps 11.096 Gbps
: : :
STM16 / OC48 STM64/OC192/10 GBE WAN + FEC 10 GBE LAN + FEC
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 315 / 390
Type of optical fiber
According to ITUT G.652, G.653, G.654, G.655
Central frequencies and wavelength see Table 43. on page 320 Application types Terminal Multiplexer (LT), backtoback terminals (HUB), OADM in protected and unprotected linear links and rings, In Line Amplifier, CPE Electrical interfaces: 2Mbps G.703, 64Kbps (user channels) Optical interfaces: all the client and WDM interfaces above listed
Interfaces types Applied standards ITUT Recommendation G.681 ITUT Recommendation G.692 ITUT Recommendation G.693 ITUT Recommendation G.709 ITUT Recommendation G.957 ITUT Recommendation G.958 ETS 300 232 A1 GR 253 CORE IEEE G.802.3 ANSI x 3.184 1993 standards
Functional characteristics of interoffice and longhaul line systems using optical amplifiers, including optical multiplexing Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers Optical interfaces for intraofficesystems Network Node Interface for the Optical Transport Network (OTN) Optical interfaces for equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fibre cables Transmission and multiplexing; Optical interfaces for equipments and systems relating to the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic Criteria, issue 2C Gigabit Ethernet specification FE and FDDI specification
ANSI x 3.320 standard (100SMLLI) FC and FICON specification IBM SA039403 ITUT BT.6564, BT13631, BT1367 SMPTE 292M1998 IEEE 802.3 GR 63 CORE ITUT Recommendation G.664 IEC 825 EN 60950 GR 1089 CORE pr ETS 300 3861 pr ETS 300 38622
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ESCON specification Digital Video specification Television Bit Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications Network Equipment Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical Protection, issue 1 Optical Safety procedures and requirements for optical transport systems Safety of laser products Safety of information technology equipment, including electrical business equipment Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunication equipment Equipment Engineering ; Public telecommunication network equipment. Electromagnetic compatibility requirements: Part 1 : Product family overview, compliance criteria and test levels Part 22 : Product specific compliance criteria and operating conditions Transmission equipment, Version : 0.7, 1996.02.29 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the synchronous digital hierarchy to be published
ITUT Recommendation G.825
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 316 / 390
SMPTE RP1841996 T11/98 055

Specification of Jitter in BitSerial Digital Systems Fiber Channel Methodologies for Jitter Specification Limits and methods of measurement of radio interference characteristics of information technology equipment Equipment Engineering: Environmental conditions and environmental tests for telecommunications equipment. Classification of environmental conditions (storage/transportation/stationary use)
EN 55022 ETS 300 01911 ETS 300 01912 ETS 300 01913
AddDrop and CrossConnect features Connectivity Tributary to Mux/Demux wavelength assigment Mux/Demux to Mux/Demux wavelength assigment Tributary to tributary wavelength assigment Loopbacks
Protections Network protections Equipment optical protections Optical SNCP 1+1 1+1 1+1 1+1 1+1 1+1 1+1 MCC1 / MCC2 / MCC3 MCC + 4xANY (only MCC is protected) 4xANY (each client/drawer can be protected) (MCC2 / MCC3) + OAC OCC10 OCC10 + OAC Power Supply Card
Powering protections Management interfaces Functions provided
Q3 interf with PC (ECT/RECT), 1353SH and 1354RM NMS (on terminal) Station alarms Equipment Alarm status (indicated by the front cover LEDs) Visual indications for card fail. Q3/TL1 to connect a Local or Remote Equipment Craft Terminal Ethernet (on LAN_Q board) to connect the OS 1353SH and other ALCATEL NEs with ETHERNET Interface QECC to connect other Q3 NEs
Management interfaces supported:
Local interface: Remote interface:
Craft Interface (PC) Craft Interface (PC)
RS232 SUBD 9pin, PC compatible at 9600 bps RS232 SUBD 9pin, PC compatible at 9600 bps. It handles up to 32 NEs via DCC (D1BD3 and/or D4BD12) ITUT G.773 10 base2 and 10 baseT Q3/QECC or TL1
Remote interface: Protocol Stack/Information Model messages
Transmission Management Network (TMN) interface
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 317 / 390
Operation processes (management interfaces functions) Configuration and provisioning Equipment, Units; AddDrop; Crossconnection, Synchronization, Protection, Alarms status, Maintenance memory for all the equipment events It is made locally as well as remotely on non volatile memories without traffic interruption According to ITUT G.784, G.826, , G.821, M.2101.1 At rack, subrack and board level
Software download Performance monitoring (on B1 byte) Remote Inventory
Unit and equipment acknowledgement Through Remote Inventory: Company id, Unit type, Unit part number, Software part number, CLEI code, Manufacturing Plant, Date Identifier, Date of construction... For details, refer to the operators handbook Security Unit substitution characteristics For transponders, optical amplifiers without traffic interruption in case of Optical SNCP and Mux/Demux For 4xANY Housekeeping (HK) Number of housekeeping accesses Connector 8 inputs and 8 outputs SUBD 25 pins without traffic interruption if all 4xANY drawers/clients are protected Password, operator profile, back up for programs and data
Output HK signalsCPO (Remote By electronic relay contacts to be connected to the external negative voltage alarms used for remote control) Max. guaranteed current with 50 mA closed condition Max. allowed voltage with open 72 V condition Voltage drop vs ground with 2 V 0 V closed condition
Input housekeeping signals (CPI) Max. guaranteed current with 3 mA closed condition Max. allowed voltage with open 72 V condition Voltage drop vs ground with 2 V 0 V closed condition
Rack Alarms (RAI) Connector SUBD 9 pins
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Max. guaranteed current with closed 100 mA condition Voltage difference between Common out and OUT < 2,5 Volts Resistance of the closed relay = 300 Mohm max Max. allowed voltage with open condition 72 V
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 318 / 390
Automatic shutdown According to IEC 825 and ITUT Rec. G.958 regarding ALS
Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) characteristics Digital signal Nominal bit rate Coding SPV Optical Path Attenuation range Maximum dispersion Maximum reflectance Minimum ORL of cable plant at S, including any connector SPV Receiver specification Sensitivity @ BER = 109 Overload @ BER = 109 Maximum receiver reflectance SPV Transmitter specification Type of source Wavelength Maximum 20 dB width DFB 1510"10 nm 1 nm 50 dBm 47 dBm 6 dBm 28 dBm 9 49 dB 4000 ps/nm 27 dB 24 dB 4 864 kbit/s (default configuration) => 2Mb for LAPD + 2 Mb for User asynchr. scrambled (2151) + synchronous scrambled (271) NRZ
Minimum side mode suppression ratio 33 dB Optical Output power Minimum Extinction Ratio Clock characteristics Transponders support 3R regeneration. External clock is not required 1 dBm +4 dBm 8.2 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 319 / 390
Table 43. Nominal frequencies allocation plan in CBand Band Central frequency (GHz) Channel Number (Craft terminal name) 192,000 20 192,100 192,200 192,300 L2 192,500 192,600 192,700 192,800 BLUE BAND 193,000 193,100 193,200 193,300 L1 193,500 193,600 193,700 193,800 194,200 194,300 194,400 194,500 S2 194,700 194,800 194,900 195,000 RED BAND 195,200 195,300 195,400 195,500 S1 195,700 195,800 195,900
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
21 22 23 25 26 27 28 30 31 32 33 35 36 37 38 42 43 44 45 47 48 49 50 52 53 54 55 57 58 59 60
1560,61 1559,79 1558,98 1557,36 1556,55 1555,75 1554,94 1553,33 1552,52 1551,72 1550,92 1549,32 1548,51 1547,72 1546,92 1543,73 1542,94 1542,14 1541,35 1539,77 1538,98 1538,19 1537,40 1535,82 1535,04 1534,25 1533,47 1531,90 1531,12 1530,33 1529,55
196,000
The MCC transponders support two channels each. 16 different boards are able to cover the 32 ch. The OCC10 transponders support one channel each. 32 different boards are needed to cover the 32 ch.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 320 / 390
Central wavelength (nm) wavelength deviation : "0,12 nm (EOL) 1561,42
Main Optical transmission levels
Client signals
Up to 32
VOA* is used with MCC2 only
DWDM line MUX DMUX

Booster Line Tx
VOA*
User Rx User Tx
WDM Tx
Transponder
WDM Rx
Preamp
Line Rx
Optical levels
User Rx (MCC): sensitivity (BER = 1010) overload (BER = 1010) User Tx (MCC): output power (minimal): output power (maximal): WDM Rx (MCC): sensitivity (BER = 1010): overload (BER = 1010): WDM Tx (MCC): output power (minimal): output power (nominal): output power (maximal): (MCC2 and MCC3) with VOA using output power minimal: (chip access) 18 dBm 0 dBm 5 dBm 0 dBm 28 dBm 8 dBm 6 dBm 6.5 dBm 9 dBm
MCC
14 dBm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 321 / 390
User Rx (OCC10), including transmission penalty: 13 dBm sensitivity (BER = 1012) 12) 0 dBm overload (BER = 10 User Tx (OCC10): output power (minimal): output power (maximal): 6 dBm 1 dBm
OCC10
WDM Rx (OCC10) after FEC, including transmission penalty: 13 dBm sensitivity (BER = 1012): 5 dBm overload (BER = 1012) WDM Tx (OCC10), VOA min: output power (minimal): output power (maximal): (OCC10) with VOA using output power minimal: (chip access) 4 dBm +1.5 dBm 24 dBm
Line Rx without optical amplification: input power (minimal): input power (maximal): Line Tx without optical amplification: output power (minimal): output power (maximal): Line Rx with optical amplification: input power (minimal): input power (maximal): Line Tx with optical amplification: output power (minimal): output power (maximal):
19 dBm 15 dBm 19 dBm 15 dBm 32 dBm 17 dBm 2 dBm 17 dBm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 322 / 390
5.2 Safety requirements and mechanism

5.2.1 Electrical safety The electrical and mechanical safety is compliant with the requirements of the EN 60 950 Standard [17] and the NEBS Level 3 Bellcore GR63 [19] and GR1089 [20] Standard. Electrical safety Safety status of the connections with TNV (Telecommunication Network Voltage) for Remote alarms, Housekeeping (CPO,CPI), Rack lamps (RM) and tributary connecother equipment tions if K20 protected. SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) for all the other.
5.2.2 Optical safety 5.2.2.1 Hazard Level classification and standards The HAZARD LEVEL of different ports of the system is widely treated in UNIT DESCRIPTION of this Technical Handbook (see paragraphs Automatic shutdown and automatic shutdown for each unit). HAZARD LEVEL classification: HAZARD LEVEL 1M, according to IEC 608251 (1998) + Am. 2 (2001), IEC 608252 (2000) and ITUT Rec. G.664 standards or HAZARD LEVEL 3A, according to IEC 608251 (1998), IEC 608252 (2000)
can be assigned to all ports of the system with the exception of the 4xANY boards, classified as HAZARD LEVEL 1 laser products. G.664 standard defines two kinds of optical safety mechanisms : Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) : Procedure to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels. Automatic Power ShutDown (APSD) : Procedure to automatically shutdown the output power of optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels. In order to be clearer, in the following paragraphs, safety procedure for transponders is called ALS safety procedure for amplifiers is called APSD. 5.2.2.2 Equipment classification The 1696MSPAN equipment is classified as hazard level 1M (optical power in the [10 21.3] dBm range). 1696MS_C equipment is also classified as hazard level 1M. N.B. The classification refers to the IEC 608251 and IEC 608252 Standards. The OSC alone is classified as hazard level 1.
5.2.2.3 Location type

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The equipment shall be installed in restricted location (industrial and commercial premises) or controlled locations (optical cable ducts and switching centers).
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 323 / 390
5.2.2.4 Labelling The labeling of the optical sources is compliant with the requirements of the IEC 60825 Standard. The labels reported below are put during factory settings. The labels are affixed on all front covers that protect optical connectors located on the front side plate of all the units involved in optical transmission: The optical interfaces which have HAZARD LEVEL 1 the following explanatory label
The following label indicates the presence of a LASER beam. If the laser is a Hazard Level 1 or 1M product, this label is not compulsory.
Example of EXPLANATORY label. The optical interfaces which have HAZARD LEVEL 1M according to IEC 608251 (2001), IEC 608252 (2000) and ITUT Rec. G.664 standards and operate at 3rd window, carry the following explanatory label
The optical interfaces which have HAZARD LEVEL 3A according to IEC 608251 (1998), IEC 608252 (2000) and operate at 3rd window, carry the following explanatory label
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 324 / 390
5.2.2.5 Engineering design features In normal operating conditions, unless intentional manumission, the laser radiation is never accessible.
The laser beam is launched in optical fibre through an opposite connector that totally shuts up the laser radiation. In case of cable fibre break, to minimize exposure times, ALS procedure is implemented depending on the location where the fibre break occurred. ALS procedures are explained in 5.2.2.8, where shutdown and reactivation times are also reported. 5.2.2.6 Safety instructions The safety instructions for proper assembly, maintenance and safe use including clear warning concerning precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser radiation, are reported on: section 3.2.4 on page 26 thru 27, as far as this handbook is concerned the appropriate parts of the other handbooks envisaged for this equipment (see section 5.2.2.7).
5.2.2.7 Automatic power shutdown with amplifiers The APSD procedure for the 1696MS amplifiers is not implemented in current release: according to the IEC 60825 standard, APSD is not mandatory. 5.2.2.8 Automatic Laser Shutdown at WDM side (ALS_WDM) with transponders The ALS procedure is compliant with ITUT G.664 recommendation. In the 1696MSPAN the ALS procedure is proposed by the transponder cards (MCC and OCC10). The WDM receiver shuts down the WDM transmitter in the opposite direction when it detects an Input Loss Of Signal (ILOS, i.e.: optical input power MCC1, MCC2 and OCC10 is too low) or a loss of clock (LOC) for MCC2 and OCC10. The shutdown of all the transponders on the affected link is carried within less than 3 s, as required by the ITUT Rec. G.664. It is up to the user to enable or disable the ALS. The default configuration is ALSdisable. The possible ALS mode are: ALS disable with laser ON ALS disable with laser OFF ALS disable (default configuration) ALS enable. During the ALS procedure, the OSC is still working. This configuration is done at equipment point of view and can be sent transponder by transponder or for a set of transponders. The ALS is implemented in WDM terminal and OADM sites in order to have a safety mechanism independent from the host systems. During ALS, the optional OSC is still working. In case of fiber break, a mechanism is proposed in order to shutdown the transponders in the previous site, before the fiber break.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In case of regenerators (backtoback terminals) and OADM, the way of working is the same. The ALS procedure is done in the section when the fiber failure occurred. The WDM receiver shutdowns the WDM transmitter in the opposite direction when it detects a Loss Of Signal (LOS) (MCC1, MCC2, OCC10) or a Loss Of Clock (LOC) (MCC2, OCC10).
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 325 / 390
5.2.2.8.1 ALS in nonamplified networks In pointtopoint configuration, ALS is performed in four steps (see Figure 214. ): (1) ILOS detection at Rx WDM access of an MCC/OCC10 board of the terminal B and LOC detection at WDM Tx access B (if in passthrough configuration). (2) ShutDown (SD) command sent to the Tx WDM access of all the terminal B MCC/OCC10 boards of the opposite transmission direction. (3) Shutting Down all the Tx WDM access of the terminal B (step (2)), causes an ILOS detection at Rx WDM access and a LOC detection at WDM Tx access of the MCC/OCC10 boards of the terminal A (if in pass through configuration). (4) ShutDown (SD) command sent to the Tx WDM access of all the MCC/OCC10 boards of the terminal A.
TX WDM SD (4) RX WDM All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
T R A N S P O N
T R
M U X
D M U X
ILOS LOC A (1) N S P O N (2) D SD E TX WDM R
(3) D LOC ILOS E RX R WDM
D M U X
M U X
terminal A (16 or 32 ch.)

SD stands for ShutDown ILOS stands for Input Loss Of Signal LOC stands for Los Of Clock
terminal B (16 or 32 ch.)
Figure 214. ALS mechanism on WDM line in pointtopoint configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 326 / 390
For a circuit with regeneration/passthrough, ALS is performed in eight steps as described in the following (see Figure 215. ):
(1) ILOS detection at RX WDM access of an MCC/OCC10 board of the terminal B and LOC detection at WDM Tx access. (2) ShutDown (SD) command sent to the Tx WDM access of all the MCC/OCC10 boards of the same transmission direction and ShutDown (SD) command sent to the Tx WDM access of the opposite transmission direction. (3) ILOS detection at Rx WDM access of all MCC/OCC10 boards of the 16 ch. terminal or LOC detection at Tx B&W. (4) Shutting Down on a Tx WDM access and Tx B&W access of the 16 ch. terminal.
passtrough channels
RX B&W TX WDM (4) SD D M U X M U X RX WDM (1) ILOS TX WDM LOC (2)SD M U X D M U X
M U X D M U X
(4) SD (3) ILOS TX RX B&W WDM
(2) SD TX WDM
RX WDM
16 channels terminal
passtrough channels (terminal B))
Figure 215. ALS in OADM configuration, channel in passthrough or in add/drop The ALS mode for passthrough MCCs/OCC10s must be disabled to insure reliable automatic restart. Note also that ILOS is propagated through the passthrough MCCs/OCC10s even if the ALS mode is disable.
ALS and LOS propagation are 2 inpedendant procedures.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 327 / 390
The ALS procedure in a ring with OSNCP, is the same of the previous case (circuit with regeneration/ passthrough) and the SD on the end node generates a (5) protection switch (see Figure 216. ).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. M U X D M U X (1) ILOS (2) SD TX WDM RX WDM LOC ILOS TX SD WDM RX WDM D M U X M U X
D M U X M U X
TX WDM
RX B&W
RX B&W
TX WDM (4) SD
M U X D M U X
RX WDM
TX B&W
(4) SD (3) ILOS TX RX B&W WDM
(5)
protection request
D M U X M U X
TX WDM
RX B&W
RX B&W
TX WDM SD
M U X D M U X
RX WDM
TX B&W
SD TX B&W
ILOS RX WDM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(5)
protection request
Figure 216. ALS procedure in a ring with Optical SNCP, in case of fiber failure in the ring
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 328 / 390
5.2.2.8.2 ALS in amplified networks See Figure 217. , Figure 218. and Figure 219. ALS for transponders is supported in amplified networks. On the contrary, APSD is not supported for amplifiers. However, in the particular case of pointtopoint amplified transmission without OADM repeater, ALS procedure is enough to provide optical safety thanks to LOS propagation. Amplifiers must be in APSD disable state.
SD stands for ShutDown ILOS stands for Input Loss Of Signal LOC stands for Los Of Clock TX WDM SD ILOS1 M U X D M U X 1 ILOS2 SD1 2 SD2 RX WDM LOC ILOS
D M U X
LOC ILOS RX WDM
SD2
2 SD1 ILOS2
1 ILOS1
M U X
SD TX WDM
Figure 217. ALS procedure in a pointtopoint amplified transmission without OADM repeater
SD stands for ShutDown ILOS stands for Input Loss Of Signal LOC stands for Los Of Clock TX WDM SD ILOS1 M U X D M U X 1 ILOS2 SD1 2 SD2 ILOS1 1 ILOS2 SD1 2 SD2 RX WDM LOC ILOS
D M U X
LOC ILOS RX WDM
SD2
2 SD1 ILOS2
1 ILOS1
SD2
SD1 ILOS2
1 ILOS1
M U X
SD TX WDM
Figure 218. ALS mechanism with cascaded preamplifier and booster

SD stands for ShutDown ILOS stands for Input Loss Of Signal LOC stands for Los Of Clock TX WDM SD ILOS2 M U X D M U X 2 SD2 ILOS1 1 SD1 RX WDM LOC ILOS
D M U X
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LOC ILOS RX WDM
SD1
1 ILOS1
SD2
2 ILOS2
M U X
SD TX WDM
Figure 219. ALS mechanism with single preamplifier and booster
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 329 / 390
5.2.2.8.3 ALS restart concept After an ALS occurs, one restart mode is available: Automatic restart. The time values and the restart way of working in the various restart schemes are described in Figure 220. The restart way of working is defined at equipment point of view. As the ALS is done at MCC/OCC10 unit level, each transponder board will restart independently. When OAC are used, the restart procedure is done by the amplifier board. During the switch on and the switch off time, the channel wavelength remains between ITU 500 pm. Start
Section in operation ALS_WDM enable
Yes
Receive signal from far end? No
No
Loss of received signal for more than 500 ms ? Yes Automatic Power Shut Down Automatic restart
Delay time 180"20 s
Tx on for (20"0.5) s
Figure 220. Restart algorithm The figures of the ALS timing are compliant with the ITUT Rec.G.664. The standard recommends a pulse length of 2s except in the case of amplified network where the pulse length can be greater ( 6.3 of the standard).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 330 / 390
5.3 Boards interfaces characteristics

5.3.1 Tributaries optical characteristics 5.3.1.1 Multirate Channel Card (MCC1, MCC2, MCC3, MCC_RGN) characteristics
Optical interfaces specification, User side (MCC_RGN doesnt have B&W interfaces)
Common optical interfaces specification, user side Bit rate, client side with MCC2 and MCC3 using, all the bit rates are 3R with MCC1 using, (*) indicates the 3R bit rates 100 Mbps : FDDI 125 Mbps : Fast Ethernet, FDDI 132.815 Mbps : FC (12-M6LEI) 155.520 Mbps : STM1/OC3 (*) 200 Mbps : ESCON 265.620 Mbps : FC (25-M6LLI) 270 Mbps : Digital Video 466.560 Mbps : OC9 531.250 Mbps : FC (50-M5SLI) 622.080 Mbps : STM4/OC12 (*) 933.120 Mbps : OC18 1062.5 Mbps : FICON (*), Fiber Channel (*) 1244.160 Mbps : OC24 1250 Mbps : Gigabit Ethernet (*) 1866.120 Mbps : OC36 2125.00 Mbps : 2FC (*) 2488.320 Mbps : STM16/OC48 (*) 2500 Mbps : INFINIBAND 1260 B 1360 nm 1470 B 1610 nm for CWDM S16.1 MU horizontal for MCC1, MCC2 LC (on SFP module) for MCC3 MCC1 18 dBm 0 dBm 1 dB 27 dB MCC1 1 nm 30 dB min : 5 dBm max : 0 dBm 8.2 dB < 5 ms < 30 ms 1 nm 30 dB min : 4.5 dBm max : 0 dBm 8.2 dB < 5 ms < 30 ms see para. 5.3.1.3 on page 335 MCC2 18 dBm 0 dBm 1 dB 27 dB MCC2 MCC3 Singlemode (SMF) MCC3 see para. 5.3.1.3 on page 335 Multimode (MMF) 62.5 / 125 um 1010 1010
Wavelength range User interface type Connector type User Rx : optical interfaces specification Fiber type Sensitivity @ BER = Overload @ BER =
Maximum optical path penalty Maximum receiver reflectance User Tx : optical interfaces specification Fiber type Maximum 20 dB width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Optical Output power
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Minimum Extinction Ratio Shutdown time Reactivation time
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 331 / 390
Optical interfaces specification, WDM Side

Common optical interfaces specification, WDM side User interface type Wavelength specification Wavelength tunability Transmitter wavelength range Fiber type Connector type Center frequency L16.2 ITUT G.692, 100 GHz channel spacing tunable over 2 wavelengths 1528 B 1565 nm Singlemode (SMF) MU horizontal 19x.y THz; for details refer to Table 43. on page 320 and para. 5.3.2.1 on page 344, para. 5.3.2.2 on page 346, para. 5.3.2.3 on page 347 transparent (output bit rate equals input bit rate) MCC1 28 dBm 8 dBm 2 dB 2 dB 27 dB MCC1 1800 ps/nm 1 nm 30 dB typ : 6.5 dBm min : 6 dBm max : 7 dBm 8.2 dB "12.3 GHz 27 dB MCC2/MCC3/MCC_RGN 3200 ps/nm 1 nm 30 dB typ : 6.5 dBm min : 6 dBm max : 9 dBm typ : 5.7 dBm min : 5.2 dBm max : 8.2 dBm 8.2 dB "12.3 GHz MCC2/MCC3/MCC_RGN 28 dBm 8 dBm
Bit rate, WDM side WDM Rx : optical interfaces specification Sensitivity @ BER = 1010 (OSNR = 19 dB) Overload @ BER = 1010 Maximum optical path penalty (over 1800 ps/nm) Maximum optical path penalty (up to 3200 ps/nm) Maximum receiver reflectance WDM Tx : optical interfaces specification Dispersion accommodation Maximum 20 dB width with modulation Minimum side mode suppression ratio Optical Output power
Optical power at board output w/ minimum VOA
Minimum Extinction Ratio Maximum EOL Center Frequency Deviation N.B.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
the values are given for EOL characteristics
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 332 / 390
5.3.1.2 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card (OCC10) characteristics
Optical interfaces specification, User side

Common optical interfaces specification, user side Bit rate, client side 9953.28 Mbps 10.709 Gbps 10.3125 Gbps 11.096 Gbps : STM64/OC192/10 GBE WAN :(STM64/OC192/10GBEWAN)+FEC : 10 GBE LAN : 10 GBE LAN + FEC
User interface type Fiber type Connector type User Rx : optical interfaces specification Wavelength range Sensitivity @ BER = 1012 including PP Overload @ BER = 1012 Maximum optical path penalty Maximum receiver reflectance User Tx : optical interfaces specification Wavelength range Maximum 20 dB width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Optical Output power
VSR20002R1 standard (similar to I64.1) Singlemode (SMF) MU horizontal
1260 B 1360 nm 13 dBm 0 dBm 1 dB 27 dB
1290 B 1330 nm 1 nm 30 dB min : 6 dBm max : 1 dBm 20 Km 6 dB < 5 ms < 30 ms
Transmission length Minimum Extinction Ratio Shutdown time Reactivation time
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 333 / 390
Optical interfaces specification, WDM Side

Common optical interfaces specification, WDM side WDM interface type Wavelength specification Transmitter wavelength range Center frequency Bit rate, WDM side Fiber type Connector type L64.2 ITUT G.692, 100 GHz channel spacing. The board is tunable over 1 wavelength 1528 B 1565 nm 19x.y THz; for details refer to Table 43. on page 320 10709 Mbps Singlemode (SMF) MU horizontal
WDM Rx : optical interfaces specification (board input) DTV (Decision Threshold voltage) is used to deal with transmission degraded by chromatic dispersion and optical noise. In R. 2.2 there are two configurable operating points. The VOA placed before the Rx is automatically controlled in order to maintain its otput power constant. The following specification are given for a Tx + Rx couple. Sensitivity @ BER = 1012 after FEC correction in- 13 dBm cluding PP and OSNR = 19 dB Overload @ BER = 1010 VOA dynamic range 5 dBm 20 dB
Maximum optical path penalty (over 500 up to 2 dB 1600 ps/nm) Maximum receiver reflectance 27 dB
WDM Tx : optical interfaces specification (board output) In order to provide a wide range chromatic dispersion tolerance, two operating points corresponding to high chromatic dispersion and to low chromatic dispersion. NDC configuration Max EOL center frequency deviation Dispersion (NDC not configurable in R.2.0) OSNR = 19 dB OSNR = 21 dB Maximum 20 dB width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Optical Output power (VOA at min) VOA dynamic range (configurable)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NDC0 $100 pm 0 B +1300 ps/nm 0 B +1600 ps/nm
NDC1
500 B +800 ps/nm 0.3 nm 30 dB
4 B +1.5 dBm
2.5 B +3 dBm 20 dB, step 1 8.2 dB
Minimum Extinction Ratio N.B. All the figures are EOL
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 334 / 390
5.3.1.3 SPF modules optical characteristics
SFP module type

APD CWDM (Silver)

0 5 125 Mbps to 2.7 Gbps 8.2 1 30 1600 28 9 2 27 LC SMF S4.1 GbeSx GbeLx 1310 850 9.5 4 1250 8.2 7 3 27 LC MMF 1310 11 3 1250 9 19 3 27 LC FCS 850 10 1 1062.5 9 16 0 27 LC
PIN CWDM (Bronze)

0 5 125 Mbps to 2.7 Gbps 8.2 1 30 1000 18 3 1 27 LC SMF FCL 1310 12 3 1062.5 9 25 3 27 LC SMF I16.1 1310 15 8 2488 8.2 18 3 27 LC SMF S16.1 1310 5 0 2488 8.2 18 3 27 LC SMF MS16.1 1310 5 0 100 to 2700 8.2 18 3 27 LC SMF
Addressed wavelength (nm) Min. launched power (dBm) Max launched power (dBm) Allowed bitrates Min. extinction ratio (dB) Max. 20dB bandwidth (nm) Minimum SMSR (dB) Max chromatic disp. (ps/nm) Minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Max optic. path penalty (dB) Max receiver reflect. (dB) Optical connector (Tx/Rx) Fiber type
1470, 1490, 1510, 1530, 1550, 1570, 1590, 1610
SFP module type

Addressed wavelength (nm)
Min. launched power (dBm) 15 Max launched power (dBm) 8 Allowed bit rates (Mbps) Min. extinction ratio (dB) Minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Max receiver reflect. (dB) Optical connector (Tx/Rx) Fiber type 622 8.2 28 8 27 LC SMF
SMF/MMF MMF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 335 / 390
5.3.1.4 4 x ANY, 4 x ANY_S, 4xANY_P TDM Concentrators characteristics
Drawers Rx : 1310 nm optical interfaces specification

Drawer Rx : common 1310 nm optical interfaces specification Fiber type Optical connector type Multimode 62.5 / 125 m (MMF) LC
Drawer Rx : Low Frequency 1310 nm cartridge specification (Rx) Data rate 125 Mbps ($100ppm) : Fast Ethernet, FDDI 200 Mbps ($100ppm) : ESCON 270 Mbps ($100ppm) : Digital Video 1270 B 1380 nm -28 dBm -8 dBm NA dB 12.5 dB
Operating wavelength Sensitivity @ BER = 1010 Overload @ BER = 1010 Maximum optical path penalty Maximum receiver reflectance
Drawer Rx : STM1, STM4 1310 nm cartridge specification (Rx) Data rate 155.520 Mbps ($20ppm) : STM1 622.080 Mbps ($20ppm) : STM4 1270 B 1380 nm -28 dBm -8 dBm NA dB
Drawer Rx : High Frequency 1310 nm cartridge specification (Rx) Data rate 1025 Gbps ($100ppm) : Gigabit Ethernet 1062.5 Gbps ($100ppm) : FICON, Fiber Channel 1270 B 1355 nm -20 dBm -3 dBm NA dB 12 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 336 / 390
Drawers Tx : 1310 nm optical interfaces specification

Drawer Tx : common 1310 nm optical interfaces specification
Fiber type Laser type Optical connector type
Singlemode 9 / 125 m (SMF) Class 1 Laser Safety LC
Drawer Tx : Low Frequency 1310 nm cartridge specification Data rate 125 Mbps ($100ppm) : Fast Ethernet, FDDI 200 Mbps ($100ppm) : ESCON 270 Mbps ($100ppm) : Digital Video 1270 B 1356 nm 2.5 nm NA dB min : 15 dBm max : 8 dBm 8.2 dB < 5 ms < 30 ms
Central wavelength Maximum RMS width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Optical Output power Minimum Extinction Ratio Shutdown time Reactivation time
Drawer Tx : STM1, STM4 1310 nm cartridge specification Data rate Central wavelength Maximum RMS width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Optical Output power Minimum Extinction Ratio Shutdown time Reactivation time 155.520 Mbps ($20ppm) : STM1 622.080 Mbps ($20ppm) : STM4 1270 B 1356 nm 2.5 nm NA dB min : 15 dBm max : 8 dBm 8.2 dB < 5 ms < 30 ms
Drawer Tx : High Frequency 1310 nm cartridge specification Data rate Central wavelength Maximum RMS width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Optical Output power Minimum Extinction Ratio Shutdown time Reactivation time 1025 Gbps ($100ppm) : Gigabit Ethernet 1062.5 Gbps ($100ppm) : FICON, Fiber Channel 1270 B 1355 nm 4 nm NA dB min : 12 dBm max : 3 dBm 9 dB < 5 ms < 30 ms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 337 / 390
Drawers Rx : 850 nm optical interfaces specification

Drawer Rx : common 850 nm optical interfaces specification Fiber type Optical connector type Multimode 62.5 / 125 m (MMF) LC
Drawer Rx : Low Frequency 850 nm cartridge specification Data rate 125 Mbps ($100ppm) : Fast Ethernet, FDDI 200 Mbps ($100ppm) : ESCON 270 Mbps ($100ppm) : Digital Video 770 B 860 nm -17 dBm 0 dBm NA dB 12 dB
Drawer Rx : High Frequency 850 nm cartridge specification Data rate 1025 Gbps ($100ppm) : Gigabit Ethernet 1062.5 Gbps ($100ppm) : FICON, Fiber Channel 830 B 860 nm -17 dBm 0 dBm NA dB 12 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 338 / 390
Drawers Tx : 850 nm optical interfaces specification

Drawer Tx : common 850 nm optical interfaces specification
Fiber type Laser type Optical connector type
Multimode 62.5 / 125 m (MMF) Class 1 Laser Safety LC
Drawer Tx : Low Frequency 850 nm cartridge specification Data rate 125 Mbps ($100ppm) : Fast Ethernet, FDDI 200 Mbps ($100ppm) : ESCON 270 Mbps ($100ppm) : Digital Video 830 B 860 nm 30 nm NA dB min : 9.5 dBm max : 1.5 dBm 9 dB < 0.5 ms < 300 ms
Central wavelength Maximum RMS width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Optical Output power
Drawer Tx : High Frequency 850 nm cartridge specification Data rate 1025 Gbps ($100ppm) : Gigabit Ethernet 1062.5 Gbps ($100ppm) : FICON, Fiber Channel 830 B 860 nm 30 nm NA dB min : 9.5 dBm max : 1.5 dBm 9 dB < 0.5 ms < 300 ms
Central wavelength Maximum RMS width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Optical Output power
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 339 / 390
2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification, agregate side (4 x ANY)

Agregate Rx : 2.5 Gbps optical interface specification User interface type Operating wavelength range Data rate Optical connector type Fiber type Input power Sensitivity @ BER = 1010 Overload @ BER = 1010 Maximum receiver reflectance I16.1 1266 B 1360 nm 2488.320 Mbps $4.6 ppm LC Multimode 62.5 / 125 m (MMF) 18 B 3 dBm 18 dBm 3 dBm 27 dB
Agregate side Tx : 2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification User interface type Operating wavelength range Data rate Optical connector type Fiber type Maximum RMS width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Optical Output power Minimum Extinction Ratio Shutdown time Reactivation time N.B. I16.1 1266 B 1360 nm 2488.320 Mbps $ 4.6 ppm LC Singlemode 9 / 125 m (SMF) 4 nm NA dB 10 B 3 dBm 8.2 dB <5 ms <30 ms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 340 / 390
2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification, agregate side (4 x ANY_S)

Agregate Rx : 2.5 Gbps optical interface specification
User interface type Operating wavelength range Data rate Optical connector type Fiber type Input power Sensitivity @ BER = 1010 Overload @ BER = 1010 Maximum optical path penalty Maximum receiver reflectance
S16.1 1270 B 1360 nm 2488.320 Mbps $ 4.6 ppm LC Multimode 62.5 / 125 m (MMF) 18 B 0 dBm 18 dBm 0 dBm 1 dB 27 dB
Agregate Tx : 2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification User interface type Operating wavelength range Data rate Optical connector type Fiber type Maximum RMS width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Optical Output power Minimum Extinction Ratio Shutdown time Reactivation time N.B. S16.1 1270 B 1360 nm 2488.320 Mbps $ 4.6 ppm LC Singlemode 9 / 125 m (SMF) 1 nm NA dB 5 B 0 dBm 8.2 dB <5 ms <30 ms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 341 / 390
2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification, agregate side (4 x ANY_P)

Refer to para. 5.3.1.3 on page 335. STM1/4/16, Gigabit Ethernet, Fiber Channel and CWDM interfaces are used
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 342 / 390
5.3.1.5 Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC) optical characteristics
MVAC optical interfaces specification

Fiber type Optical connector type Wavelength range Insertion losses (IL) Attenuation dynamic range including IL (on each VOA input) Attenuation accuracy Response time Output measurement Optical ports levels Optical input power (on both In1 & In2 inputs)
Single mode (SMF) MU horizontal 1528 B 1610 nm 3 dB 3 B 20 dB ; step = 0.5 dB " 0.5 dB < 5 ms 50 B +17 dBm
32 B +17 dBm
Optical output power (on both Out1 & Out2 outputs) 52 B +17 dBm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 343 / 390
5.3.2 Multiplexer units (OMDX) optical characteristics 5.3.2.1 L1 band Mux/Demux with expansion + supervision (OMDX8100_M_L1_XS) and with expansion (OMDX8100_M_L1_X)
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS optical characteristics

MUX side specification Input power: single channels extrainput expansion input supervision input 32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm 1 B +1 dBm 32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm OMDX8100_M_L1_XS OMDX8100_M_L1_X
Insertion loss (max.) single channels extrainput expansion supervision 5.35 dB 3.1 dB 1.7 dB 15 dB 15 dB 32 B +17 dBm 15 dB 32 B +17 dBm 4.95 dB 2.7 dB 1.3 dB
Isolation (adjacent channels) min Output power Monitoring Output DEMUX side specification Input power Monitoring Input
Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power level measurement OMDX8100_M_L1_XS 32 B +17 dBm OMDX8100_M_L1_X 32 B +17 dBm
Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power level measurement
Insertion loss (max.)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
single channels extraoutput expansion supervision
5.55 dB 3.3 dB 1.9 dB 2.5 dB
4.95 dB 2.7 dB 1.3 dB 2.5 dB
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 344 / 390
Output power
single channels extraoutput expansion output supervision output
32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm 53 B 14 dBm 22 dB 30 dB OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm 22 dB 35 dB OMDX8100_M_L1_X
Isolation (adjacent channels) min Isolation (non adjacent channels), min General characteristics L1 band channels L1 band channels central wavelenght
30; 31; 32; 33; 35; 36; 37; 38 1553.33 nm (ch 30); 1552.52 nm (ch 31); 1551.72 nm (ch 32); 1550.92 nm (ch 33); 1549.32 nm (ch 35); 1548.51 nm (ch 36); 1547.72 nm (ch 37);1546.92 nm (ch 38) " 0.11 nm " 0.15 nm 11.3 dB 15 dB 0.15 ps 0.25 dB MU horizontal " 0.25 nm " 0.3 nm 10.8 dB 15 dB 0.15 ps 0.25 dB MU horizontal
channel bandwidth at 0.5 dB channel bandwidth at 3 dB endtoend IL (max) Isolation (LB vs SB) min PMD PDL connector type
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 345 / 390
5.3.2.2 L2 and S1 band Mux/Demux
OMDX8100_M_L2 and OMDX8100_M_S1 optical characteristics

MUX side specification Input power: single channels extrainput 32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm
Insertion loss (max.) single channels extrainput 3.75 dB 1.5 dB 32 B +17 dBm
Output power DEMUX side specification Input power Insertion loss (max.) single channels extraoutput
32 B +17 dBm
3.75 dB 1.5 dB
Output power single channels extraoutput 32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm
General characteristics L2 band channels and central wavelenght 1561.42 nm (ch 20); 1560.61 nm (ch 21); 1559.79 nm (ch 22); 1558.98 nm (ch 23); 1557.36 nm (ch 25); 1556.55 nm (ch 26); 1555.75 nm (ch 27);1554.94 nm (ch 28) 1535.82 nm (ch 52); 1535.04 nm (ch 53); 1534.25 nm (ch 54); 1533.47 nm (ch 55); 1531.90 nm (ch 57); 1531.12 nm (ch 58); 1530.33 nm (ch 59);1529.55 nm (ch 60) " 0.11 nm " 0.15 nm 14.7 dB 12 dB 0.15 ps 0.25 dB MU horizontal
S1 band channels and central wavelenght
channel bandwidth at 0.5 dB channel bandwidth at 3 dB endtoend IL (global) (max) rejection of dropped channels extraport (min) PMD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
PDL connector type
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 346 / 390
5.3.2.3 S2 band Mux/Demux
OMDX8100_M_S2 optical characteristics

MUX side specification Input power: single channels extrainput 32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm
Insertion loss (max.) single channels extrainput 3.75 dB 1.5 dB 32 B +17 dBm
Output power DEMUX side specification Input power Insertion loss (max.) single channels extraoutput
32 B +17 dBm
3.75 dB 1.5 dB
Output power single channels extraoutput 32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm
General characteristics S2 band channels S2 band channels central wavelenght 42; 43; 44; 45; 47; 48; 49; 50 1543.73 nm (ch 42); 1542.94 nm (ch 43); 1542.14 nm (ch 44); 1541.35 nm (ch 45); 1539.77 nm (ch 47); 1538.98 nm (ch 48); 1538.19 nm (ch 49);1537.40 nm (ch 50) " 0.11 nm " 0.15 nm 13.1 dB 12 dB 0.15 ps 0.25 dB MU horizontal
channel bandwidth at 0.5 dB channel bandwidth at 3 dB endtoend IL (w/OMDX8100_M_L1_XS) (max) rejection of dropped channels extraport (min) PMD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
PDL connector type
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 347 / 390
5.3.3 Multiplexer units (OADM) optical characteristics 5.3.3.1 8 channels OADM with supervision
OADM8100_M_L1(L2/S1/S2)_S optical characteristics

DEMUX side specification Input power (SPV + 1530 B 1560 nm) Monitoring Input Output power single channels extraoutput supervision output Insertion loss single channels extraoutput MUX side specification Output power Monitoring Output Input power: single channels extrainput supervision input Insertion loss single channels extrainput Isolation inband (dropped vs added channels) 8 dropped channels isolation adjacent channels non adjacent channels Supervision Rx side IL Tx side IL SPV rejection (Rx side) General characteristics L1, L2, S1, S2 band channels and central wave- see para. 5.3.2.1 on page 344, para. 5.3.2.2 on page lenght 346, para. 5.3.2.3 on page 347 PMD PDL connector type 0.15 ps 0.25 dB MU horizontal 2.3 dB 2 dB >28 dB >24 dB >22 dB >35 dB 32 B +17 dBm Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power level measurement 32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm 1 B +1 dBm 4.55 dB 2.3 dB 32 B +17 dBm Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power level measurement 32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm 53 B 14 dBm 4.75 dB 2.5 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 348 / 390
5.3.3.2 4 channels OADM with supervision
OADM4100_M_chxxyy_S optical characteristics

DEMUX side specification Input power Monitoring Input Output power single channels extraoutput supervision output Insertion loss single channels extraoutput MUX side specification Output power Monitoring Output Input power: single channels extrainput supervision input Insertion loss single channels extrainput Isolation inband (dropped vs added channels) 4 dropped channels isolation adjacent channels non adjacent channels >22 dB >35 dB 2.3 dB 2 dB >28 dB 20B23; 25B28; 30B33; 35B38; 42B45; 47B50; 52B55; 57B60 see para. 5.3.2.1 on page 344, para. 5.3.2.2 on page 346, para. 5.3.2.3 on page 347 0.15 ps 0.25 dB MU horizontal >24 dB 32 B +17 dBm Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power level measurement 32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm 1 B +1 dBm 32 B +17 dBm Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power level measurement 32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm 53 B 14 dBm 4.45 dB 2 dB
4.25 dB 1.8 dB
Supervision Rx side IL Tx side IL SPV rejection (Rx side) General characteristics Channels range per board Central wavelenght per channel PMD PDL
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
connector type
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 349 / 390
5.3.3.3 2 channels OADM with supervision
OADM2100_M_chxxyy_S optical characteristics

MUX side specification Input power: single channels extrainput supervision input Insertion loss (max.): single channels extrainput Rejection of added channels Isolation (adjacent channels) Output power Monitoring Output DEMUX side specification Input power Monitoring Input Insertion loss (max.): single channels extraoutput Output power single channels extraoutput supervision output Rejection of dropped channels Isolation (adjacent channels) General characteristics Channels range per board Central wavelenght per channel Channel passband at 0.5 dB Channel passband at 3 dB Endtoend IL (max)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm 1 B +1 dBm 2.7 dB 2.2 dB 13.5 dB 22 dB 32 B +17 dBm Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power level measurement
32 B +17 dBm Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power level measurement 3.9 dB 2.4 dB 32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm 53 B 14 dBm 13.5 dB 44 dB
3031; 3233; 3536; 3738; 4748 see para. 5.3.2.1 on page 344 and 5.3.2.3 on page 347 "0.25 nm "0.3 nm 9.4 dB 0.15 ps 0.25 dB MU horizontal
PMD PDL connector type
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 350 / 390
5.3.3.4 1 channel OADM with supervision
OADM1100_M_xx_S optical characteristics

MUX side specification Input power: single channel extrainput supervision input Insertion loss (max.): single channels extrainput Rejection of added channels Isolation (adjacent channels) Output power Monitoring Output DEMUX side specification Input power Monitoring Input Insertion loss (max.): single channels extraoutput Output power single channels extraoutput supervision output Rejection of dropped channels Isolation (adjacent channels) General characteristics Channels range per board Central wavelenght per channel Channel passband at 0.5 dB Channel passband at 3 dB Endtoend IL (max) 30; 31; 32; 33; 35; 36; 37; 38; 47; 48 see para. 5.3.2.1 on page 344 and 5.3.2.3 on page 347 "0.25 nm "0.3 nm 8 dB 0.15 ps 0.25 dB MU horizontal 32 B +17 dBm Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power level measurement 3.4 dB 1.9 dB 32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm 53 B 14 dBm 13.5 dB 44 dB 32 B +17 dBm 32 B +17 dBm 1 B +1 dBm 2.2 dB 1.7 dB 13.5 dB 22 dB 32 B +17 dBm 49 B 0 dBm; typically 18 dB below the associated optical power level measurement
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 351 / 390
5.3.4 Mux/Demux 13101550 + supervision unit optical characteristics
SPV_F_1310_1550 optical characteristics

MUX side specification Input power: SPV channel 1310 nm input 1550 nm input 1 B +1 dBm 20 B 0 dBm 32 B +17 dBm
Insertion loss (max.): SPV channel 1310 nm channel 1550 nm channel 14.6 dB 2 dB 2 dB 30 dB 32 B +17 dBm Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power level measurement
Isolation (1310 nm vs 1550 nm) min Output power Monitoring Output DEMUX side specification Input power Monitoring Input Insertion loss (max.): SPV channel 1310 nm channel 1550 nm channel Output power SPV channel 1310 nm input 1550 nm input Isolation (1310 nm vs 1550 nm) min General characteristics Channel passband at 1550 nm Channel passband at 1310 nm Endtoend IL (max) at 1310 nm Endtoend IL (max) at 1550 nm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
32 B +17 dBm Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power level measurement 2.1 dB 2.2 dB 2.2 dB 53 B 14 dBm 20 B 0 dBm 32 B +17 dBm 30 dB
1528 B1560 nm 1250 B1350 nm 4.2 dB 4.2 dB 0.15 ps 0.25 dB MU horizontal
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 352 / 390
5.3.5 SPV_F_C unit optical characteristics
SPV_F_C optical characteristics

MUX side specification Input power: SPV channel extra input 1 B +1 dBm 32 B +17 dBm
Insertion loss (max.): SPV channel extra input 14.2 dB 1.2 dB 32 B +17 dBm Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power level measurement
Output power Monitoring Output DEMUX side specification Input power Monitoring Input Insertion loss (max.): SPV channel extrainput
32 B +17 dBm Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power level measurement
1.7 dB 1.4 dB
Output power SPV channel extraoutput 50 B 14 dBm 32 B +17 dBm
General characteristics Channel passband at 1550 nm Channel passband at 1310 nm Endtoend IL (max) PMD PDL connector type
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1528 B1560 nm 1250 B1350 nm 2.6 dB 0.15 ps 0.25 dB MU horizontal
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 353 / 390
5.3.6 Optical Amplifier Card (OAC) optical characteristics
Optical Amplifier Card optical interfaces specification

Parameter Wavelength range 1st stage output power (EOL) 2nd stage output power 1st stage spectral gain excursion (1) 2nd stage spectral gain excursion (1) Noise figure (2) Symbol s OOPV1 OOPV2 G G1 NF 4 2 Min 1529.1 12 17 4.5 2.2 6.8 Typ Max 1561.8 Unit nm dBm dBm dB dB dB
(32 channels) OAC1 and OAC2 optical characteristics
(1): With an input signal power of 5 dBm and an output power of +17 dBm. (2): With an input signal power of 11 to 5 dBm and an output power of +17 dBm. (32 channels) OAC1_L and OAC2_L optical characteristics 1st stage output power (EOL) 2nd stage output power 1st stage spectral gain excursion (1) 2nd stage spectral gain excursion (1) Noise figure (2) OOPV1 OOPV2 G G1 NF 4 2 12 17 5 2.2 6 dBm dBm dB dB dB
(1): With an input signal power of 11 dBm and an output power of +17 dBm. (2): With an input signal power of 17 to 11 dBm and an output power of +17 dBm.
Optical ports specification Fiber type Optical connector type I/O I O I O I O I O O O O O

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
single mode (SMF) MU/PC ; MU/APC for extra pump OAC1, OAC2 level 1 B 15 dB 24.5 B +6.5 dBm 26 B +5 dBm 26 B +5 dBm 3 B +12 dBm 18 B +9 dBm +2 B +17 dBm OAC1_L, OAC2_L level 1 B 15 dB 32 B +17 dBm 47 B +17 dBm 47 B +17 dBm 3 B +12 dBm 32 B +17 dBm +2 B +17 dBm
Function VOA attenuation range VOA input VOA output 1st stage input 1st stage output 2nd stage input 2nd stage output SPV extraction SPV insertion 1st stage input monitor 1st stage output monitor 2nd stage input monitor 2nd stage output monitor
Typically 20dB below the associated level measurement Typically 20dB below the associated level measurement Typically 20dB below the associated level measurement Typically 20dB below the associated level measurement
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 354 / 390
5.3.7 SPVM + OW and SPVM_H optical characteristics
SPVM2 and SPVM_H optical characteristics

SPV Receiver specification Sensitivity @ BER = 109 Overload @ BER = 109 Maximum receiver reflectance 50 dBm to 47 dBm 6 dbm 28 dbm
N.B.
The 1510 nm receiver has a specified sensibility of 50 dBm. If the incident power is lower than that value, the OSC BER is higher, but the supervision LAPD protocol corrects the errors so that the supervision is correctly transmitted down to a power value of 53 dBm
SPV Transmitter specification Type of source Wavelength Maximum 20 dB width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Optical Output power Minimum Extinction Ratio DFB 1510"10 nm 1 nm 33 dB min : 1 dBm max : +1 dBm 8.2 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 355 / 390
5.3.8 OSMC optical characteristics
OSMC optical characteristics

OSMC specification Fiber type Optical connector type Selectable input ports (switch) Wavelength range OCM channel power dynamic range Total input power OCM power channel power accuracy OCM power repeatability OCM absolute wavelength accuracy OCM acquisition time Single mode (SMF) MU horizontal 8 1529.55 to 1561.42 nm 51 to 3 dBm 52 to +17 dBm $1 dB $ 0.25 dB $ 100 pm 1s
OSMC optical ports Port_p input ; p = [1 B 8] 52 to +17 dBm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 356 / 390
5.3.9 Optical Protection Cards (OPC) optical characteristics
SM/MM OPC BOARDS WIT/WITHOUT CONNECTORS SPECIFICATION

TX side Connector type Fiber type Max. insertion loss Optical level at TXIN Ch. 1&2 RX side Connector type Fiber type Max. insertion loss Optical level at RXIN
SM OPC with MM OPC with MM OPC with SM OPC with jumpers jumpers connectors connectors MU SMF 4.4 dB MU SMF 4.4 dB MU SMF 4.4 dB MU SMF 4.4 dB
15 B +8 dBm 15 B +8 dBm 15 B +8 dBm 15 B +8 dBm SM OPC with MM OPC with MM OPC with SM OPC with jumpers jumpers connectors connectors MU SMF 4.4 dB 24 B 0 dBm MU MMF 6 dB 24 B 0 dBm MU SMF 4.4 dB 24 B 0 dBm MU MMF 6 dB 24 B 0 dBm
TX side Connector type Fiber type Max. insertion loss Optical level at TXIN Ch. 1&2 RX side Connector type Fiber type Max. insertion loss Optical level at RXIN
MM OPC 850 with connect. MU MMF 5 dB 15 B +8 dBm MM OPC 850 with connect. MU MMF 5 dB 28 B 0 dBm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 357 / 390
5.4 Alarm characteristics

Units Alarms: Each port card or access card of the equipment is provided with a bicolor (green/red) or threecolor (green/ yellow/red) HardWare Failure LED on the front coverplate. This LED indicates: when red, internal failure when green, in service unit when yellow, board in firmware download state (only for MCC, OCC10, 4xANY, SPVM).
Centralized Equipment Alarms: All the alarms detected on the units are collected by the ESC unit which will deliver centralized optical indications (by means of LEDs on its front coverplate). Specifically: Red LED URG: detection of an URGENT (MAJOR OR CRITICAL) alarm Red LED NRG: detection of a NOT URGENT (MINOR) alarm Yellow LED ABN: detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Type: active loopbacks, forcing the unit into service, laser forced ON or OFF, try to restore after ALS Yellow LED IND: detection of an INDICATIVE (WARNING) alarm Yellow LED ATD: alarm condition ATTENDED
Refer to para. 2.5, page 112, where the front view of each unit and the LED locations are illustrated. N.B. On the Craft Terminal (C.T.) and on the Operation System (O.S). application the URGENT (URG), NOT URGENT (NURG) and INDICATIVE alarm are named in a different way; the relation between this two terminology is explained in Table 44. on page 358.
Table 44. Relation between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity terminology used for the ESC leds and ETSI market rack (TRU). Alarm severity terminology on C.T. and O.S. Alarm severity terminology used for ESC leds and for TRU in the rack URG, T*URG, T*RURG, NURG, T*NURG, T*RNURG INDICATIVE
CRITICAL or MAJOR MINOR WARNING INDETERMINATE (not used)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 358 / 390
Rack Alarms: Some equipment alarms are carried to a connector and used to lightup alarm racklamps. Rack alarms are physically available on the RAI board connectors. Rack lamps are different in ETSI and ANSI worlds. The RAI card is made to interface with both standards. The available alarms are the following: PDU Front Panel LED Markings (ANSI): CRI: critical alarm from one of the shelves in the rack MAJ: major alarm from one of the shelves in the rack MIN: minor alarm from one of the shelves in the rack RACK: alarm storing from one of the shelves in the rack
TRU Front Panel LED Markings (ETSI): URG: Urgent: major alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack NURG: Non urgent: minor alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack ATTD: Attended: aknowledged URG or NURG alarm SIG PRES: signal presence (power on)
HouseKeeping Alarms/Commands: A set of housekeeping contacts are available, located on the 25 poles connector of the housekeeping board. Alarm Attending: The detected units alarm condition can be stored through the ACO (Alarms Cut Off) pushbutton on the ESC unit (Attended). This operation will turn OFF the general red LED URG and will light up the ATD yellow LED on the ESC unit (Attended); the attended command is also sent to the rack lamps (if present) through the RAI board. Troubleshooting: This equipment has been designed to dialog with a Personal Computer (PC) for service, activation and troubleshooting purpose. Troubleshooting procedure for the equipment and details of the alarms for each card and relevant indications are described in the Operators Handbook. Connection with the PC is achieved through the 9 poles connector (F interface) on the ESC board. The unit can be connected to an Operation System associated to the Transmission Management Network in order to execute operations similar to those carried out by the PC. Characteristics of the cited rack alarms and Housekeeping contacts interface (EM type) are inserted in Chapter 5.1 on page 315.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 359 / 390
5.5 Power supply characteristics

Input Voltage range (from station batteries) DC/DC Power supply units output voltages 40,5 V t 48 V t 57,0 V 50,0 V t 60 V t 72,0 V + 3.6 V 3% 5.5 V 3% + 5.5 V 3% + 2.5 V 3% Compact shelf = 4 A max 1696MS shelf = 15 A max <400W a fully equipped shelf with 16 transponders <150W 4 channels line terminal (1 shelf) according to ETS 3001322
Input current Estimated max 1696MS power consumption Estimated max 1696MS_C power consumption Power supply interface
5.5.1 Maximum power consumption of the boards and units Unit OMDX8100_M_xx, OADM1/2/4/8 ESC MCC1/ MCC2 MCC3 OCC10 4xANY(_S) without drawers 4x ANY(_S) with 4 drawers Drawer OAC1 and OAC1_L OAC2 and OAC2_L SPV_F_C_1310_1550, SPV_F_C SPVM, SPVM2 SPVM_H MVAC OSMC OPC LAN PSC PSC2 PSC3 HK RAI UIC FAN FAN_C Maximum power consumption [W] 0.5 9.3 16.8 13.9 22.6 20 32 3 (each) 23.5 18.5 0.5 12 11 2 9.7 0,5 2.4 0.4 + Psec (*) 0.4 + Psec (*) + (Ibatx0.4x2) 0.4 + Psec (*) + (Ibatx0.4) 2.5 2 2.6 20 9.6
(*) For each PSC board, Psec = 1/2 (Pshelf 5V + Pshelf 3.3V) (10.85). Pshelf 5V is the power consumption of the 5V feed, Pshelf 3.3V is the power consumption of the 3.3V. Abnormal service range
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The 1696MSPAN equipment operating at 48 V does not suffer any damage when subjected to the following voltage range : 0 V to 40,5 V and 57 V to 60 V. When the equipment operates at 60 V the voltage range becomes: 0 V to 50 V and 72 V to 75 V. Protection to the station power supply is provided by 16A circuit breakers at the top of the rack.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 360 / 390
5.6 Mechanical characteristics

Rack mechanical compatibility
ETSI ETS/E3, NEBS2000, Optinex compatible 534 W x 270 D x 443 H mm 446 W x 270 D x 132 H mm 213 D x 265 H mm 8.5 Kg Fans located at the bottom of the shelf Vertical between rack and subrack front access IEC 603/DIN 41612 IEC 807 (SubD) IEC 1691 (coax. 1.0/2.3) BNC 50 BNC 75 RJ45 RJ11 Yes
1696MS subrack size 1696MS_C subrack size Board size 1696MS Subrack weight Cooling Rack cabling Electrical Connectors
Backtoback installation
5.6.1 Maximum weight of the boards and units Unit OMDX8100_M_xx OADM4, OADM8 OADM1, OADM2 ESC MCC/ MCC2 OCC10 4xANY(_S) without drawers 4x ANY(_S) with 4 drawers Drawer OAC SPV_F_C_1310_1550 SPV_F_C SPVM, SPVM2 MVAC OSMC OPC LAN PSC, PSC2, PSC3 HK RAI UIC FAN FAN_C
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Weight [Kg] 1.1 1.1 0.9 0.85 0.9 0.93 1.25 1.65 0.1 (each) 1.14 0.9 0.21 0.79 0.9 1.1 0.18 0.13 0.28 0.13 0.12 0.12 2.1 (Fan module +filter) 0.330
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 361 / 390
5.7 Environmental characteristics

The 1696MSPAN is designed to be compliant to both ETSI and ANSI standards. The technical data of this chapter are referred to ITUT Recommendations, ETSI Standards or Telcordia (former Bellcore) standard. 5.7.1 EMC/EMI 5.7.1.1 ETSI compliancy The electromagnetic compatibility requirements for the system are specified in the ETSI EN 300 386 (2000). The following features are applicable : environmental class 1, normal priority of service. Immunity The following table specifies the valid tests and their compliance criteria for immunity. All the items make reference to the chapters of the ETSI EN 300 386 (2000). Table 45. Valid tests and compliance criteria for immunity Phenomenon Coupling (port) Test method chapter 6.2 Test level Compliance criterion
Electrostatic discharge Electrical transients fast DC power signal
4 kV (contact) / 4 kV (air) NP 6 kV (contact) / 8 kV (air) LFS 500 V 500 V 1 kV 3 V/m 10 V/m NP NP LFS NP LFS
chapter 6.3 chapter 6.3
Radiated electromagnetic field Continuous conducted signals NP: LFS: DC power signal
chapter 6.6
chapter 6.7.2 chapter 6.5
3V 3V
NP NP
Normal performance within specified limits Loss of function (self recovery) no corruption of data management temporary loss of function following application of test self recovery to normal performance occurs at the cessation of the test.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 362 / 390
Emission The following table specifies the requirements for the RF emissions of the equipment. All the items make reference to the chapters of the ETSI EN 300 386 (2000). Table 46. Requirements for RF emission Phenomenon Conducted emissions Coupling (port) DC power signal Radiated emissions Test method chapter 7.2.3 chapter 7.2.1 chapter 7.3 Maximum level chapter 7.2.3 hazard level A hazard level A
The designation hazard level A is defined in the EN 55 022 document. The electromagnetic compatibility requirements for the system are specified in the GR1089. The recommendation related to immunity and the radiated emission are located on section 31 & 32. 5.7.1.2 ANSI compliancy The electromagnetic compatibility requirements for the system are specified in the GR 1089 (see note). The recommendation related to immunity and the radiated emission are located section 31 & 32. N.B. GR 1089 CORE Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunication equipment issue 2, December 1997
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 363 / 390
5.7.2 Environmental constraints 5.7.2.1 ETSI compliancy The technical data of this chapter are, where it is possible, referred to ITUT Recommendations or ETSI Standards. The system is designed for indoor operation with controlled air temperature. The complete environmental conditions, including climatic, atmospheric and mechanical conditions are specified in the ETS 300 019. The following environmental hazard levels of this standard is applied.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 364 / 390
5.7.2.1.1 Storage The equipment meets the following requirements Vs. Storage:
ETS 300 01912 : 1992, hazard level 1.2 hazard level 1.2 : weatherproofed, not temperature controlled storage location. This hazard level applies to weatherproofed storage having neither temperature nor humidity control. The location may have openings directly to the open air, i.e., it may be only partly weatherproofed. The climatogram is shown in Figure 221. on page 366. This hazard level applies to storage locations : where equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and temporarily to heat radiation: They may also be exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts, e.g. through doors, windows or other openings. They may be subjected to condensed water, dripping water and to icing. They may also be subjected to limited winddriven precipitation including snow; where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur; with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered over the whole area, and/or with heavy traffic; in areas with sources of sand or dust, including urban areas; with vibration of low significance and insignificant shock.
The conditions of this hazard level may occur in : unattended buildings ; some entrances of buildings ; some garages and shacks. Table 47. Main climatic conditions Environmental parameter Low air temperature High air temperature Low relative humidity High relative humidity Low absolute humidity High absolute humidity Rain intensity Rate of change of temperature Low air pressure High air pressure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Unit C C % % g/m3 g/m3 mm/min C/min kPa kPa W/m2 m/s
Value 25 55 10 100 0,5 29 no 0,5 70 106 1120 30
Solar radiation Movement of the surrounding air
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 365 / 390
Environmental parameter Condition of condensation Condition of precipitation
Unit
Value yes yes, winddriven precipitation yes 2 (ETS 300 01911)

Condition of icing and frosting Climatogram
60 50 40 30
AIR TEMPERATURE 0C
20
ABSOLUTE AIR HUMIDITY g/m3
20 10 0 10 20 0.5 30 40 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
RELATIVE AIR HUMIDITY %
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 221. Climatogram for hazard level 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 366 / 390
5.7.2.1.2 Transportation The equipment meets the following requirements Vs. transportation :
ETS 300 01911 : 1992, hazard level 2.2 (Careful transportation). This hazard level applies to transportation where special care has been taken e.g. with respect to low temperature and handling. hazard level 2.2 covers the condition of hazard level 2.1. In addition hazard level 2.2 includes transportation in all types of lorries and trailers in areas with welldeveloped road system. It also includes transportation by ship and by train specially designed, shockreducing buffers. Manual loading and unloading of to 20 Kg is included. Table 48. Main climatic conditions Environmental parameter Low air temperature High air temperature, air in unventilated enclosures High air temperature, air in ventilated enclosures or outdoor air Relative humidity Absolute humidity Low air pressure Movement of the surrounding air Rain intensity Solar radiation Heat radiation Condition of condensation Unit C C C % g/m3 kPa m/s mm/min W/m2 W/m2 Value 25 70 40 95 60 70 20 6 1120 600 yes
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 367 / 390
5.7.2.1.3 Climatic for operating conditions The Equipment meets the requirements of ETSI Stand. without use of fans. The functionality of the Equipment, Vs. Temperature, is in compliance with : ETS 300 01913 :1992 , hazard level 3.2. hazard level 3.2: Partly temperaturecontrolled locations.
This hazard level applies to locations : where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and heat radiation. They may also be exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings, e.g. through open windows. They may be subjected to condensed water and to water from sources other than rain and icing. They are not subjected to precipitation; where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur; with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic; In close proximity to sources of sand or dust; with vibration of low significance, e.g. for products fastened to light supporting structures subjected to negligible vibrations.
The conditions of this hazard level may be found in: entrances and staircases of buildings; garages; cellars; certain workshops; buildings in factories and industrial process plants; unattended equipment stations; certain telecommunication buildings; ordinary storage rooms for frost resistant products and farm buildings...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 368 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
AIR TEMPERATURE 0C
01 40 10 20 30 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
RELATIVE AIR HUMIDITY %
30
20
0 5 10
50 45 40
60
Figure 222. Climatogram for hazard level 3.2: partly temperature controlled locations
3AL 95278 AA AA 100
390
20
1
ABSOLUTE AIR HUMIDITY g/m3
369 / 390
Table 49. Main climatic conditions Environmental parameter Low air temperature High air temperature Low relative humidity High relative humidity Low absolute humidity High absolute humidity Rate of change of temperature Low air pressure High air pressure Solar radiation Heat radiation Movement of the surrounding air Condition of condensation Condition of winddriven rain, snow,... Condition of icing Climatogram Unit C C % % g/m3 g/m3 C/min kPa kPa W/m2 W/m2 m/s Value 5 45 5 95 1 29 0,5 70 106 700 600 5 yes no yes 2 (ETS 300 01913)
5.7.2.2 ANSI compliancy The environmental constraints requirements for the system are also compliant with the GR 63 (see note). N.B. GR 63 CORE Network Equipment Building System (NEBS) Requirements : Physical Protection issue 1, October 1995
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 370 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
MAINTENANCE
371 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
372 / 390
6 MAINTENANCE
ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA. 4.1.3 ON PAGE 32
6.1 Maintenance introduction

6.1.1 General safety rules
SAFETY RULES Carefully observe the frontpanel warning labels prior to working on optical connections while the equipment is inservice. Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream (rack or station distribution frame)
SAFETY RULES DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc. DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
SAFETY RULES DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe the rules pointed out in para.3.2.4.2 on page 27. 6.1.2 General rules Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers, ESD connector protections, etc) In order to reduce the risk of damage the electrostatic sensitive devices, is mandatory to use the elasticized band (around the wrist) and the coiled cord joined connect with the ground rack during the touching of the equipment
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 373 / 390
6.1.3 Maintenance aspects: definitions Maintenance consists of a set of operations which maintain or bring back the assembly to optimum operating conditions in a very short time, with the aim of obtaining maximum operational availability. Maintenance is classified as: ROUTINE (PREVENTIVE) Routine (preventive) maintenance consists in carrying out a number of periodic operations to minimize the risk of a failure on a link. These operations can be scheduled or initiated by the equipment supervision system. CORRECTIVE Corrective maintenance consists in carrying out a minimum number of operations to repair a fault as rapidly as possible. These operations are initiated by the equipment supervision system and limited to replacement of boards. Definition of the technical level of the maintenance agent: It is mandatory for the technicians in charge of the equipment maintenance to be familiar with the measurement techniques used on equipment fitted with optical connectors. 6.1.4 Instruments And Accessories There is a local terminal (PC) which permits to display all the alarms and manages the Equipment. The relative processing is described in the operators handbook. Where TMN is implemented, an Operation System displays alarms and manages all the connected Equipments of the network. Refer to the relevant handbooks. The need of special tools and accessories to perform possible routine and corrective maintenance procedures is described inside the procedures themselves.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 374 / 390
6.2 Preventive maintenance

The ALCATEL1696MSPAN or 1696MSC equipment requires no systematic preventive maintenance. Only a routine maintenance is performed on the fans Equipment. 6.2.1 Routine Maintenance every six months It is suggested to carry out the following operations every six months: nodust filter cleaning (ETSI rack) / substitution (ANSI rack)
6.2.1.1 Nodust filter cleaning / substitution NODUST FILTER CLEANING / SUBSTITUTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) WARNING: BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE NODUST FILTER, CHECK THAT THE PROTECTIVE ADHESIVE FILM HAS BEEN REMOVED.
SAFETY RULES DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc. DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
SAFETY RULES DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by rotating fans. Every six months is has to be performed the following operations ETSI rack: cleaning the nodust filter, either on FAN and FAN_C units ANSI rack: substitute the nodust filter, either on FAN and FAN_C units
Note: the period of one year is only indicative; according to the environmental conditions could be necessary to reduce this period.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 375 / 390
See Figure 223. on page 376. Only on FAN_C nodust filter, it is necessary to pull out the FAN_C unit following the procedure below described:
unscrew the two screws (1) ensuring the FAN_C to the compact shelf insert the extractor in (2) and pull out to extract the FAN_C from the shelf unscrew the screw (3) ensuring the nodust filter to the FAN_C and extract the nodust filter (4).
To reinsert the FAN_C into the shelf insert the nodust filter (4) to the FAN_C screw the screw (3) to ensure the nodust filter into the FAN_C properly insert the FAN_C into the shelf screw the two screws (1) to ensure the FAN_C to the compact shelf
EXT PMU
FAN_C (for 1696MS_C)
FAN FILTER
nodust filter
Figure 223. FAN_C: nodast filter extraction
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 376 / 390
6.2.2 Routine Maintenance every year It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly:
power cables check
6.2.2.1 Power cables check
SAFETY RULES DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc. DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals. It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly: Check that the power cable is perfectly safety grounded. Make sure that the subrack has been tightly fastened to the rack with screws, to guarantee grounding (the rack is connected to the station ground).
6.2.3 Routine Maintenance every five years It is suggested the replacement of each FANS unit (FAN and FAN_C) after five years of working.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 377 / 390
6.3 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting)

Since the Troubleshooting procedure is carried out with the use of the Craft Terminal , please refer ,for details, to the Maintenance Section of the Operators Handbook.
FIXING THE UNITS (AND MODULES) INTO THE SUBRACK (caution to avoid equipment damage) The screw tightening torque for fixing the units (and modules, if any and if fixed by screws) into the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
The following paragraph can be used as an help during corrective actions.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 378 / 390
6.3.1 Fault location: alarm & status indication This chapter guides you to localize the defaults occurring on the NE. Starting from an alarm indication, it helps you to find the cause of the default and decide what has to be done to correct it. Fault location can be performed by following simple rules. First, transmission domain alarms have to be checked to locate the degraded NE. Then, when the faulty NE is identified, equipment domain alarms are checked to locate degraded board or the faulty optical connection. To give the operator the possibility to localize the faults, a few alarms are available: in a terminal: on each transponder MCC (no OChoverhead): Loss of power at Rx side (WDM or user side) Loss Of Clock at Tx side (given by the CDR, WDM or user side) Laser degradation (WDM or user side) LOS detection at equipment output (OLOS) LOS detection at equipment input (ILOS)
ILOS RX B&W LOC LDG TX WDM
M U X
LB SB
SPV
OLOS
TX B&W LDG
RX WDM LOC ILOS
M U X
D M U X
LB SB
D M U X
SPV
ILOS
Figure 224. position of the alarms in a terminal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 379 / 390
LOS detection at equipment output (OLOS) LOS detection at equipment input (ILOS) passthrough channels
SPV & ILOS

D M U X M U X OLOS
ILOS LOC LDG RX WDM TX B&W
ILOS LOC LDG RX B&W TX WDM
SPV
M U X D M U X
OLOS
SPV
TX WDM LDG
RX B&W
TX B&W
RX WDM
SPV & ILOS
LOC ILOS LDG
LOC ILOS
passthrough channels Figure 225. position of the alarms in an OADM Alarms on transponders are described in the corresponding chapter (4.1). Alarms on terminals input/output and on OADM output are described with OMDX and OADM units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 380 / 390
in an OADM: on each transponder MCC (no OChoverhead): Loss of power at Rx side (WDM or user side) Loss Of Clock at Tx side (given by the CDR, WDM or user side) Laser degradation (WDM or user side) LBER at user Rx (based on B1 calculation only for SDH/SONET signals)
6.4 Set of spare parts

6.4.1 Suggested Spare Parts The overall number of spares depends on Customer requirements, and should be based on the average amount of transmission circuits available to be accounted for not only during MTBF but also during MTTR; the latter depending on the amount of spare parts available. The set of spare parts is inclusive of a minimum number of spares for each type of replaceable plugin unit (see unit list in paragraph 2.2.3 on page 75). 6.4.2 General rules on spare parts management Before storing the spare units make sure that they are working by inserting them in an operating equipment It is suggested to periodically check those spare units have not been utilized for over a year. If the spare parts and the equipment are stored in the same environment, make sure that the spare parts are placed in cabinets to safeguard them from dust and damp. Moreover, they should also be well grounded to avoid electrostatic discharges. If the spare parts are stored in another room, or have to be moved from another place, building or site, make sure that the following is observed: the spare parts must be wrapped in antistatic and padded envelopes; the spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might damage them , gas); (e.g.
if during transport the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept, make sure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent thermal shocks and/or the possibility of steaming up. When replacing a unit/subunit, make sure that the spare unit/subunit is set exactly as the replaced one. For the presettings procedures see section HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION.
6.4.3 Particular rules on spare parts management Whenever some units with flash-memories are common to different kinds of equipment or to different versions of the same type of equipment, it is possible to maintain one spare part only: this allows spare part stock saving, even though software downloading will be necessary when the software loaded into the unit (program part or data part) is different from that necessary in the equipment where the spare unit must be used. At the end of the commissioning phase or after an equipment data change, it is suggested to save the equipment data, e.g. on floppy disk, and store this floppy disk in the spare part stock pointing out the equipment it refers to.
6.5 Repair Form

To facilitate repair operation, data on the faulty unit must be reported on the form shown in Figure 226. on page 382. The repair form must be filledin with as much data as possible and returned to Alcatel together with the faulty unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 381 / 390
ALCATE L
REPAIR FORM
Fill in this form and affix it to the faulty unit to be returned to Alcatel
CUSTOMER NAME ORDER NUMBER/CONTRACT NUMBER
SITE
BRANCH/UNIT/COUNTRY
SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT
PRODUCT RELEASE
EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE PART NUMBER
STATION/RACK
SUBRACK
SLOT
TO BE FILLED IN BY THE SENDER
MNEMONIC
ALCATEL PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
FAULTY UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION
FAULT PHASE
INSTALLATION / TURN ON CLEAR FAULT
REASON FOR REPAIR

DROP IN PERFORMANCE
PRESUMED CAUSE
INTERNAL
LIGHTNING OPERATION INTERMITTENT FAULT UPGRADE/QUALITY ALERT EXTERNAL AIR COND.
MAINTENANCE
TEMPERATURE FAULT
OTHER
DATE FAULT STILL PRESENT AFTER REPAIR
NAME OF SENDER
COMMENTS
TO BE FILLED IN BY THE REPAIR OPERATOR
PROCESSING
NO FAULTS FOUND A STANDARD REPAIRING BD SUBSTITUTED QUALITY ALERT I SX NOTE : LETTERS ARE FOR FACTORY USE NOT REPAIRABLE (REJECTED) M UPGRADE I MECHANICAL V1 SOLDERING / WIRING C
FAULTS DETECTED
COMPONENT FL PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD V1 CORROSION V3 OTHER DIRT V2 ADJUSTMENT P
COMMENTS
DATE
REPAIRING NUMBER
REPAIRING CENTRE
NAME OF REPAIR OPERATOR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 226. Repair form
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 382 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
383 / 390
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
3AL 95278 AA AA
390
384 / 390
UNIT DOCUMENTATION LIST

This section contains the documents sheets to refer to for unit/subunit hardware setting options. The list of the enclosed documents is given in Table 51. on page 388, according to the ANV part number. TABLE EXPLANATION: UNIT IDENTIFICATION P/Ns AND CHANGE STATUS Each unit or sub-unit is distinguished by: a dual Part No.: Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx xx) ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xxxx) (NOTE) The last two ANV-P/N letters (in the following stated as suffix) stand for a feasible alternative, they might differentiate two units even though still functionally compatible. For this reason the indicated ANV P/N does not include the last two letters. For example : the units having P/Ns 3AL34065AAAA and 3AL34065AABA are functionally compatible and, as regards to hardware settings, the MSxxx document (described hereafter) 3AL34065AAAA-MSxxx is applicable for both.
NOTE
and by a pair of design & production series (change status): CS, associated to the Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x) ICS, associated to ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx)
The following table shows an example of correspondence between FACTORY P/N + CS and ANV P/N + ICS Table 50. Example of correspondence between CS and suffix + ICS N.B. The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part list! FACTORY CODE P/N 487.156.612 487.156.612 487.156.612 CS 01 02 03 ANV CODE P/N 3AL 34422 AA AA 3AL 34422 AA AB 3AL 34422 AA AC ICS 01 01 01
In this example you can see that the production series is identified only by the CS as far as the Factory code is concerned, and by the suffix + ICS if the ANV code is referred to.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Some of the possible positions of the label indicating the units P/Ns and CSICS are illustrated in para.4.4 on page 34.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 385 / 390
CROSSREFERENCE Id. App. Unit alphabetical notation. It indicates the unit containing one or more subunits. It reports the unit notation (Id) to which the subunit belongs.
The hardware settings can be executed after having checked all the subunits belonging to a unit, by considering the above cited crossreference, and by using the presetting documents indicated in the table and presented in the following point. ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS For each type of unit or sub-unit having setting options that can be customized, the document ANV P/NMSxxx is annexed to this handbook (in the case of Documentation on CD-ROM the MSxxx documents may be given in a CD-ROM different from that containing this Technical Handbook). The MSxxx documents are enclosed in numerical order. The Edition of the enclosed MSxxx document is the highest available on the date on which the Technical Handbook is assembled. Use of the document MSxxx: MSxxx means document for hardware presetting options (the MSxxx documents Part No. is as that of the unit or sub-unit and its MS acronym defines type). The xxx part of MSxxx is relevant to ANV internal identification codes. As the Customer may have to manage many units of the same type (same P/N) but with different CSICS, the document MSxxx describes with possible different chapters the different setting options, according to all the possible CSsICSs. For this purpose, a table at the beginning of document (PREFACE) indicates the chapter to be used according to the CS or the corresponding suffix + ICS, taking into account that: a change of the production series does not necessarily imply a change in the setting options; a change of the ANV P/N suffix does not imply a new MSxxx document; the CS, SUFFIX and ICS must be meant as: from specified CS, SUFFIX or ICS (included) to next CS, SUFFIX or ICS (excluded) if listed the sequence of CSs is increasing from alphanumeric to numeric (e.g. CS=A0 is lower than CS=01). Each chapter contains: one or more tables defining the relationship between the functions achievable and the setting options to make; the unit layout drawing which shows the exact location of all the setting options. N.B. IDENTIFIES PIN 1 OF COMPONENT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The setting options described in the documents MSxxx must be used according to 3AL377470001 (962.000.022 F) MSxxx document, inserted in Table 51. on page 388, which shows the ON (closed) position of microswitches. Those setting options that on the table are indicated by the caption For factory use only should never be modified.
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 386 / 390
EXAMPLE N.B.
The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part list! Taking into account the same unit of Table 50. on page 385: FACTORY CODE P/N 487.156.612 487.156.612 487.156.612 CS 01 02 03 ANV CODE P/N 3AL 34422 AAAA 3AL 34422 AAAB 3AL 34422 AAAC ICS 01 01 01
and supposing that the setting options valid for CS=01 are equal to those for CS=02, but change for CS=03, the table at the beginning of the document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ will be: FACTORY P/N CODICE DI FABBRICA FROM CS DA CS 01 03 ANV P/N CODICE ANV FROM SUFFIX DA SUFFISSO AA AC FROM ICS DA ICS 01 01
CHAPTER CAPITOLO
1 2
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data: FACTORY CODE P/N 487.156.612 487.156.612 CS 01 02 ANV CODE P/N 3AL 34422 AAAA 3AL 34422 AAAB ICS 01 01
you will use Chapter 1 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data: FACTORY CODE P/N 487.156.612
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ANV CODE P/N 3AL 34422 AAAC 3AL 34422 AAAD ICS 01 01
CS 03 04
487.156.612
you will use Chapter 2 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 387 / 390
Table 51. Hardware presetting documentation The edition of the documents (listed in this table) that are physically enclosed in the handbook is the highest available when this handbook is assembled. The edition of enclosed documents is not specified in this table. Only the boards that need hardware settings are listed in this table
Id
NAME
App
ANV P/N (Factory P/N) 3AL 86615 AA (474 156 215) 3AL 86615 AJ (474 156 065) 3AL 86615 AB (474 156 216) 3AL 86615 AC (474 156 217) 3AL 86615 AD (474 156 218) 3AL 86637 AA (474 156 008) 3AL 86637 AB (474 156 009) 3AL 86637 AC (474 156 010) 3AL 86637 AD (474 156 011) 3AL 86637 BC (474 156 013) 3AL 86637 BD (474 156 014) 3AL 86637 BA (474 156 003) 3AL 86637 BB (474 156 012) 3AL 86637 BG (474 156 017) 3AL 86637 BH (474 156 018)
Document for hardware presetting
OMDX_8100_M_L1_XS
OMDX_8100_M_L1_X
OMDX_8100_M_L2
OMDX_8100_M_S1
OMDX_8100_M_S2
OADM_8100_M_L1_S
OADM_8100_M_L2_S
OADM_8100_M_S1_S
OADM_8100_M_S2_S
10
OADM_4100_M_ch2023_S
11
12
13
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
14
15
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 388 / 390
Id
NAME
App
ANV P/N (Factory P/N) 3AL 86637 BE (474 156 015) 3AL 86637 BF (474 156 016) 3AL 86777AJ (474 156 079) 3AL 86777AK (474 156 080) 3AL 86777AL (474 156 081) 3AL 86777AM (474 156 082) 3AL 86777AN (474 156 083) 3AL 86777AP (474 156 084) 3AL 86777AQ (474 156 085) 3AL 86777AR (474 156 086) 3AL 86777BE (474 156 091) 3AL 86777BF (474 156 092) 3AL 86778AB (474 156 135) 3AL 86778AC (474 156 136) 3AL 86778AD (474 156 137) 3AL 86778AE (474 156 138) 3AL 86778AF (474 156 139) 3AL86779AA (474156140)
16
17
18
OADM1_100_Mch30_S
19
OADM1_100_Mch31_S
20
OADM1_100_Mch32_S
21
OADM1_100_Mch33_S
22
OADM1_100_Mch35_S
23
OADM1_100_Mch36_S
24
OADM1_100_Mch37_S
25
OADM1_100_Mch38_S
26
OADM1_100_Mch47_S
27
OADM1_100_Mch48_S
28
OADM2_100_Mch30_31_S
29
30
31
32
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
33
SPV_F_1310_1550
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 389 / 390
Id
NAME
App
ANV P/N (Factory P/N) 3AL 86661 AA (411 101 428) 3AL 86606 AA (411 101 255) 3AL 86606 AB (411 102 193) 3AL 86606 AC (411 102 534) 3AL 86653 AA (474 156 024)

34
ESC
35
SPVM
36
SPVM2
37
SPVM_H
38
LANC
Table continues with MSZZQ document list Document for hardware presetting 3AL 86638 AAAA MSZZQ 3AL 79747 AAAA MSZZQ 3AL 86612 AAAA MSZZQ 3AL 86617 AAAA MSZZQ
Id
NAME
App
ANV P/N (Factory P/N) 3AL 86638 AA (487 156 039) 3AL 86662 AA (483 100 286) 3AL 86612 AA (483 100 262) 3AL 86617 AA (487 156 957)
METRO OAMDX CONTROL BOARD
1 to 33
EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER
34
PBACONTROL SPVM
35, 36, 37
PBACONTROL LANC
38
END OF DOCUMENT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 390 / 390
LABELS AND ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS TARGHETTE E INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N:
3AL 95278 AAAA ED 01
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2 1696MSPAN Rel.2.2 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (PD1-PD2)
No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 392+4=396 DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du ks): 33.127 kBytes
INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE: HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY: No pagine (facciate) No pages TARGHETTE - LABELS frontespizio front 2 numerate numbered da from a to
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

Vedere lista da pagina: ALLEGATI DI UNIT (MSZZQ) See list from page: UNIT PRESETTING DOCUMENTS (MSZZQ) 390 TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES: TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS: WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY The documents MSZZQ cited in section HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION are stored in eMATRIX. Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format. Source file: ALICE 6.10 392 196 No documenti MSZZQ No documents MSZZQ 4 01 RELEASED 3AL 95278 AAAA TQZZA 4 Y 1/ 4
manuale manual
390
1/390
390/390
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
Site VIMERCATE
FCG
Originators C. GIANNI
1696MSPAN REL.2.2
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
Domain Division Rubric Type Distribution Codes
: : : :
OND WDM 1696 MS 1696MSPAN REL.2.2 TECHNICAL HDBK Internal : External :
Approvals Name App. F. BRUYERE D. LESTERLIN
Name App.
A. MICHAUD
INFORMAZIONI EDITORIALI ORIGINALE SU FILE: ALICE 6.10 sistemazione toc e figlist
I SEGUENTI DATI sono RIPORTATI IN AUTOMATICO SU ETICHETTE e FRONTALE
3AL 95278 AAAA

ED 01
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2
32 + 32 Channels DWDM System

1696MSPAN Rel.2.2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL. 1/1
ED
01
RELEASED 3AL 95278 AAAA TQZZA 4 Y 2/ 4
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

VOL.1/1
VOL.1/1
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK 3AL 95278 AAAA ED 01 VOL.1/1

1696MSPAN Rel.2.2 3AL 95278 AAAA ED 01 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK VOL.1/1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
VOL.1/1
ED
01
RELEASED 3AL 95278 AAAA TQZZA 4 Y 3/ 4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
RELEASED
FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT
3AL 95278 AAAA TQZZA
4/ 4

1696 Technical V2.2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1696 Technical V2.2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Handbook

3AL 95278 AAAA Ed.01

3AL 95278 AAAA Ed.01

1696MSPAN REL.2.2 TECHNICAL HDBK

041015 DATE CHANGE NOTE

D. LESTERLIN F. BRUYERE A.MICHAUD APPRAISAL AUTHORITY 1696MS Rel.2.2 Technical Handbook

01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 1 / 390

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 2 / 390

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 3 / 390

HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNIT DOCUMENTATION LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 4 / 390

309 310 312 312 313

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 5 / 390

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 6 / 390

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 7 / 390

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 8 / 390

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 9 / 390

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 10 / 390

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK 1.1 General information

1.2 Handbook applicability

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 13 / 390

1.3 Product-release handbooks

HANDBOOK 1696MSPAN Rel.2.2 Technical Handbook

ANV Part No.

FACTORY Part No.

3AL 95278 AAAA

ANV Part No.

FACTORY Part No.

1696MSPAN Rel.2.2 Operators Handbook [4]

3AL 95278 BAAA

Provides information regarding maintenance using the craft terminal

01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 14 / 390

ANV Part No.

1320CT 3.X Basic Operators Handbook [5]

3AL 79551 AAAA

3AL 88876 AAAA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 15 / 390

Table 4. Documentation on CDROM See para.6.5 on page 53

CDROM TITLE 1696MSPAN Rel.2.2 CDROMDOC EN

ANV Part No. 3AL 95279 AAAA

FACTORY Part No.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 16 / 390

1.4 Handbook Structure

APPENDICES: HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION: ANNEXES:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 17 / 390

1.5 Handbook configuration check

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 3AL 95278 AA AA 390 18 / 390

(TTamb) (DTmax + 25 Tmra)